Siemens Sitrans P DS III - Press. Trans. Manual

© Siemens AG 2018
Pressure Measurement
Transmitters for applications with advanced requirements (Advanced)
SITRANS P DS III
Technical description
■ Overview
1
SITRANS P DS III pressure transmitters are digital pressure • Infinitely adjustable span from 0.01 bar to 700 bar
transmitters featuring extensive user-friendliness and high accu- (0.15 psi to 10153 psi) for DS III with HART interface
racy. The parameterization is performed using control keys or via • Nominal measuring range from 1 bar to 700 bar
HART, PROFIBUS-PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface. (14.5 psi to 10153 psi) for DS III with PROFIBUS PA and
Extensive functionality enables the pressure transmitter to be FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface
precisely adapted to the plant’s requirements. Operation is very • High measuring accuracy
simple in spite of the numerous setting options. • Parameterization over control keys and HART or PROFIBUS
Transmitters with type of protection "Intrinsic safety" and "Explo- PA, or FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface.
sion-proof" may be installed within potentially explosive atmo-
spheres (zone 1) or in zone 0. The transmitters are provided with
an EC type examination certificate and comply with the corre-
■ Application
sponding harmonized European standards (ATEX). The pressure transmitters of the DS III series, can be used in in-
dustrial areas with extreme chemical and mechanical loads.
The transmitters can be equipped with various designs of re- Electromagnetic compatibility in the range 10 kHz to 1 GHz
mote seals for special applications such as the measurement of makes the DS III pressure transmitters suitable for locations with
highly viscous substances. high electromagnetic emissions.
Various versions of the DS III pressure transmitters are available Pressure transmitters with type of protection "Intrinsic safety" and
for measuring: "Explosion-proof" may be installed within potentially explosive at-
• Gauge pressure mospheres (zone 1) or in zone 0. The pressure transmitters are
• Absolute pressure provided with an EC type examination certificate and comply
with the corresponding harmonized European standards
• Differential pressure (ATEX).
• Level
Pressure transmitters with the type of protection "Intrinsic safety"
• Volume level for use in zone 0 may be operated with power supply units of cat-
• Mass level egory "ia" and "ib".
• Volume flow The transmitters can be equipped with various designs of re-
• Mass flow mote seals for special applications such as the measurement of
highly viscous substances.
■ Benefits The pressure transmitter can be programmed locally using the 3
• High quality and service life control buttons or externally via HART or PROFIBUS PA or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface.
• High reliability even under extreme chemical and mechanical
loads
• For aggressive and non-aggressive gases, vapors and liquids
• Extensive diagnosis and simulation functions
• Separate replacement of measuring cell and electronics with-
out recalibration
• Minimum conformity error
• Good long-term stability
• Wetted parts made of high-grade materials (e.g. stainless
steel, Hastelloy, gold, Monel, tantalum)
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/193

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1 Pressure transmitter for gauge pressure
■ Design
Measured variable: Gauge pressure of aggressive and non-ag-
gressive gases, vapors and liquids.
Span (infinitely adjustable) 1
for DS III with HART: 0.01 bar to 700 bar (0.15 psi to 10153 psi)
Nominal measuring range
for DS III with PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION Fieldbus: 2
1 bar to 700 bar (14.5 psi to 10153 psi)
Pressure transmitters for absolute pressure
Measured variable: Absolute pressure of aggressive and non- 8
aggressive gases, vapors and liquids.
Span (infinitely adjustable) 1 Plastic cover as access to
for DS III with HART: 8.3 mbar a ... 100 bar a (0.12 ... 1450 psi a) the input keys
2 Screw cover with
Nominal measuring range
viewing pane 3
for DS III with PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION Fieldbus: 3 Digital display
250 mbar a ... 100 bar a (3.6 ... 1450 psi a) 4 Locking screw 7
There are two series: 5 Process connection
6 Screw cover with
• Gauge pressure series viewing pane 6
• Differential pressure series 7 Rating plate
8 Inlet with cable gland 4
Pressure transmitters for differential pressure and flow 5
Measured variables:
• Differential pressure
Front view
• Small positive or negative pressure
• Flow q ~ p (together with a primary differential pressure de- The transmitter consists of various components depending on
vice (see Chapter "Flow Meters")) the order. The possible versions are listed in the ordering infor-
mation. The components described below are the same for all
Span (infinitely adjustable) transmitters.
for DS III with HART: 1 mbar ... 30 bar (0.0145 ... 435 psi)
The rating plate (7, Figure "Front view") with the Article No. is located
Nominal measuring range on the side of the housing. The specified number together with the
for DS III with PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION Fieldbus: ordering information provide details on the optional design details
20 mbar ... 30 bar (0.29 ... 435 psi) and on the possible measuring range (physical properties of built-in
sensor element).
Pressure transmitters for level
The approval label is located on the opposite side.
Measured variable: Level of aggressive and non-aggressive liq-
uids in open and closed vessels. The housing is made of die-cast aluminium or stainless steel pre-
cision casting. A round cover (6) is screwed on at the front and
Span (infinitely adjustable)
rear of the housing. The front cover can be fitted with a viewing
for DS III with HART: 25 mbar ... 5 bar (0.363 ... 72.5 psi)
pane so that the measured values can be read directly on the
Nominal measuring range display. The inlet (8) for the electrical connection is located either
for DS III with PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION Fieldbus: on the left or right side. The unused opening on the opposite side
250 mbar ... 5 bar (3.63 ... 72.5 psi) is sealed by a blanking plug. The protective earth connection is
located on the rear of the housing.
Nominal diameter of the mounting flange
• DN 80 or DN 100 The electrical connections for the power supply and screen are
accessible by unscrewing the rear cover. The bottom part of the
• 3 inch or 4 inch housing contains the measuring cell with process connection
In the case of level measurements in open containers, the low- (5). The measuring cell is prevented from rotating by a locking
pressure connection of the measuring cell remains open (mea- screw (4). As the result of this modular design, the measuring
surement "compared to atmospheric"). cell and the electronics can be replaced separately from each
other. The set parameter data are retained.
In the case of measurements in closed containers, the lower-
pressure connection has to be connected to the container in or- At the top of the housing is a plastic cover (1), which hides the
der to compensate the static pressure. input keys.
The wetted parts are made from a variety of materials, depend- Example for an attached measuring point label
ing on the degree of corrosion resistance required.
Y01 or Y02
= max. 27 char. .... to .... mbar
Y15 = max. 16 char.
Measuring point number (TAG No.)
Y99 = max. 10 char. 1234
Y16 = max. 27 char. Measuring point text
1/194 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
■ Function
1
Operation of electronics with HART communication Operation of electronics with PROFIBUS PA communication
9 9
8 8
0.0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0.0
M M
00 00
10
2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 7
μC IA, UH PA
μC
interface
Power supply
PROFIBUS-PA
7
10
HART interface
PROFIBUS DP
Power
EEPROM supply
6 unit
EEPROM Coup-
6
ler
Electronics Electronics
11
1 6 Bus-
1 6 12 Master
EEPROM
EEPROM
Sensor Sensor
pe Measuring cell pe
Measuring cell
1 Measuring cell sensor

2 Instrument amplifier 1 Measuring cell sensor 8 Three input keys
3 Analog-to-digital converter 2 Instrument amplifier (local operation)
4 Microcontroller 3 Analog-to-digital converter 9 Digital display
5 Digital-to-analog converter 4 Microcontroller 10 Power supply
6 One non-volatile memory each in the measuring cell and 5 Electrical isolation 11 DP/PA coupler or link
electronics 6 One non-volatile memory 12 Bus master
7 HART interface each in the measuring cell
8 Three input keys (local operation) and electronics pe Input variable
9 Digital display 7 PROFIBUS-PA interface
10 Diode circuit and connection for external ammeter
IA Output current
Function diagram of electronics
UH Power supply
Pe Input variable The bridge output voltage created by the sensor (1, Figure
"Function diagram of the electronics") is amplified by the mea-
suring amplifier (2) and digitized in the analog-to-digital con-
Function diagram of electronics verter (3). The digital information is evaluated in the microcon-
troller, its linearity and temperature response corrected, and
The bridge output voltage created by the sensor (1, Figure provided on the PROFIBUS PA through an electrically isolated
"Function diagram of the electronics") is amplified by the mea- PA interface (7).
suring amplifier (2) and digitized in the analog-to-digital con-
verter (3). The digital information is evaluated in a microcontrol- The data specific to the measuring cell, the electronics data, and
ler, its linearity and temperature response corrected, and the parameter data are stored in the two non-volatile memories
converted in a digital-to-analog converter (5) into an output cur- (6). The one memory is coupled to the measuring cell, the other
rent of 4 to 20 mA. to the electronics. As the result of this modular design, the elec-
tronics and the measuring cell can be replaced separately from
The diode circuit (10) protects against incorrect polarity. each other.
The data specific to the measuring cell, the electronics data, and Using the three input buttons (8) you can parameterize the pres-
the parameter data are stored in the two non-volatile memories sure transmitter directly at the measuring point. The input but-
(6). The one memory is coupled to the measuring cell, the other tons can also be used to control the view of the results, the error
to the electronics. As the result of this modular design, the elec- messages and the operating modes on the display (9).
tronics and the measuring cell can be replaced separately from
each other. The results with status values and diagnostic values are trans-
ferred by cyclic data transmission on the PROFIBUS PA. Para-
Using the 3 input keys (8) you can parameterize the pressure meterization data and error messages are transferred by acyclic
transmitter directly at the measuring point. The input buttons can data transmission. Special software such as SIMATIC PDM is re-
also be used to control the view of the results, the error mes- quired for this.
sages and the operating modes on the display (9).
The HART modem (7) permits parameterization using a protocol
according to the HART specification.
The pressure transmitters with spans  63 bar measure the input
pressure compared to atmosphere, transmitters with spans
 160 bar compared to vacuum.
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/195

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1 Operation of electronics with FOUNDATION Fieldbus com- Mode of operation of the measuring cells
munication
Measuring cell for gauge pressure
9
8
0.0.0.0.0
M
00
5
2 3 4 5 7 4
FF
μC interface 3
Foundation Fieldbus
1 1 Measuring cell
Power supply
2 Process connection
10
3 Seal diaphragm
Power
supply 4 Filling liquid
EEPROM
6 unit 5 Silicon pressure sensor
Coup-
pe Pressure as input variable
ler
2
Electronics
pe
1 6
EEPROM
Measuring cell for gauge pressure, function diagram

Sensor
The pressure pe is applied through the process connection (2,
Figure "Measuring cell for gauge pressure, function diagram) to
pe the measuring cell (1). This pressure is subsequently transmitted
Measuring cell further through the seal diaphragm (3) and the filling liquid (4) to
the silicon pressure sensor (5) whose measuring diaphragm is
then flexed. This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resis-
1 Measuring cell sensor 8 Three input keys
2 Instrument amplifier (local operation)
tors fitted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit. This change in re-
3 Analog-to-digital converter 9 Digital display
sistance results in a bridge output voltage proportional to the ab-
4 Microcontroller 10 Power supply solute pressure.
5 Electrical isolation Measuring cell for gauge pressure with front-flush diaphragm
6 One non-volatile memory pe Input variable
each in the measuring cell
and electronics
7 FF interface
Function diagram of electronics

5
The bridge output voltage created by the sensor (1, Figure 4
"Function diagram of electronics") is amplified by the measuring
amplifier (2) and digitized in the analog-to-digital converter (3). 1 1 Measuring cell
The digital information is evaluated in the microcontroller, its lin- 2 Process connection
earity and temperature response corrected, and provided on the 3 Seal diaphragm
FOUNDATION Fieldbus through an electrically isolated 4 Filling liquid
FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface (7). 5 Silicon pressure sensor
pe Pressure as input variable
The data specific to the measuring cell, the electronics data, and
2
the parameter data are stored in the two non-volatile memories
(6). The one memory is coupled to the measuring cell, the other 3
pe
to the electronics. As the result of this modular design, the elec-
tronics and the measuring cell can be replaced separately from Measuring cell for gauge pressure, with front-flush diaphragm for paper
each other. industry, function diagram
Using the three input buttons (8) you can parameterize the pres- The pressure pe is applied through the process connection (2,
sure transmitter directly at the measuring point. The input but- Figure "Measuring cell for gauge pressure, with front-flush dia-
tons can also be used to control the view of the results, the error phragm for paper industry, function diagram") to the measuring
messages and the operating modes on the display (9). cell (1). This pressure is subsequently transmitted further
The results with status values and diagnostic values are trans- through the seal diaphragm (3) and the filling liquid (4) to the sil-
ferred by cyclic data transmission on the FOUNDATION icon pressure sensor (5) whose measuring diaphragm is then
Fieldbus. Parameterization data and error messages are trans- flexed. This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resistors fit-
ferred by acyclic data transmission. Special software such as ted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit. This change in resis-
National Instruments Configurator is required for this. tance results in a bridge output voltage proportional to the abso-
lute pressure.
1/196 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
Measuring cell for absolute pressure from gauge pressure series Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow 1
2 3 4
1 Seal diaphragm
5 2 O-ring
4 3 Overload diaphragm
1 4 Silicon pressure sensor
3 1 - +
1 Measuring cell 5 Process flange
1 5
2 Process connection 6 Body of measuring cell
3 Seal diaphragm 7 Filling liquid
4 Filling liquid 7 6
5 Silicon absolute pressure
sensor
pe Absolute pressure as input Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow, function diagram
2 variable
pe The differential pressure is transmitted through the seal dia-
phragms (1, Figure "Measuring cell for differential pressure and
flow, function diagram") and the filling liquid (7) to the silicon
Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the pressure series, function pressure sensor (4).
diagram
The absolute pressure pe is transmitted through the seal dia- The measuring diaphragm is flexed by the applied differential
phragm (3, Figure "Measuring cell for absolute pressure from pressure. This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resistors
pressure series, gauge pressure, function diagram ") and the fill- fitted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit. This change in resis-
ing liquid (4) to the silicon absolute pressure sensor (5) whose tance results in a bridge output voltage proportional to the
measuring diaphragm is then flexed. This changes the resis- differential pressure.
tance of the four piezo-resistors fitted in the diaphragm in a An overload diaphragm is installed to provide protection from
bridge circuit. This change in resistance results in a bridge out- overloads. If the measuring limits are exceeded, the overload di-
put voltage proportional to the absolute pressure. aphragm (3) is flexed until the seal diaphragm rests on the body
Measuring cell for absolute pressure from differential pressure of the measuring cell (6), thus protecting the silicon pressure
series sensor from overloads.
Measuring cell for level
2 3 4 1 Reference vacuum
2 Overload diaphragm 3 4 5 6 7
3 Silicon pressure sensor
4 O-ring 2
5 5 Process flange 8
1 pe 6 Seal diaphragm +
6 7 Body of measuring cell -
8 Filling liquid
pe Absolute pressure as 1 10
8 7 input variable 9
1 Flange with tube 6 Silicon pressure sensor

Measuring cell for absolute pressure from differential pressure series, 2 Seal diaphragm on mounting 7 O-ring
function diagram flange 8 Process flange
3 Seal diaphragm 9 Filling liquid
The input pressure pe is transmitted through the seal diaphragm
4 Body of measuring cell 10 Capillary with filling liquid
(6, Figure "Measuring cell for absolute pressure from differential
5 Overload diaphragm of mounting flange
pressure series, function diagram") and the filling liquid (8) to the
silicon pressure sensor (3).
The difference in pressure between the input pressure pe and Measuring cell for level, function diagram
the reference vacuum (1) on the low-pressure side of the mea- The input pressure (hydrostatic pressure) acts hydraulically on
suring cell flexes the measuring diaphragm. This changes the the measuring cell through the seal diaphragm on the mounting
resistance of the four piezo-resistors fitted in the diaphragm in a flange (2, Figure "Measuring cell for level, function diagram").
bridge circuit. This change in resistance results in a bridge out- This differential pressure is subsequently transmitted further
put voltage proportional to the absolute pressure. through the measuring cell (3) and the filling liquid (9) to the sil-
An overload diaphragm is installed to provide protection from icon pressure sensor (6) whose measuring diaphragm is then
overloads. If the measuring limits are exceeded, the overload di- flexed.
aphragm (2) is flexed until the seal diaphragm rests on the body This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resistors fitted in
of the measuring cell (7), thus protecting the silicon pressure the diaphragm in a bridge circuit.
sensor from overloads.
This change in resistance results in a bridge output voltage pro-
portional to the differential pressure.
An overload diaphragm is installed to provide protection from
overloads. If the measuring limits are exceeded, the overload di-
aphragm (5) is flexed until the seal diaphragm rests on the body
of the measuring cell (4), thus protecting the silicon pressure
sensor from overloads.
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/197

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1 Parameterization DS III Diagnostic functions for DS III with HART
Depending on the version, there are a range of options for pa- • Zero correction display
rameterizing the pressure transmitter and for setting or scanning • Event counter
the parameters. • Limit transmitter
Parameterization using the input buttons (local operation) • Saturation alarm
With the input buttons you can easily set the most important pa- • Slave pointer
rameters without any additional equipment. • Simulation functions
Parameterization using HART • Maintenance timer
Parameterization using HART is performed with a HART Com- Available physical units of display for DS III with HART
municator or a PC.
Table style: Technical specifications 2
Physical variable Physical dimensions
+
Pressure (setting can also be Pa, MPa, kPa, bar, mbar, torr, atm, psi,
made in the factory) g/cm2, kg/cm2, inH2O, inH2O (4 °C),
SITRANS P 230 ... 1100 Ω Power supply mmH2O, ftH2O (20 °C), inHg, mmHg
transmitter Level (height data) m, cm, mm, ft, in
HART Volume m3, dm3, hl, yd3, ft3, in3, US gallon, lmp.
communicator gallon, bushel, barrel, barrel liquid
Mass g, kg, t, lb, Ston, Lton, oz
volume flow m3/d, m3/h, m3/s, l/min, l/s, ft3/d, ft3/min,
Communication between a HART Communicator and a pressure transmitter ft3/s, US gallon/min, US gallon/s
When parameterizing with the HART Communicator, the connec- Mass flow t/d, t/h, t/min, kg/d, kg/h, kg/min, kg/s,
tion is made directly to the 2-wire cable. g/d, g/h, g/min, g/s, lb/d, lb/h, lb/min, lb/s,
LTon/d, LTon/h, STon/d, STon/h, STon/min
Temperature K, °C, °F, °R
+
-
Miscellaneous %, mA
SITRANS P 230 ... 500 Ω Power supply Parameterization through PROFIBUS PA interface
transmitter Fully digital communication through PROFIBUS PA, profile 3.0, is
PC or particularly user-friendly. Through the PROFIBUS the DS III with
HART laptop
PROFIBUS PA is connected to a process control system, e. g.
modem
SIMATIC PSC 7. Communication is possible even in a potentially
explosive environment.
USB/RS 232
For parameterization through PROFIBUS you need suitable soft-
ware, e.g. SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager).
HART communication between a PC communicator and a pressure
transmitter
Parameterization through FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface
When parameterizing with a PC, the connection is made through Fully digital communication through FOUNDATION Fieldbus is
a HART modem. particularly user-friendly. Through the FOUNDATION Fieldbus
the DS III with FOUNDATION Fieldbus is connected to a process
The signals needed for communication in conformity with the control system. Communication is possible even in a potentially
HART 5.x or 6.x protocols are superimposed on the output cur- explosive environment.
rent using the Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) method.
For parameterization through the FOUNDATION Fieldbus you
Adjustable parameters, DS III with HART need suitable software, e.g. National Instruments Configurator.
Parameters Input keys HART Adjustable parameters for DS III with PROFIBUS PA and
(DS III HART) communication FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Start of scale x x
Full-scale value x x
Parameters Input PROFIBUS PA and
Electrical damping x x keys FOUNDATION Field-
Start-of-scale value without applica- x x bus interface
tion of a pressure ("Blind setting")
Full-scale value without application x x Electrical damping x x
of a pressure ("Blind setting") Zero adjustment (correction of posi- x x
Zero adjustment x x tion)
current transmitter x x Buttons and/or function disabling x x
Fault current x x
Source of measured-value display x x
Disabling of buttons, write protec- x x1)
tion Physical dimension of display x x
Type of dimension and actual x x Position of decimal point x x
dimension
Characteristic (linear / square- x2) x2) Bus address x x
rooted) Adjustment of characteristic x x
Input of characteristic x
Freely-programmable LCD x Input of characteristic x
Diagnostic functions x Freely-programmable LCD x
1) Cancel apart from write protection Diagnostics functions x
2) Only differential pressure
1/198 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
Diagnostic functions for DS III with PROFIBUS PA and 1
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
• Event counter
• Slave pointer
• Maintenance timer
• Simulation functions
• Display of zero correction
• Limit transmitter
• Saturation alarm
Physical dimensions available for the display
Physical variable Physical dimensions
Pressure (setting can also be MPa, kPa, Pa, bar, mbar, torr, atm, psi,
made in the factory) g/cm2, kg/cm2, mmH2O, mmH2O (4 °C),
inH2O, inH20 (4 °C), ftH2O (20 °C),
mmHg, inHg
Level (height data) m, cm, mm, ft, in, yd
Volume m3, dm3, hl, yd3, ft3, in3, US gallon, lmp.
gallon, bushel, barrel, barrel liquid
volume flow m3/s, m3/min, m3/h, m3/d, l/s, l/min, l/h, l/
d, Ml/d, ft3/s, ft3/min, ft3/h, ft3/d, US gal-
lon/s, US gallon/min, US gallon/h, US gal-
lon/d, bbl/s, bbl/min, bbl/h, bbl/d
Mass flow g/s, g/min, g/h, g/d, kg/s, kg/min, kg/h,
kg/d, t/s, t/min, t/h, /t/d, lb/s, lb/min, lb/h,
lb/d, STon/s, STon/min, STon/h, STon/d,
LTon/s, LTon/min, LTon/h, LTon/d
Total mass flow t, kg, g, lb, oz, LTon, STon
Temperature K, °C, °F, °R
Miscellaneous %
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/199

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
1 ■ Technical specifications
SITRANS P, DS III series for gauge pressure
Input
Measured variable Gauge pressure
Span (fully adjustable) or measuring range, max. operating HART PROFIBUS PA/
pressure (in accordance with 2014/68/EU Pressure Equipment FOUNDATION
Directive) and max. test pressure (pursuant to DIN 16086) Fieldbus
(for oxygen measurement, max. 100 bar/10 MPa/1450 psi and Span Nominal measuring Max. operating pres- Max. perm.
60 °C (140 °F) ambient temperature/process temperature) range sure MAWP (PS) test pressure
8.3 ... 250 mbar 250 mbar 4 bar 6 bar
0.83 ... 25 kPa 25 kPa 400 kPa 600 kPa
0.12 ... 3.6 psi 3.6 psi 58 psi 87 psi
0.01 ... 1 bar 1 bar 4 bar 6 bar
1 ... 100 kPa 100 kPa 400 kPa 600 kPa
0.15 ... 14.5 psi 14.5 psi 58 psi 87 psi
0.04 ... 4 bar 4 bar 7 bar 10 bar
4 ... 400 kPa 400 kPa 0.7 MPa 1 MPa
0.58 ... 58 psi 58 psi 102 psi 145 psi
0.16 ... 16 bar 16 bar 21 bar 32 bar
16 ... 1600 kPa 1600 kPa 2.1 MPa 3.2 MPa
2.3 ... 232 psi 232 psi 305 psi 464 psi
0.63 ... 63 bar 63 bar 67 bar 100 bar
63 ... 6300 kPa 6300 kPa 6.7 MPa 10 MPa
9.1 ... 914 psi 914 psi 972 psi 1450 psi
1.6 ... 160 bar 160 bar 167 bar 250 bar
0.16 ... 16 MPa 16 MPa 16.7 MPa 25 MPa
23 ... 2321 psi 2321 psi 2422 psi 3626 psi
4 ... 400 bar 400 bar 400 bar 600 bar
0.4 ... 40 MPa 40 MPa 40 MPa 60 MPa
58 ... 5802 psi 5802 psi 5802 psi 8702 psi
7 ... 700 bar 700 bar 800 bar 800 bar
0.7 ... 70 MPa 70 MPa 80 MPa 80 MPa
102 ... 10153 psi 10153 psi 11603 psi 11603 psi
Lower measuring limit
(for 250mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi measuring cells, the lower mea-
suring limit is 750 mbar a/75 kPa a/10.8 psi a. The measuring
cell is vacuum-resistant upt to 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a.)
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
• Measuring cell with inert filling liquid 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. span (max. 100 bar/10 MPa/1450 psi for oxygen measurement)
ambient temperature/process temperature 60 °C (140 °F)
Output HART PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA Digital PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION
Fieldbus signal
• Lower limit (infinitely adjustable) 3.55 mA, factory preset to 3.84 mA -
• Upper limit (infinitely adjustable) 23 mA, factory preset to 20.5 mA or -
optionally set to 22.0 mA
Load
• Without HART RB  (UH - 10.5 V)/0.023 A in , -
UH: Power supply in V
• With HART RB = 230 ... 500  (SIMATIC PDM) bzw. -
RB = 230 ... 1100  (HART-Communicator)
Physical bus - IEC 61158-2
Protection against polarity reversal Protected against short-circuit and polarity reversal.
Each connection against the other with max. supply voltage.
Electrical damping (step width 0.1 s) Set to 2 s (0 ... 100 s)
1/200 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
SITRANS P, DS III series for gauge pressure
1
Measuring accuracy Acc. to IEC 60770-1
Reference conditions • Increasing characteristic
• Start-of-scale value 0 bar/kPa/psi
• Stainless steel seal diaphragm
• Silicone oil filling
• Room temperature 25 °C (77 °F)
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span or nom. pressure range
Error in measurement at limit setting incl. hysteresis and
reproducibility
• Linear characteristic
- 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi r  1.25 :  0.065 %
1.25 < r  30 :  (0.008  r + 0.055) %
- 1 bar/100 kPa/3.6 psi r5:  0.065 %
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi 5 < r  100 :  (0.004  r + 0.045) %
16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
- 400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi r3:  0.075 %
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi 3 < r  10 :  (0.0029  r + 0.071) %
10 < r  100 :  (0.005  r + 0.05) %
Influence of ambient temperature
(in percent per 28 °C (50 °F))
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi  (0.16  r + 0.1) %
• 1 bar/100 kPa/3.6 psi  (0.05  r + 0.1) %
• 4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi  (0.025  r + 0.125) %
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
• 700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi  (0.08  r + 0.16) %
Long-term stability (temperature change  30 °C ( 54 °F))
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi  (0.25  r) % per year
• 1 bar/100 kPa/3.6 psi  (0.25  r) % in 5 years
4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi
• 16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi  (0.125  r) % in 5 years
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
• 700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi  (0.25  r) % in 5 years
Effect of mounting position  0.05 mbar/0.005 kPa/0.000725 psi per 10° inclination
(zero point correction is possible with position error compensation)
Effect of auxiliary power supply 0.005 % per 1 V
(in percent per change in voltage)
Measuring value resolution for PROFIBUS PA and 3  10-5 of nominal measuring range
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/201

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
1 SITRANS P, DS III series for gauge pressure
Rated conditions
Degree of protection
• according to EN 60529 IP66 (optional IP66/IP68)
• according to NEMA 250 Type 4X
Temperature of medium
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -40 ... +100 °C (-40 ... +212 °F)
• Measuring cell with inert filling liquid
- 1 bar/100 kPa/3.6 psi -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
- 160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi -20 ... +100 °C (-4 ... +212 °F)
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi
• Measuring cell with Neobee fill fluid (FDA-compliant) -10 ... +100 °C (+14 ... +212 °F)
• In conjunction with dust explosion protection -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F)
Ambient conditions
• Ambient temperature (silicone oil and inert oil)
- Transmitter -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
- Display readable -30 ... +85 °C (-22 ... +185 °F)
• Ambient temperature (Neobee fill fluid)
- Transmitter -10 ... +85 °C (+14 ... +185 °F)
• Storage temperature -50 ... +85 °C (-58 ... +185 °F)
• Climatic class
- Condensation Relative humidity 0 ... 100 %/Condensation permissible, suitable for use in the tropics
• Electromagnetic Compatibility
- Emitted interference and interference immunity Acc. to IEC 61326 and NAMUR NE 21
Design
Weight (without options) Die-cast aluminum:  2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb)
Stainless steel precision casting:  4.6 kg ( 10.1 lb)
Enclosure material Low-copper die-cast aluminum, GD-AlSi 12 or stainless steel precision casting,
mat. no. 1.4408
Wetted parts materials
• Connection shank Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L or Hastelloy C4, mat. no. 2.4602
• Oval flange Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
• Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L or Hastelloy C276, mat. no. 2.4819
Measuring cell filling Silicone oil or inert filling liquid (maximum value with oxygen measurement pressure
100 bar (1450 psi) at 60 °C (140 °F))
Process connection Connection shank G½B to DIN EN 837-1, female thread ½ -14 NPT or oval flange
(PN 160 (MAWP 2320 psi)) to DIN 19213 with mounting thread M10 or 7/16-20 UNF
to IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518
Material of mounting bracket
• Steel Sheet-steel, Mat. No. 1.0330, chrome-plated
• Stainless steel 304 Sheet stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4301 (SS 304)
• Stainless steel 316L Sheet stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404 (SS 316L)
Power supply UH HART PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Terminal voltage on transmitter 10.5 ... 45 V DC -
10.5 ... 30 V DC in intrinsically-safe mode
Power supply - Supplied through bus
Separate 24 V power supply - Not necessary
Bus voltage
• Not Ex - 9 ... 32 V
• With intrinsically-safe operation - 9 ... 24 V
Current consumption
• Basic current (max.) - 12.5 mA
• Start-up current  basic current - Yes
• Max. current in event of fault - 15.5 mA
Fault disconnection electronics (FDE) available - Yes
1/202 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
SITRANS P, DS III series for gauge pressure HART PROFIBUS PA/ FOUNDATION Fieldbus
1
Certificates and approvals
Classification according to PED 2014/68/EU For gases of fluid group 1 and liquids of fluid group 1; complies with requirements of
article 4, paragraph 3 (sound engineering practice)
Explosion protection
• Intrinsic safety "i" PTB 13 ATEX 2007 X
- Marking Ex II 1/2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T4/T5/T6 Ga/Gb
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F) temperature class T4;
-40 ... +70 °C (-40 ... +158 °F) temperature class T5;
-40 ... +60 °C (-40 ... +140 °F) temperature class T6
- Connection To certified intrinsically-safe circuits with FISCO supply unit:
peak values: Uo = 17.5 V, Io = 380 mA, Po = 5.32 W
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Linear barrier:
Pi = 750 mW; Ri = 300  Uo = 24 V, Io = 174 mA, Po = 1 W
- Effective internal inductance/capacitance L i = 0.4 mH, Ci = 6 nF L i = 7 H, Ci = 1.1 nF
• Explosion-proof "d" PTB 99 ATEX 1160
- Marking Ex II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T4/T6 Gb
- Connection To circuits with values: To circuits with values:
UH = 10.5 ... 45 V DC UH = 9 ... 32 V DC
• Dust explosion protection for zone 20 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Marking Ex II 1 D Ex ta IIIC T120°C Da
Ex II 1/2 D Ex ta/tb IIIC T120°C Da/Db
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
- Max. surface temperature 120 °C (248 °F)
Pi = 750 mW, Ri = 300  Uo = 24 V, Io = 250 mA, Po = 1 W
• Dust explosion protection for zone 21/22 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Marking Ex II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T120°C Db
UH = 10.5 ... 45 V DC; Pmax = 1.2 W UH = 9 ... 32 V DC; Pmax = 1 W
• Type of protection "n" (zone 2) PTB 13 ATEX 2007 X
- Marking Ex II 2/3 G Ex nA IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb/Gc
Ex II 2/3 G Ex ic IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb/Gc
- Connection (Ex nA) Um = 45 V Um = 32 V
- Connections (Ex ic) To circuits with values: FISCO supply unit ic:
Ui = 45 V Uo = 17.5 V, Io = 570 mA
Linear barrier:
Uo = 32 V, Io = 132 mA, Po = 1 W
• Explosion protection acc. to FM Certificate of Compliance 3008490
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS); (NI) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; CL I, ZN 0/1 AEx ia IIC
T4...T6; CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
• Explosion protection to CSA Certificate of Compliance 1153651
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; Ex ia IIC T4...T6; CL I,
DIV 2, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/203

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
1 HART communication FOUNDATION Fieldbus
communication
HART 230 ... 1100 
Function blocks 3 function blocks analog input,
Protocol HART Version 5.x 1 function block PID
Software for computer SIMATIC PDM • Analog input
PROFIBUS PA communication - Adaptation to customer-specif- Yes, linearly rising or falling
Simultaneous communication with 4 ic process variables characteristic
master class 2 (max.) - Electrical damping, adjustable 0 ... 100 s
The address can be set using Configuration tool or local opera- - Simulation function Output/input (can be locked
tion (standard setting address within the device with a bridge)
126)
- Failure mode parameterizable (last good
Cyclic data usage value, substitute value, incorrect
• Output byte 5 (one measured value) or value)
10 (two measured values) - Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warn-
• Input byte 0, 1, or 2 (register operating ing limit and one alarm limit
mode and reset function for respectively
metering) - Square-rooted characteristic Yes
Internal preprocessing for flow measurement
Device profile PROFIBUS PA Profile for Pro- • PID Standard FOUNDATION
cess Control Devices Version Fieldbus function block
3.0, class B • Physical block 1 resource block
Function blocks 2 Transducer blocks 1 transducer block Pressure with
• Analog input calibration, 1 transducer block
LCD
- Adaptation to customer-specif- Yes, linearly rising or falling
ic process variables characteristic • Pressure transducer block
- Electrical damping, adjustable 0 ... 100 s - Can be calibrated by applying Yes
two pressures
- Simulation function Input /Output
- Monitoring of sensor limits Yes
value, substitute value, incorrect - Simulation function: Measured Constant value or over parame-
value) pressure value, sensor tem- terizable ramp function
perature and electronics tem-
- Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warn- perature
ing limit and one alarm limit
respectively
• Register (totalizer) Can be reset, preset, optional
direction of counting, simulation
function of register output
- Failure mode parameterizable (summation
with last good value, continuous
summation, summation with
incorrect value)
- Limit monitoring One upper and lower warning
limit and one alarm limit respec-
tively
• Physical block 1
Transducer blocks 2
• Pressure transducer block
- Can be calibrated by applying Yes
two pressures
- Specification of a container Max. 30 nodes
characteristic with
- Square-rooted characteristic Yes
for flow measurement
- Gradual volume suppression Parameterizable
and implementation point of
square-root extraction
- Simulation function for mea- Constant value or over parame-
sured pressure value and sen- terizable ramp function
sor temperature
1/204 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
Selection and Ordering data Article No. Selection and Ordering data Article No.
1
Pressure transmitter for gauge pressure, 7MF 4 0 3 3 - Pressure transmitter for gauge pressure, 7MF 4 0 3 3 -
SITRANS P DS III with HART SITRANS P DS III with HART
77777 - 7777 77777 - 7777
Click on the Article No. for the online configu- Explosion protection
ration in the PIA Life Cycle Portal. • None A
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell clean- • With ATEX, Type of protection:
ing - "Intrinsic safety (Ex ia)" B
Silicone oil normal 1 - "Explosion-proof (Ex d)"8) D
Inert liquid 1) grease-free to 3 - "Intrinsic safety and flameproof enclosure" P
cleanliness level 2 (Ex ia + Ex d)"9)
FDA compliant fill fluid2) - "Ex nA/ic (Zone 2)"10) E
• Neobee oil normal 4 - "Intrinsic safety, explosion-proof enclosure R
and dust explosion protection (Ex ia + Ex d +
Measuring span (min. ... max.) Zone 1D/2D)"8)11)
8.3 ... 250 mbar (0.12 ... 3.6 psi) A • FM + CSA intrinsic safe (is)12) F
0.01 ... 1 bar (0.15 ... 14.5 psi) B • FM + CSA (is + ep) + Ex ia + Ex d (ATEX) + S
0.04 ... 4 bar (0.58 ... 58 psi) C Zone 1D/2D9)11)12)
0.16 ... 16 bar (2.32 ... 232 psi) D • With FM + CSA, Type of protection:
0.63 ... 63 bar (9.14 ... 914 psi) E - "Intrinsic Safe and Explosion Proof NC
1.6 ... 160 bar (23.2 ... 2320 psi) F (is + xp)"7)12)
4.0 ... 400 bar (58.0 ... 5802 psi) G Electrical connection / cable entry
7.0 ... 700 bar (102.0 ...10153 psi) J • Screwed gland M20 x1 .5 B
Wetted parts materials • Screwed gland ½-14 NPT C
Seal diaphragm Process connection • Han 7D device plug (plastic housing) incl. D
mating connector13)
Stainless steel Stainless steel A
• M12 device plugs (stainless steel)13)14) F
Hastelloy Stainless steel B
Hastelloy Hastelloy C Display
Version for diaphragm seals in conjunction with Y1 • Without display 0
process connector "female thread ½-14 NPT" • Without visible display 1
(recommended version) 3) 4) 5) 6) (display concealed, setting: mA)
Version for diaphragm seals in conjunction Y0 • With visible display (setting: mA) 6
with process connector "G½B connection
shank"" 3) 4) 5) 6) • with customer-specific display (setting as 7
specified, Order code "Y21" or "Y22" required)
Process connection
• Connection shank G½B to EN 837-1 0 Power supply units see Chap. 7 "Supplementary Components".
• Female thread ½-14 NPT 1 A quick-start guide is included in the scope of delivery of the device.
• Stainless steel oval flange with process con-
1) For oxygen application, add Order code E10.
nection (Oval flange has no female thread)
2) Available for measuring ranges 1 ... 63 bar.
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 2
3) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518
ordered for transmitters with diaphragm seals according to IEC 60770-2, it
- Mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 3 is recommended only to order this certificate exclusively with the dia-
- Mounting thread M12 to DIN 19213 4 phragm seals. The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified
• Male thread M20 x 1.5 5 here.
4) If the acceptance test certificate 3.1.is ordered for the transmitter with
• Male thread ½ -14 NPT 6
mounted diaphragm seals this certificate must also be ordered with the
Non-wetted parts materials respective remote seals.
5) The diaphragm seal is to be specified with a separate order number and
• Housing made of die-cast aluminium 0
• Housing stainless steel precision casting7) 3 must be included with the transmitter order number, for example
7MF403.-..Y..-.... and 7MF4900-1...-.B
Version 6) The standard measuring cell filling of configurations with remote seals (Y)
• Standard version, German plate inscription, 1 is silicone oil.

7) Not in conjunction with Electrical connection "Han 7D device plug".
setting for pressure unit: bar
8) Without cable gland, with blanking plug
• International version, English plate inscription, 2
9) With enclosed cable gland Ex ia and blanking plug
10) Configurations with Han and M12 device plugs are only available in Ex ic.
• Chinese version, English plate inscription, 3 11) Only in connection with IP66.
setting for pressure unit: Pascal
12) Explosion protection acc. to FM/CSA: suitable for installations according to
All versions include DVD with compact operat-
NEC 500/505.
ing instructions in various EU languages. 13) Only in connection with Ex approval A, B or E.
14) M12 delivered without cable socket
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/205

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
1 Selection and Ordering data Article No. Selection and Ordering data Article No.
Pressure transmitter for gauge pressure Pressure transmitter for gauge pressure
SITRANS P DS III with PROFIBUS PA (PA) 7MF 4 0 3 4 - SITRANS P DS III with PROFIBUS PA (PA) 7MF 4 0 3 4 -
SITRANS P DS III with FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FF) 7MF 4 0 3 5 - SITRANS P DS III with FOUNDATION Fieldbus (FF) 7MF 4 0 3 5 -
Click on the Article No. for the online configu- 77777 - 7777 77777 - 7777
ration in the PIA Life Cycle Portal.
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell clean- A
ing • None
Silicone oil normal 1 • With ATEX, Type of protection:
Inert liquid1) grease-free to 3 - "Intrinsic safety (Ex ia)" B
cleanliness level 2 - "Explosion-proof (Ex d)"8) D
FDA compliant fill fluid2) - "Intrinsic safety and flameproof enclosure" P
• Neobee oil normal 4 (Ex ia + Ex d)"9)
Nominal measuring range - "Ex nA/ic (Zone 2)"10) E
250 mbar (3.6 psi) A - "Intrinsic safety, explosion-proof enclosure and R
dust explosion protection (Ex ia + Ex d +
1 bar (14.5 psi) B Zone 1D/2D)"9) 11)
4 bar (58 psi) C • FM + CSA intrinsic safe (is)12) F
16 bar (232 psi) D
63 bar (914 psi) E • FM + CSA (is + ep) + Ex ia + Ex d (ATEX) + S
Zone 1D/2D9)11)12)
160 bar (2320 psi) F
400 bar (5802 psi) G • With FM + CSA, Type of protection:
700 bar (10153 psi) J - "Intrinsic Safe and Explosion Proof NC
(is + xp)"7)12)
Electrical connection/cable entry
Seal diaphragm Process connection
• Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 B
Stainless steel Stainless steel A • Screwed gland ½-14 NPT C
Hastelloy Stainless steel B • M12 device plugs (stainless steel)13)14) F
Hastelloy Hastelloy C
Display
Version for diaphragm seals in conjunction with Y1
process connector "female thread ½-14 NPT" • Without display 0
(recommended version) 3) 4) 5) 6) • Without visible display (display concealed, 1
Version for diaphragm seals in conjunction Y0 setting: bar)
with process connector • With visible display (setting: bar) 6
"G½B connection shank"" 3) 4) 5) 6) • with customer-specific display (setting as spec- 7
Process connection ified, Order code "Y21" required)
• Connection shank G½B to EN 837-1 0 A quick-start guide is included in the scope of delivery of the device.
• Female thread ½-14 NPT 1 1) For oxygen application, add Order code E10.
• Stainless steel oval flange with process connec- 2) Available for measuring ranges 1 ... 63 bar.
tion (Oval flange has no female thread) 7) 3) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 2 ordered for transmitters with diaphragm seals according to IEC 60770-2, it
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518 is recommended only to order this certificate exclusively with the dia-
- Mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 3 phragm seals. The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified
- Mounting thread M12 to DIN 19213 4 here.
• Male thread M20 x 1.5 5
• Male thread ½ -14 NPT 6 respective remote seals.
Non-wetted parts materials
must be included with the transmitter order number, for example
• Housing made of die-cast aluminium 0 7MF403.-..Y..-.... and 7MF4900-1...-.B
• Housing stainless steel precision casting 3 6) The standard measuring cell filling of configurations with remote seals (Y)
Version is silicone oil.

7) M10 fastening thread: Max. span 160 bar (2320 psi)
• Standard version, German label inscription, 1 7/16-20 UNF and M12 fastening thread: Max. span 400 bar (5802 psi)
setting of pressure unit: bar 8) Without cable gland, with blanking plug.
• International version, English label inscription, 2 9) With enclosed cable gland Ex ia and blanking plug.
setting of pressure unit: psi 10) Configurations with Han and M12 device plugs are only available in Ex ic.
• Chinese version, English label inscription, 3 11) Only in connection with IP66.
setting of pressure unit: kPa 12) Explosion protection acc. to FM/CSA: suitable for installations according to
All versions include DVD with compact operating NEC 500/505.
instructions in various EU languages. 13) M12 delivered without cable socket.
14) Only in connection with Ex approval A, B, E or F.
1/206 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
Selection and Ordering data Order code Selection and Ordering data Order code
1
Further designs HART PA FF Further designs HART PA FF
Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order
code. code.
Pressure transmitter with mounting CRN approval Canada E226)   
bracket (1x fixing angle, 2 x nut, 2 x U- (Canadian Registration Number)
washer or 1 x bracket, 2 x nut, 2 x U-
washer) made of: Dual seal E24   
• Steel A01    Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" (Ex ia) E257)   
• Stainless steel 304 A02    to INMETRO (Brazil)
• Stainless steel 316L A03    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
Device plugs1)
"Flameproof" explosion protection E267)   
• Han 7D (metal) A30  according to INMETRO (Brazil)
• Han 8D (instead of Han 7D) A31  (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
• Angled A32 
Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" (Ex ia E287)  
• Han 8D (metal) A33  + Ex d) to INMETRO (Brazil)
Cable sockets for M12 device plugs A50    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.P..)
(metal (CuZn))
Ex Approval IEC Ex (Ex ia) E457)   
Rating plate inscription
(instead of German) (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
• English B11    Ex Approval IEC Ex (Ex d) E467)   
• French B12    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
• Spanish B13    Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" to E57)   
• Italian B14    NEPSI (China)
• Cyrillic (russian) B16    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
English rating plate B21    Explosion protection "Explosion-proof" E567)   
Pressure units in inH20 and/or psi to NEPSI (China)
Quality Inspection Certificate (5-point C11    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
characteristic curve test) according to Ex protection "Zone 2" to NEPSI (China) E577)   
IEC 60770-22) (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.E..)
Inspection certificate3) C12   
Ex protection „Ex ia", „Ex d" and E587)   
Acc. to EN 10204-3.1 „Zone 2" to NEPSI (China)
Factory certificate C14    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.R..)
Acc. to EN 10204-2.2 "Intrinsic safety" and "Explosion-proof" E707)   
Acceptance certificate (EN 10204-3.1) C15    explosion protection acc. to Kosha (Korea)
PMI test of parts in contact with medium (only for transmitter
Functional safety (SIL2) C20  7MF4...-.....-.[B, D]..-Z + E11)
Devices suitable for use according to Ex-protection Ex ia according to EAC Ex E80   
IEC 61508 and IEC 61511. Includes SIL (Russia)
conformity declaration (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
Functional safety (PROFIsafe) C214)  Ex-protection Ex d according to EAC Ex E81   
Certificate and PROFIsafe protocol (Russia)
Functional safety (SIL2/3) C23  (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
Devices suitable for use according to Ex-protection Ex nA/ic (Zone 2) according E82   
IEC 61508 and IEC 61511. Includes SIL to EAC Ex (Russia)
conformity declaration (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.E..)
PED for Russia with initial calibration C99    Ex-protection Ex ia + Ex d + Zone 1D/2D E83   
mark
according to EAC Ex (Russia)
Setting of the upper saturation limit of D05  (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.R..)
the output signal to 22.0 mA
Two coats of lacquer on casing and G10   
Manufacturer's declaration acc. to NACE D07    cover (PU on epoxy)
(MR 0103-2012 and MR 0175-2009)
Transient protector 6 kV (lightning pro- J01   
Degree of protection IP66/IP68 D12    tection)
(only for M20x1.5 and ½-14 NPT)
Process connection Astava J06   
Supplied with oval flange D37   
(1 item), PTFE packing and screws in
thread of oval flange
Capri cable gland 4F CrNi and clamping D59   
device (848699 + 810634) included
Use in or on zone 1D/2D5) E01   
(only together with type of protection
"Intrinsic safety" (transmitter
7MF4...-.....-.B.. Ex ia)" and IP66)
Oxygen application E10   
(In the case of oxygen measurement and
inert liquid max. 100 bar (1450 psi) at 60°C
(140 °F))
Export approval Korea E11   
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/207

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
1 Selection and Ordering data Order code Selection and Ordering data Order code
Further designs HART PA FF Additional data HART PA FF
Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order Please add "-Z" to Article No. and specify
code. Order code(s) and plain text.
Marine approvals Measuring range to be set Y01  1)
• Det Norske Veritas S10    Specify in plain text (max. 5 characters):
Germanischer Lloyd (DNV-GL) Y01: ... up to ... mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi
• Lloyds Register (LR) S11    Stainless steel tag plate and entry in Y152)   
device variable (measuring point
• French marine classification society S12    description)
Bureau Veritas (BV)
Max. 16 characters, specify in plain text:
• American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) S14    Y15: ...........................................
• Russian Maritime Register (RMR) S16    Measuring point text (entry in device Y16   
variable)
• Korean Register of Shipping (KR) S17   
Max. 27 characters, specify in plain text:
1) Han device plug IP65 Y16: ...........................................
2) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be Entry of HART address (TAG) Y17 
is recommended only to order this certificate exclusively with the dia- Max. 8 characters, specify in plain text:
phragm seals. The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified Y17: ...........................................
here. Setting of pressure indication in pres- Y21   
3) If the acceptance test certificate 3.1.is ordered for the transmitter with sure units
mounted diaphragm seals this certificate must also be ordered with the Specify in plain text (standard setting: bar):
respective remote seals.
Y21: mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi, ...
4) Profisafe transmitters can only be operated with the S7 F Systems V6.1 Note:
configuration software in combination with S7-400H The following pressure units can be
5) Option does not contain gas explosion protection; only dust explosion pro- selected:
tection: Use in or at Zone 1D/2D. bar, mbar, mm H2O*), inH2O*), ftH2O*),
6) Cannot be ordered with remote seal. mmHG, inHG, psi, Pa, kPa, MPa, g/cm2,
7) When the additional ex option is selected, the ATEX marking on the device kg/cm2, Torr, ATM or %
is omitted. Only the Ex option selected via the Z option is marked. *) ref. temperature 20 °C
Setting of pressure indication in Y22 + 
non-pressure units3) Y01
Specify in plain text:
Y22: ..... up to ..... l/min, m3/h, m, USgpm, ...
(specification of measuring range in pres-
sure units "Y01" is essential, unit with max. 5
characters)
Preset bus address Y25  
possible between 1 and 126
Specify in plain text:
Y25: .....................
Damping adjustment in seconds Y30   
(0 ... 100 s)
Only Y01, Y15, Y16, Y17, Y21, Y22, Y25 and D05 can be factory preset
 = available
Ordering example
Item line: 7MF4033-1EA00-1AA7-Z
B line: A01 + Y01 + Y21
C line: Y01: 10 ... 20 bar (145 ... 290 psi)
C line: Y21: bar (psi)
1) Measuring accuracies for PROFIBUS PA transmitters with Option Y01 are

calculated in the same way as for HART devices.
2) If you do not wish to have any text engraved for Y15, then do not make any
further text entries as "Y15:".
3) Preset values can only be changed over SIMATIC PDM.
1/208 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for gauge pressure
■ Dimensional drawings
1
15 143 (5.6) 54 (2.13) 5
(0.94)
(0.6) 74 (2.9) 53 (2.1) 27 approx. 96 (3.78) 17 (0.67) 29 (1.14) 84 (3.31)
24
1 (1.1)
50 (1.97)
2 6
Ø80 (3.15)
117 (4.61)
3 4 3 7
176 (6.93)
237 (9.33)
9
171 (6.7)
SW 36
68 (2.68)
8
120 (4.72)
approx. 40
72 (2.8)
(1.6)
Space for rotation

of housing
min. 90 (3.54) 4) Ø50 ... 60 105 (4.13)
(1.97 ... 2.36)
123 (4.84)
1 Electronic side, digital display 5 Protective cover over keys

(longer overall length for cover with window)1) 6 Blanking plug
2 Terminal side1) 7 Screw cover - safety bracket (only for type of protection
3 Electrical connection: "Explosion-proof enclosure", not shown in the drawing)
Screwed gland M20 x 1,5 or Screwed gland ½-14 NPT or 8 Process connection: Connection shank G½B or Oval flange
Han 7D/8D device plug2) 3)
9 Mounting bracket (option)
4 Harting adapter
1)
Allow approx. 20 mm (0.79 inch) thread length to permit unscrewing
2)
Not with type of protection "Explosion-proof enclosure"
3)
Not with type of protection "FM + CSA" [IS + XP]"
4)
Minimum distance for rotating
SITRANS P DS III pressure transmitters for gauge pressure, dimensions in mm (inch)
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/209

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
for differential pressure and flow
1 ■ Technical specifications
SITRANS P, DS III for differential pressure and flow
Input
Measured variable Differential pressure and flow
Span (fully adjustable) or measuring range, max. operating HART PROFIBUS PA/
pressure (in accordance with 2014/68/EU Pressure Equipment FOUNDATION
Directive) and max. test pressure (pursuant to DIN 16086) Fieldbus
Span Nominal measuring Max. operating pressure MAWP (PS)
range
1 ... 20 mbar 20 mbar 32 bar
0.1 ... 2 kPa 2 kPa 3.2 MPa
0.4 ... 8 inH2O 8 inH2O 464 psi
1 ... 60 mbar 60 mbar 160 bar
0.1 ... 6 kPa 6 kPa 16 MPa
0.4 ... 24 inH2O 24.1 inH2O 2320 psi
2.5 ... 250 mbar 250 mbar
0.2 ... 25 kPa 25 kPa
1 ... 100 inH2O 100 inH2O
6 ... 600 mbar 600 mbar
0.6 ...60 kPa 60 kPa
2.4 ... 240 inH2O 240 inH2O
16 ... 1600 mbar 1600 mbar
1.6 ...160 kPa 160 kPa
6.4 ... 642 inH2O 642 inH2O
50 ... 5000 mbar 5000 mbar
5 ...500 kPa 500 kPa
20 ... 2000 inH2O 2000 inH2O
0.3 ... 30 bar 30 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa 3 MPa
4.35 ... 435 psi 435 psi
2.5 ... 250 mbar 250 mbar 420 bar
0.2 ... 25 kPa 25 kPa 42 MPa
1 ... 100 inH2O 100 inH2O 6091 psi
6 ... 600 mbar 600 mbar (500 bar/50 MPa/7250 psi
0.6 ...60 kPa 60 kPa can be ordered optionally with Order
2.4 ... 240 inH2O 240 inH2O Code D56)
16 ... 1600 mbar 1600 mbar
1.6 ...160 kPa 160 kPa
6.4 ... 642 inH2O 642 inH2O
50 ... 5000 mbar 5000 mbar
5 ...500 kPa 500 kPa
20 ... 2000 inH2O 2000 inH2O
0.3 ... 30 bar 30 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa 3 MPa
4.35 ... 435 psi 435 psi
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -100 % of max. span (-33 % with measuring cell 30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi)
or 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
• Measuring cell with inert filling liquid
- for process temperature -20 °C <  +60 °C -100 % of max. span (-33 % with measuring cell 30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi)
(-4 °F <  +140 °F) or 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
- for process temperature 30 mbar a + 20 mbar a . (- 60 °C)/°C
60 °C <  +100 °C (max. 85 °C for measuring cell 30 bar) 3 kPa a + 2 kPa a . (- 60 °C)/°C
(140 °F <  +212 °F (max. 185 °F for measuring cell 0.44 psi a + 0.29 psi a . (- 140 °F)/°F
435 psi))
Upper measuring limit 100 % of max. span
(for oxygen measurement max. 100 bar/10 MPa/1450 psi and 60 °C (140 °F)
ambient temperature/process temperature)
Start of scale value Between the measuring limits (fully adjustable)
1/244 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1
Output HART PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA Digital PROFIBUS PA and
FOUNDATION Fieldbus signal
• Lower limit (infinitely adjustable) 3.55 mA, factory preset to 3.84 mA -
• Upper limit (infinitely adjustable) 23 mA, factory preset to 20.5 mA or -
optionally set to 22.0 mA (with order
code D05)
Load
• Without HART RB  (UH - 10.5 V)/0.023 A in , -
UH: Power supply in V
• With HART RB = 230 ... 500  (SIMATIC PDM) or -
RB = 230 ... 1100  (HART Communica-
tor)
Physical bus - IEC 61158-2
Protection against polarity reversal Protected against short-circuit and polarity reversal. Each connection against the
other with max. supply voltage.
Electrical damping (step width 0.1 s) Set to 2 s (0 ... 100 s)

Measuring accuracy Acc. to IEC 60770-1
Reference conditions • Increasing characteristic
(All error data refer always refer to the set span) • Start-of-scale value 0 bar/kPa/psi
• Stainless steel seal diaphragm
• Silicone oil filling
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn-Down) r = max. measuring span/set measuring span or nom. pressure range
Error in measurement at limit setting incl.
hysteresis and reproducibility
• Linear characteristic
- 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi r5:  0.075 %
5 < r  10 :  (0.0029  r + 0.071) %
10 < r  20 :  (0.0045  r + 0.071) %
- 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi r5:  0.075 %
5 < r  60 :  (0.005  r + 0.05) %
- 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi r5:  0.065 %
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.7 psi 5 < r  100 :  (0.004  r + 0.045) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kpa/72.5 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi
• Square-rooted characteristic (flow > 50 %)
- 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi r5:  0.075 %
5 < r  10 :  (0.0029  r + 0.071) %
10 < r  20 :  (0.0045  r + 0.071) %
- 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi r5:  0.075 %
5 < r  60 :  (0.005  r + 0.05) %
- 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi r5:  0.065 %
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.7 psi 5 < r  100 :  (0.004  r + 0.045) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
• Square-rooted characteristic
(flow > 25 ... 50 %)
- 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi r5:  0.15 %
5 < r  10 :  (0.0058  r + 0.142) %
10 < r  20 :  (0.009  r + 0.142) %
- 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi r5:  0.015 %
5 < r  60 :  (0.01  r + 0.1) %
- 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi r5:  0.13 %
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.7 psi 5 < r  100 :  (0.008  r + 0.09) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/245

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1 SITRANS P, DS III for differential pressure and flow
Measuring accuracy (continued) Acc. IEC 60770-1
Influence of ambient temperature
(in percent per 28 °C (50 °F))
• 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi  (0.15  r + 0.1) %
• 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi  (0.075  r + 0.1) %
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi  (0.025  r + 0.125) %
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.7 psi
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
Influence of static pressure
• on the zero point
- 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi  (0.15  r) % per 32 bar
(zero-point correction is possible with position error adjustment)
- 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi  (0.1  r) % per 70 bar
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi (zero-point correction is possible with position error adjustment)
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
- 5 bar/500 kpa/72.5 psi  (0.2  r) % per 70 bar
30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi (zero-point correction is possible with position error adjustment)
• on the span
- 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi  0.2 % per 32 bar
- 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi  0.14 % per 70 bar
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
Long-term stability Static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/ 1015 psi
(temperature change ± 30 °C (± 54 °F))
• 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi  (0.2  r) % per year
• 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi  (0.25  r) % in 5 years
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi  (0.125  r) % in 5 years
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
Effect of mounting position (in pressure per change in angle)  0.7 mbar/0.07 kPa/0.028 inH2O per 10° inclination
(zero-point correction is possible with position error adjustment)
Effect of auxiliary power supply 0.005 % per 1 V
(in percent per change in voltage)
Measuring value resolution for PROFIBUS PA and 3  10-5 of nominal measuring range
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
1/246 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1
Rated conditions
Degree of protection
• according to EN 60529 IP66 (optional IP66/IP68)
• according to NEMA 250 Type 4X
Temperature of medium
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -40 ... +100 °C (-40 ... +212 °F) -20 ... +100 °C (-4 ... +212 °F)
with 30 bar measuring cell
• Measuring cell with inert filling liquid -20 ... +100 °C (-4 ... +212 °F)
• Measuring cell with Neobee fill fluid (FDA-compliant) -10 ... +100 °C (+14 ... +212 °F)
• In conjunction with dust explosion protection -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F)
Ambient conditions
• Ambient temperature (silicone oil and inert oil)
- Transmitter -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
-20 ... +85 °C (-4 ... +185 °F) with 30 bar measuring cell
- Display readable -30 ... +85 °C (-22 ... +185 °F)
• Ambient temperature (Neobee fill fluid)
- Transmitter -10 ... +85 °C (+14 ... +185 °F)
• Storage temperature -50 ... +85 °C (-58 ... +185 °F)
• Climatic class
- Condensation Relative humidity 0 ... 100 %
Condensation permissible, suitable for use in the tropics
• Electromagnetic Compatibility
- Emitted interference and interference immunity Acc. to IEC 61326 and NAMUR NE 21
Design
Weight (without options) Die-cast aluminum:  4.5 kg ( 9.9 lb)
Stainless steel precision casting:  7.1 kg ( 15.6 lb)
Enclosure material Low-copper die-cast aluminum, GD-AlSi12 or stainless steel precision casting, mat.
no. 1.4408
• Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L or Hastelloy C276, mat. no. 2.4819, Monel,
mat. no. 2.4360, tantalum or gold
• Process flanges and sealing screw Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4408, Hastelloy C4, mat. no. 2.4602 or Monel,
mat. no. 2.4360
• O-Ring FPM (Viton) or optionally: PTFE, FEP, FEPM and NBR
Measuring cell filling Silicone oil or inert filling liquid (maximum value with oxygen measurement pressure
100 bar (1450 psi) at 60 °C (140 °F))
Process connection Female thread ¼-18 NPT and flange connection with mounting thread M10 to
DIN 19213 or 7/16-20 UNF to IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518
Material of mounting bracket
• Steel Sheet-steel, Mat. No. 1.0330, chrome-plated
• Stainless steel 304 Sheet stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4301 (SS 304)
• Stainless steel 316L Sheet stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404 (SS 316L)
Power supply UH HART PROFIBUS PA/ FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Terminal voltage on transmitter 10.5 ... 45 V DC -
10.5 ... 30 V DC in intrinsically-safe mode
Power supply - Supplied through bus
Separate 24 V power supply necessary - No

Bus voltage
• Not Ex - 9 ... 32 V
• With intrinsically-safe operation - 9 ... 24 V
Current consumption
• Basic current (max.) - 12.5 mA
• Start-up current  basic current - Yes
• Max. current in event of fault - 15.5 mA
Fault disconnection electronics (FDE) available - Yes
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/247

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1 SITRANS P, DS III for differential pressure and flow
Certificates and approvals HART PROFIBUS PA/ FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Classification according to PED 2014/68/EU • PN 32/160 (MAWP 464/2320 psi) for gases of fluid group 1 and liquids of fluid
group 1; complies with requirements of article 4, paragraph 3 (sound engineering
practice)
• PN 420 (MAWP 6092) for gases of fluid group 1 and liquids of fluid group 1;
complies with basic safety requirements of Article 4, paragraph 1 (appendix 1);
assigned to category III, conformity evaluation module H by the TÜV Nord.
• Intrinsic safety "i" PTB 13 ATEX 2007 X
- Marking Ex II 1/2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T4/T5/T6 Ga/Gb
-40 ... +70 °C (-40 ... +158 °F) temperature class T5;
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Pi = 750 mW; Linear barrier:
Ri = 300  Uo = 24 V, Io = 250 mA, Po = 1.2 W
• Explosion-proof "d" PTB 99 ATEX 1160
- Marking Ex II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T4/T6 Gb
UH = 10.5 ... 45 V DC UH = 9 ... 32 V DC
• Dust explosion protection for zone 20 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Marking Ex II 1 D Ex ta IIIC T120°C Da
Ex II 1/2 D Ex ta/tb IIIC T120°C Da/Db
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
- Max. surface temperature 120 °C (248 °F)
Pi = 750 mW, Ri = 300  Uo = 24 V, Io = 250 mA, Po = 1 W
• Dust explosion protection for zone 21/22 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Marking Ex II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T120°C Db
- Connection To circuits with values: UH = 10.5 ... 45 V To circuits with values: UH = 9 ... 32 V
DC; Pmax = 1.2 W DC;
Pmax = 1 W
• Type of protection "n" (zone 2) PTB 13 ATEX 2007 X
- Marking Ex II 2/3 G Ex nA IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb/Gc
Ex II 2/3 G Ex ic IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb/Gc
- Connection (Ex nA) Um = 45 V Um = 32 V
- Connection (Ex ic) To circuits with values: FISCO supply unit ic:
Ui = 45 V Uo = 17.5 V, Io = 570 mA
Linear barrier:
Uo = 32 V, Io = 132 mA, Po = 1 W
• Explosion protection acc. to FM Certificate of Compliance 3008490
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS); (NI) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; CL I, ZN 0/1 AEx ia IIC
T4...T6; CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
• Explosion protection to CSA Certificate of Compliance 1153651
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; Ex ia IIC T4...T6; CL I,
DIV 2, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
1/248 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
HART communication FOUNDATION Fieldbus
1
communication
HART 230 ... 1100 
Function blocks 3 function blocks analog input,
Protocol HART Version 5.x 1 function block PID
Software for PC SIMATIC PDM • Analog input
PROFIBUS PA communication - Adaptation to customer- Yes, linearly rising or falling
Simultaneous communication with 4 specific process variables characteristic
master class 2 (max.) - Electrical damping, adjustable 0 ... 100 s
The address can be set using Configuration tool or local opera- - Simulation function Output/input (can be locked
tion (standard setting within the device with a bridge)
address 126)
Cyclic data usage value, substitute value, incorrect
• Output byte 5 (one measured value) or value)
10 (two measured values) - Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warn-
• Input byte 0, 1, or 2 (register operating ing limit and one alarm limit
mode and reset function for respectively
metering) - Square-rooted characteristic Yes
Internal preprocessing for flow measurement
Device profile PROFIBUS PA Profile for Pro- • PID Standard FOUNDATION Field-
cess Control Devices Version bus function block
3.0, class B • Physical block 1 resource block
Function blocks 2 Transducer blocks 1 transducer block Pressure with
• Analog input calibration, 1 transducer block
LCD
- Adaptation to customer-specif- Yes, linearly rising or falling
ic process variables characteristic • Pressure transducer block
- Electrical damping, adjustable 0 ... 100 s - Can be calibrated by applying Yes
two pressures
- Simulation function Input /Output
value, substitute value, incorrect - Simulation function: Measured Constant value or over parame-
value) pressure value, sensor tem- terizable ramp function
perature and electronics tem-
- Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warn- perature
ing limit and one alarm limit
respectively
• Register (totalizer) Can be reset, preset, optional
direction of counting, simulation
function of register output
- Failure mode parameterizable (summation
with last good value, continuous
summation, summation with
incorrect value)
- Limit monitoring One upper and lower warning
limit and one alarm limit respec-
tively
• Physical block 1
Transducer blocks 2
• Pressure transducer block
- Can be calibrated by applying Yes
two pressures
- Specification of a container Max. 30 nodes
characteristic with
- Square-rooted characteristic Yes
for flow measurement
- Gradual volume suppression Parameterizable
and implementation point of
square-root extraction
- Simulation function for mea- Constant value or over parame-
sured pressure value and sen- terizable ramp function
sor temperature
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/249

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
SITRANS P DS III with HART pressure trans- 7MF 4 4 3 3 - SITRANS P DS III with HART pressure trans- 7MF 4 4 3 3 -
mitters for differential pressure and flow, mitters for differential pressure and flow,
77777 - 7777 77777 - 7777
PN 32/160 (MAWP 464/2320 psi) PN 32/160 (MAWP 464/2320 psi)
Click on the Article No. for the online configu- Explosion protection
ration in the PIA Life Cycle Portal. • None A
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell • With ATEX, Type of protection:
cleaning - "Intrinsic safety (Ex ia)" B
Silicone oil normal 1 - "Explosion-proof (Ex d)"10) D
Inert liquid1) grease-free to 3 - "Intrinsic safety and flameproof enclosure" P
cleanliness level 2 (Ex ia + Ex d)"11)
FDA compliant fill fluid 2) - "Ex nA/ic (Zone 2)"12) E
• Neobee oil normal 4 - "Intrinsic safety, explosion-proof enclosure R
and dust explosion protection (Ex ia+ Ex d +
Measuring span (min. ... max.) Zone 1D/2D)"11)13)
PN 32 (MAWP 464 psi) • FM + CSA intrinsic safe (is)14) F
1 ... 20 mbar3) (0.4 ... 8 inH2O) B • FM + CSA (is + ep) + Ex ia + Ex d (ATEX) + S
PN 160 (MAWP 2320 psi) Zone 1D/2D11)13)14)
1 ... 60 mbar (0.4 ... 24 inH2O) C • With FM + CSA, Type of protection:
2.5 ... 250 mbar (1.004 ... 100.4 inH2O) D - "Intrinsic Safe and Explosion Proof NC
6 ... 600 mbar (2.4 ... 240 inH2O) E (is + xp)"10)14)
16 ... 1600 mbar (6.4 ... 642 inH2O) F Electrical connection/cable entry
50 ... 5000 mbar (20 ... 2000 inH2O) G • Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 B
0.3 ... 30 bar (4.35 ... 435 psi) H • Screwed gland ½-14 NPT C
Wetted parts materials • Han 7D device plug (plastic housing) incl. D
mating connector15)16)
(stainless steel process flanges)
• M12 device plugs (stainless steel)17)18) F
Seal diaphragm Parts of measuring cell
Display
Stainless steel Stainless steel A
• Without display 0
Hastelloy Stainless steel B
• Without visible display 1
Hastelloy Hastelloy C (display concealed, setting: mA)
Tantalum4) Tantalum E • With visible display (setting: mA) 6
Monel4) Monel H • with customer-specific display 7
Gold4) Gold L (setting as specified, Order code "Y21" or "Y22"
Version for diaphragm seal5) 6) 7) 8) Y required)
Process connection Power supply units see Chap. 7 "Supplementary Components".
Female thread ¼-18 NPT with flange connection Included in delivery of the device:
• Sealing screw opposite process connection • Quick-start guide
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 2 • Sealing plug(s) or sealing screw(s) for the process flanges(s)
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518
- Mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 0
(only for replacement requirement) 2) Available for measuring ranges 250 mbar ... 5 bar.
3)
• Vent on side of process flange 3) Not suitable for connection of remote seal. Position of the top vent valve in
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 6 the process flange (see dimensional drawing).
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518 4) Not in conjunction with max. span 20 and 60 mbar (8.03 and 24.09 inH2O))
- Mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 4 5) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be
(only for replacement requirement) ordered for transmitters with diaphragm seals according to IEC 60770-2, it
is recommended only to order this certificate exclusively with the dia-
Non-wetted parts materials phragm seals. The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified
process flange screws Electronics housing here.
Stainless steel Die-cast aluminum 2
Stainless steel Stainless steel precision 3 respective remote seals.
casting9) 7) The diaphragm seal is to be specified with a separate order number and
Version must be included wiht the transmitter order number, for example
• Standard version, German plate inscription, 1 7MF443.-..Y..-.... and 7MF4900-1...-.B
setting for pressure unit: bar 8) The standard measuring cell filling for configurations with remote seals (Y)
• International version, English plate inscription, 2 is silicone oil.
setting for pressure unit: bar 9) Not in conjunction with Electrical connection "Han 7D device plug".
• Chinese version, English plate inscription, 3 10) Without cable gland, with blanking plug
setting for pressure unit: Pascal 11) With enclosed cable gland Ex ia and blanking plug
All versions include DVD with compact operat- 12) Configurations
ing instructions in various EU languages. with Han and M12 device plugs are only available in Ex ic.
13) Only in connection with IP66.
NEC 500/505.
15) Only in connection with Ex apporval A, B or E.
16) Permissible only for crimp-contact of conductor cross-section 1 mm2
18) M12 delivered without cable socket.
1/250 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1
Pressure transmitters for differential pressure Pressure transmitters for differential pressure
and flow PN 32/160 (MAWP 464/2320 psi) and flow PN 32/160 (MAWP 464/2320 psi)
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell • None A
cleaning • With ATEX, Type of protection:
Silicone oil normal 1 - "Intrinsic safety (Ex ia)" B
Inert liquid1) grease-free to 3 - "Explosion-proof (Ex d)"9) D
cleanliness level 2
- "Intrinsic safety and flameproof enclosure" P
FDA compliant fill fluid 2) (Ex ia + Ex d)"10)
• Neobee oil normal 4 - "Ex nA/ic (Zone 2)" 11) E
Nominal measuring range - "Intrinsic safety, explosion-proof enclosure and R
PN 32 (MAWP 464 psi) dust explosion protection (Ex ia + Ex d +
20 mbar 3) (8.03 inH2O) B Zone 1D/2D)"10)12)
• FM + CSA intrinsic safe (is)13) F
PN 160 (MAWP 2320 psi) • FM + CSA (is + ep) + Ex ia + Ex d (ATEX)+ S
60 mbar (24 inH2O) C Zone 1D/2D10)12)13)
250 mbar (100 inH2O) D • With FM + CSA, Type of protection:
600 mbar (240 inH2O) E - "Intrinsic Safe and Explosion Proof NC
1600 mbar (642 inH2O) F (is + xp)"9)13)
5 bar (2000 inH2O) G Electrical connection/cable entry
30 bar (435 psi) H • Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 B
Wetted parts materials • Screwed gland ½-14 NPT C
(stainless steel process flanges) • M12 device plugs (stainless steel)14) 15) F
Seal diaphragm Parts of measuring cell Display
Stainless steel Stainless steel A • Without display 0
Hastelloy Stainless steel B • Without visible display 1
Hastelloy Hastelloy C (display concealed, setting: bar)
Tantalum 4) Tantalum E • With visible display (setting: bar) 6
Monel4) Monel H • With customer-specific display 7
Gold 4) Gold L (setting as specified, Order code "Y21" required)
Version as diaphragm seal 5) 6) 7) 8) Y Included in delivery of the device:
• Quick-start guide
Process connection • Sealing plug(s) or sealing screw(s) for the process flanges(s)
Female thread ¼-18 NPT with flange connection
• Sealing screw opposite process connection
2) Available for measuring ranges 250 mbar ... 5 bar.
3) Not suitable for connection of remote seal. Position of the top vent valve in
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518
- Mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 0 the process flange (see dimensional drawing).
4) Not in conjunction with max. span 20 and 60 mbar (8.03 and 24.09 inH O))
(only for replacement requirement) 5) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be
2
• Venting on side of process flanges3) ordered for transmitters with diaphragm seals according to IEC 60770-2, it
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 6 is recommended only to order this certificate exclusively with the dia-
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518 phragm seals. The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified
- Mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 4 here.
(only for replacement requirement)
Non-wetted parts materials respective remote seals.
process flange screws Electronics housing 7) The diaphragm seal is to be specified with a separate order number and
must be included wiht the transmitter order number, for example
Stainless steel Die-cast aluminum 2 7MF443.-..Y..-.... and 7MF4900-1...-.B
Stainless steel Stainless steel precision 3 8) The standard measuring cell filling for configurations with remote seals (Y)
casting is silicone oil.
9) Without cable gland, with blanking plug.
Version 10) With enclosed cable gland Ex ia and blanking plug.
• Standard versions 1 11) Configurations with Han and M12 device plugs are only available in Ex ic.
• International version, English label inscriptions, 2 12) Only in connection with IP66.
documentation in 5 languages on DVD 13) Explosion protection acc. to FM/CSA: suitable for installations according to
(no Order code selectable) NEC 500/505.
Version
• Standard version, German plate inscription, 1
• Chinese version, English plate inscription, 3
All versions include DVD with compact operating
instructions in various EU languages.
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/251

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
Further designs HART PA FF Further designs HART PA FF
Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order
code. code.
Pressure transmitter with mounting Setting of the upper saturation limit of D05 
bracket (1x fixing angle, 2 x nut, the output signal to 22.0 mA
2 x U-washer or 1 x bracket, 2 x nut,
2 x U-washer) made of:
Manufacturer's declaration acc. to NACE D07   
(MR 0103-2012 and MR 0175-2009)
• Steel A01    (only together with seal diaphragm made of
• Stainless steel 304 A02    Hastelloy and stainless steel)
• Stainless steel 316L A03   
Degree of protection IP66/IP68 D12   
O-rings for process flanges (only for M20 x 1.5 and ½-14 NPT)
(instead of FPM (Viton)) Process flange screws made of Monel D34   
• PTFE (Teflon) A20    (max. nominal pressure PN20)
• FEP (with silicone core, approved for food) A21   
• FFPM (Kalrez, compound 4079), A22    Supplied with oval flange set D37   
for measured medium temperatures (2 items), PTFE packings and screws in
-15 ... 100 °C (5 ... 212 °F) thread of process flanges
• NBR (Buna N) A23    Capri cable gland 4F CrNi and clamping D59   
Device plugs1) device (848699 + 810634) included
• Han 7D (metal) A30  Use in or on zone 1D/2D5) E01   
• Han 8D (instead of Han 7D) A31  (only together with type of protection
• Angled A32  "Intrinsic safety" (transmitter
• Han 8D (metal) A33  7MF4...-.....-.B.. Ex ia)"and IP66)
Sealing screws (2 units) A40    Overfilling safety device for flammable E08 
and non-flammable liquids
¼-18 NPT, with valve in mat. of process
flanges (max. PN 32 (MAWP 464 psi), basic device
with type of protection "Intrinsic safety
Cable sockets for M12 device plugs A50    (Ex ia)", to WHG and VbF, not together with
(metal (CuZn)) measuring cell filling "inert liquid")
Rating plate inscription Oxygen application E10   
(instead of German) (In the case of oxygen measurement and
• English B11    inert liquid max. 100 bar (1450 psi) at 60°C
• French B12    (140 °F))
• Spanish B13    Export approval Korea E11   
• Italian B14    CRN approval Canada E226)   
• Cyrillic (russian) B16    (Canadian Registration Number)
English rating plate B21    Dual seal E24   
Pressure units in inH2O and/or psi
Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" (Ex ia) E257)   
Quality Inspection Certificate (5-point C11    to INMETRO (Brazil)
characteristic curve test) according to (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
IEC 60770-22)
"Flameproof" explosion protection E267)   
Inspection certificate3) to EN 10204-3.1 C12    according to INMETRO (Brazil)
Factory certificate to EN 10204-2.2 C14    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
Acceptance certificate (EN 10204-3.1) C15    Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" (Ex ia E287)  
PMI test of parts in contact with medium + Ex d) to INMETRO (Brazil)
(only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.P..)
Functional safety (SIL2) C20 
Devices suitable for use according to Ex Approval IEC Ex (Ex ia) E457)   
IEC 61508 and IEC 61511. Includes SIL (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
conformity declaration
Ex Approval IEC Ex (Ex d) E467)   
Functional safety (PROFIsafe) C214) 
Certificate and PROFIsafe protocol (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
Functional safety (SIL2/3) C23  Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" to E557)   
Devices suitable for use according to NEPSI (China)
IEC 61508 and IEC 61511. Includes SIL (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
conformity declaration
Explosion protection "Explosion-proof" E567)   
PED for Russia with initial calibration C99    to NEPSI (China)
mark (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
Explosion-proof "Zone 2" to NEPSI E577)   
(China)
(only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.E..)
Ex protection „Ex ia", „Ex d" and „Zone E587)   
2" to NEPSI (China)
(only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.R..)
"Intrinsic safety" and "Explosion-proof" E707)   
explosion protection acc. to Kosha (Korea)
(only for transmitter
7MF4...-.....-.[B, D]..-Z + E11)
1/252 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1
Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order Please add "-Z" to Article No. and specify
code. Order code(s) and plain text.
Ex-protection Ex ia according to EAC Ex E80    Measuring range to be set
(Russia) Specify in plain text:
Ex-protection Ex d according to EAC Ex E81    • in the case of linear characteristic curve Y01  1)
(Russia) (max. 5 characters):
Ex-protection Ex nA/ic (Zone 2) according E82    Y01: ... up to ... mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi
to EAC Ex (Russia) • in the case of square rooted characteristic Y02 
(max. 5 characters):
Ex-protection Ex ia + Ex d + Zone 1D/2D E83    Y02: ... up to ... mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi
Stainless steel tag plate and entry in Y15   
Two coats of lacquer on casing and G10    device variable (measuring point
cover (PU on epoxy) description)
Interchanging of process connection side H01    Max. 16 characters, specify in plain text:
Vent on side for gas measurements H02    Y15: ...........................................
Stainless steel process flanges for H03    Measuring point text (entry in device Y16   
vertical differential pressure lines variable)
(not together with K01, K02 and K048) Max. 27 char., specify in plain text: Y16:
.......
Transient protector 6 kV J01   
(lightning protection) Entry of HART address (TAG) Y17 
Chambered graphite gasket for J02    Max. 8 char., specify in plain text: Y17: .......
process flange Setting of pressure indicator in Y21   
Chambered PTFE graphite gasket J03    pressure units
EPDM O-rings for process flange with J05    Specify in plain text (standard setting: bar):
approval (WRC/WRAS) Y21: mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi, ...
Note: The following pressure units can be
Vent valve or blanking plug of process J08    selected:
flange welded-in (orientation: on right
when viewing the display9) bar, mbar, mm H2O*), inH2O*), ftH2O*),
mmHG, inHG, psi, Pa, kPa, MPa, g/cm2,
Vent valve or blanking plug of process J09    kg/cm2, Torr, ATM or %
flange welded-in (orientation: on left *) ref. temperature 20 °C
when viewing the display)9)
Setting of pressure indicator in non- Y223) 
Process flange pressure units2) +
• Hastelloy K01    Specify in plain text: Y01 or
• Monel K02    Y22: ..... up to ..... l/min, m3/h, m, USgpm, ... Y02
• Stainless steel with PVDF insert K04    (specification of measuring range in pres-
sure units "Y01" or "Y02" is essential, unit
max. PN 10 (MAWP 145 psi),
with max. 5 characters)
max. temperature of medium 90 °C
(194 °F), for ½-14 NPT inner process con- Preset bus address Y25  
nection on the side in the middle of the possible between 1 and 126
process flange, vent valve not possible
Specify in plain text: Y25: .....................
Marine approvals
• Det Norske Veritas S10    (0 ... 100 s)
Germanischer Lloyd (DNV-GL)
• Lloyds Register (LR) S11    Factory mounting of valve manifolds, see accessories.
• French marine classification society S12    Only Y01, Y15, Y16, Y17, Y21, Y22, Y25 and D05 can be factory preset
Bureau Veritas (BV)
• American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) S14     = available
• Russian Maritime Register (RMR) S16    1) Measuring accuracies for PROFIBUS PA transmitters with Option Y01 are
• Korean Register of Shipping (KR) S17    calculated in the same way as for HART devices.
Factory mounting of valve manifolds, see accessories. 3) Not in conjunction with over-filling safety device for flammable and non-
 = available flammable liquids (Order code "E08")
1) Han device plug IP65
2) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be ordered
for transmitters with diaphragm seals according to IEC 60770-2, it is recom-
mended only to order this certificate exclusively with the diaphragm seals.
The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified here.
4) Profisafe transmitters can only be operated with the S7 F Systems V6.1
configuration software in combination with S7-400H
5) Option does not contain gas explosion protection; only dust explosion pro-
tection: Use in or at Zone 1D/2D.
6) Cannot be ordered with remote seal.
7) When the additional ex option is selected, the ATEX marking on the device
is omitted. Only the Ex option selected via the Z option is marked.
8) Not suitable for connection of remote seal.
9) Blanking plug is standard configuration. Order option A40 if a vent valve is
required instead of a blanking plug.
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/253

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
SITRANS P DS III with HART pressure trans- 7MF 4 5 3 3 - SITRANS P DS III with HART pressure trans- 7MF 4 5 3 3 -
mitters for differential pressure and flow, mitters for differential pressure and flow,
77777 - 7777 77777 - 7777
PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi) PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi)
Click on the Article No. for the online configu- Electrical connection/cable entry
ration in the PIA Life Cycle Portal. • Screwed gland M20x1.5 B
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell • Screwed gland ½-14 NPT C
cleaning • Han 7D device plug (plastic housing) incl. mat- D
Silicone oil normal 1 ing connector13)14)
Inert liquid1) grease-free to 3 • M12 device plugs (stainless steel)15) 16) F
cleanliness level 2
Display
Measuring span (min. ... max.) • Without display 0
2.5 ... 250 mbar (1.004 ... 100 inH2O) D • Without visible display 1
6 ... 600 mbar (2.4 ... 240 inH2O) E (display concealed, setting: mA)
16 ... 1600 mbar (6.4 ... 642 inH2O) F • With visible display (setting: mA) 6
50 ... 5000 mbar (20 ... 2000 inH2O) G • with customer-specific display 7
0.3 ... 30 bar (4.35 ... 435 psi) H (setting as specified, Order code "Y21" or "Y22"
required)
(stainless steel process flanges) Power supply units see Chap. 7 "Supplementary Components".
Seal diaphragm Parts of measuring cell Scope of delivery: Pressure transmitter as ordered (Instruction Manual is
Stainless steel Stainless steel A extra ordering item)
Hastelloy Stainless steel B 1) For oxygen application, add Order code E10.
Gold2) Gold L 2) Not in conjunction with max. span 600 mbar (240.9 inH2O)
Version for diaphragm seal 3) 4) 5) 6) Y 3) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be
Process connection is recommended only to order this certificate exclusively with the dia-
Female thread ¼-18 NPT with flange connection phragm seals. The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified
• Sealing screw opposite process connection here.
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518 mounted diaphragm seals this certificate must also be ordered with the
- Mounting thread M12 to DIN 19213 1 5) The diaphragm seal is to be specified with a separate order number and
(only for replacement requirement) must be included wiht the transmitter order number, for example
• Venting on side of process flanges, location of 7MF453.-..Y..-.... and 7MF4900-1....-.B
vent valve at top of process flanges (see dimen- 6) The standard measuring cell filling for configurations with remote seals (Y)
sional drawing) is silicone oil.
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 7 7) Not in conjunction with Electrical connection "Han 7D device plug".
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518 8) Without cable gland, with blanking plug
9) With enclosed cable gland Ex ia and blanking plug
- Mounting thread M12 to DIN 19213 5
(only for replacement requirement) 10) Configurations with Han and M12 device plugs are only available in Ex ic.
11) Only in connection with IP66.
Non-wetted parts materials 12) Explosion protection acc. to FM/CSA: suitable for installations according to
process flange screws Electronics housing NEC 500/505.
13) Only in connection with Ex approval A, B or E.
Stainless steel Die-cast aluminum 2
14) Permissible only for crimp-contact of conductor cross-section 1 mm2
Stainless steel Stainless steel precision 3 15) Only in connection with Ex approval A, B, E or F.
casting7) 16) M12 delivered without cable socket.
Version
setting for pressure unit: bar)
• Chinese version, English plate inscription, 3
All versions include DVD with compact operating
instructions in various EU languages.
• None A
• With ATEX, Type of protection:
- "Intrinsic safety (Ex ia)" B
- "Explosion-proof (Ex d)"8) D
(Ex ia + Ex d)"9)
- "Ex nA/ic (Zone 2)"10) E
- "Intrinsic safety, explosion-proof enclosure and R
dust explosion protection (Ex ia+ Ex d +
Zone 1D/2D)"9)11)
• FM + CSA intrinsic safe (is)12) F
• FM + CSA (is + ep) + Ex ia + Ex d (ATEX) + S
Zone 1D/2D9)11)12)
• With FM + CSA, Type of protection:
- "Intrinsic safety and explosion-proof NC
(is + xp)" 8)12), max PN 360
1/254 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1
Pressure transmitters for differential pressure Pressure transmitters for differential pressure
and flow, PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi) and flow, PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi)
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell • None A
cleaning • With ATEX, Type of protection:
Silicone oil normal 1 - "Intrinsic safety (Ex ia)" B
Inert liquid1) grease-free to 3 - "Explosion-proof (Ex d)"7) D
cleanliness level 2
Nominal measuring range (Ex ia + Ex d)"8)
250 mbar (100 inH2O) D - "Ex nA/ic (Zone 2)" 9) E
600 mbar (240 inH2O) E - "Intrinsic safety, explosion-proof enclosure and R
1600 mbar (642 inH2O) F dust explosion protection (Ex ia + Ex d +
5 bar (2000 inH2O) G Zone 1D/2D)"8) 10)
30 bar (435 psi) H • FM + CSA intrinsic safe (is)11) F
• FM + CSA (is + ep) + Ex ia + Ex d (ATEX)+ S
Wetted parts materials Zone 1D/2D9)10)11)
(stainless steel process flanges) • With FM + CSA, Type of protection:
Seal diaphragm Parts of measuring cell - "Intrinsic safety and explosion-proof NC
Stainless steel Stainless steel A (is + xp)"7)11), max PN 360
Hastelloy Stainless steel B Electrical connection/cable entry
Gold 2) Gold L • Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 B
Version for diaphragm seal 3) 4) 5) 6) Y • Screwed gland ½-14 NPT C
Process connection • M12 device plugs (stainless steel) 12) 13) F
Female thread ¼-18 NPT with flange connection Display
• Sealing screw opposite process connection • Without (display hidden) 0
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 3 • Without visible display 1
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518 (display concealed, setting: bar)
- Mounting thread M12 to DIN 19213 1 • With visible display (setting: bar) 6
(only for replacement requirement) • With customer-specific display (setting as 7
• Venting on side of process flanges, location of specified, Order code "Y21" required)
vent valve at top of process flanges (see dimen-
sional drawing). Included in delivery of the device:
• Quick-start guide
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to 7 • Sealing plug(s) or sealing screw(s) for the process flanges(s)
IEC 61518/DIN EN 61518
- Mounting thread M12 to DIN 19213 5 1) For oxygen application, add Order code E10.
(only for replacement requirement) 2) Not in conjunction with max. span 600 mbar (240.9 inH2O)
3) When the manufacture’s certificate (calibration certificate) has to be
Non-wetted parts materials
Process flange screws Electronics housing is recommended only to order this certificate exclusively with the dia-
Stainless steel Die-cast aluminum 2 phragm seals. The measuring accuracy of the total combination is certified
here.
Stainless steel Stainless steel precision 3 4) If the acceptance test certificate 3.1.is ordered for the transmitter with
casting mounted diaphragm seals this certificate must also be ordered with the
Version respective remote seals.
setting for pressure unit: bar must be included wiht the transmitter order number, for example
7MF453.-..Y..-.... and 7MF4900-1....-.B
• International version, English plate inscription, 2 6) The standard measuring cell filling for configurations with remote seals (Y)
setting for pressure unit: bar is silicone oil.
• Chinese version, English plate inscription, 3 7) Without cable gland, with blanking plug.
setting for pressure unit: Pascal 8) With enclosed cable gland Ex ia and blanking plug.
All versions include DVD with compact operating 9) Configurations with Han and M12 device plugs are only available in Ex ic.
instructions in various EU languages. 10) Only in connection with IP66.
NEC 500/505.
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/255

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
Further designs HART PA FF Setting of the upper saturation limit of the D05 
Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order code. output signal to 22.0\ mA
Pressure transmitter with mounting bracket Manufacturer's declaration acc. to NACE D07   
(1x fixing angle, 2 x nut, 2 x U-washer or 1 x (MR 0103-2012 and MR 0175-2009)
bracket, 2 x nut, 2 x U-washer) made of: (only together with seal diaphragm made of
• Steel A01    Hastelloy and stainless steel)
• Stainless steel 304 A02    Degree of protection IP66/IP68 D12   
• Stainless steel 316L A03    (only for M20 x 1.5 and ½-14 NPT)
O-rings for process flanges Nom. press. rating PN 500 (MAWP 7250 psi) D56 
(Only for measuring cell 600 mbar ... 30 bar
(instead of FPM (Viton)) (240 inH2O ... 435 psi), SIL- and Ex-options not
• PTFE (Teflon) A20    possible))3)
• FEP (with silicone core, approved for food) A21    Capri cable gland 4F CrNi and clamping D59   
• FFPM (Kalrez, compound 4079), A22    device (848699 + 810634) included
for measured medium temperatures
-15 ... 100 °C (5 ... 212 °F) Use in or on zone 1D/2D4) E01   
• NBR (Buna N) A23    (only together with type of protection
"Intrinsic safety" (transmitter
Device plugs1) 7MF4...-.....-.B.. Ex ia)"and IP66)
• Han 7D (metal) A30  Export approval Korea E11   
• Han 8D (instead of Han 7D) A31 
CRN approval Canada E225)   
• Angled A32  (Canadian Registration Number)
• Han 8D (metal) A33 
Dual seal E24   
Sealing screws (2 units) A40   
¼-18 NPT, with valve in mat. of process flanges Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" (Ex ia) to E256)   
INMETRO (Brazil)
Cable sockets for M12 device plugs A50    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
(metal (CuZn))
"Flameproof" explosion protection accord- E266)   
Rating plate inscription (instead of German) ing to INMETRO (Brazil)
• English B11    (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
• French B12   
• Spanish B13    Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" (Ex ia + Ex E286)  
d) to INMETRO (Brazil)
• Italian B14   
(only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.P..)
• Cyrillic (russian) B16   
Ex Approval IEC Ex (Ex ia) E456)   
English rating plate B21   
(only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
Pressure units in inH2O and/or psi
Ex Approval IEC Ex (Ex d) E466)   
Quality Inspection Certificate (5-point charac- C11   
teristic curve test) according to IEC 60770-2 (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
Explosion-proof "Intrinsic safety" E556)   
Inspection certificate C12    to NEPSI (China)
Acc. to EN 10204-3.1 (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.B..)
Factory certificate C14    Ex prot. "Explosion-proof" to NEPSI (China) E566)   
Acc. to EN 10204-2.2 (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.D..)
Acceptance certificate (EN 10204-3.1) C15    Explosion-proof "Zone 2" to NEPSI (China) E576)   
PMI test of parts in contact with medium (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.E..)
Functional safety (SIL2) C20 
Devices suitable for use according to Ex protection „Ex ia", „Ex d" and „Zone 2" to E586)   
IEC 61508 and IEC 61511. Includes SIL confor- NEPSI (China)
mity declaration (only for transmitter 7MF4...-.....-.R..)
Functional safety (PROFIsafe) C212)  "Intrinsic safety" and "Explosion-proof" E706)   
Certificate and PROFIsafe protocol explosion protection acc. to Kosha (Korea)
Functional safety (SIL2/3) C23  (only for transmitter
Devices suitable for use according to 7MF4...-.....-.[B, D]..-Z + E11)
IEC 61508 and IEC 61511. Includes SIL confor- Ex-protection Ex ia acc. to EAC Ex (Russia) E80   
mity declaration
Ex-protection Ex d acc. to EAC Ex (Russia) E81   
PED for Russia with initial calibration mark C99   
Ex-protection Ex nA/ic (Zone 2) according to E82   
EAC Ex (Russia)
Ex-protection Ex ia + Ex d + Zone 1D/2D E83   
1/256 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1
Add "-Z" to Article No. and specify Order code. Please add "-Z" to Article No. and specify
Two coats of lacquer on casing and cover G10    Order code(s) and plain text.
(PU on epoxy) Measuring range to be set
Interchanging of process connection side H01    Specify in plain text:
Stainless steel process flanges for vertical H03    • in the case of linear characteristic curve Y01  1)
differential pressure lines (max. 5 characters):
Y01: ... up to ... mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi
Transient protector 6 kV (lightning protection) J01    • in the case of square rooted characteristic Y02 
Chambered graphite gasket for process flange J02    (max. 5 characters):
Y02: ... up to ... mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi
EPDM O-rings for process flange with J05   
approval (WRC/WRAS) Stainless steel tag plate and entry in Y15   
device variable (measuring point descrip-
Vent valve or blanking plug of process J08    tion)
flange welded-in (orientation: on right when
viewing the display)7) Max. 16 characters, specify in plain text:
Y15: ...........................................
Vent valve or blanking plug of process J09   
flange welded-in (orientation: on left when Measuring point text (entry in device vari- Y16   
viewing the display)7) able)
Max. 27 char., specify in plain text: Y16: .......
Marine approvals
• Det Norske Veritas S10    Entry of HART address (TAG) Y17 
Germanischer Lloyd (DNV-GL) Max. 8 char., specify in plain text: Y17: .........
• Lloyds Register (LR) S11    Setting of pressure indication in pressure Y21   
• French marine classification society S12    units
Bureau Veritas (BV) Specify in plain text (standard setting: bar):
• American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) S14    Y21: mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, psi, ...
• Russian Maritime Register (RMR) S16    Note:
• Korean Register of Shipping (KR) S17    The following pressure units can be selected:
bar, mbar, mm H2O*), inH2O*), ftH2O*),
1) Han device plug IP65 mmHG, inHG, psi, Pa, kPa, MPa, g/cm2,
2) Profisafe transmitters can only be operated with the S7 F Systems V6.1 con- kg/cm2, Torr, ATM or %
figuration software in combination with S7-400H *) ref. temperature 20 °C
3) Tested according to IEC 61010. Only for measuring materials of the group Setting of pressure indication in Y22 + 
of fluids 2 in accordance with PED permissible. Not for use with dangerous non-pressure units2) Y01 or
media suitable. Y02
4) Specify in plain text:
Option does not contain gas explosion protection; only dust explosion pro- Y22: ..... up to ..... l/min, m3/h, m, USgpm, ...
tection: Use in or at Zone 1D/2D.
5) (specification of measuring range in pressure
Cannot be ordered with remote seal. units "Y01" or "Y02" is essential, unit with
6) When the additional ex option is selected, the ATEX marking on the device max. 5 characters)
is omitted. Only the Ex option selected via the Z option is marked.
7) Blanking plug is standard configuration. Order option A40 if a vent valve is Preset bus address Y25  
required instead of a blanking plug. possible between 1 and 126
Specify in plain text: Y25: .....................
(0 ... 100 s)
Factory mounting of valve manifolds, see accessories.
Only Y01, Y15, Y16, Y17, Y21, Y22, Y25 and D05 can be factory preset.
 = available
1) Measuring accuracies for PROFIBUS PA transmitters with Option Y01 are
calculated in the same way as for HART devices.
Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/257

© Siemens AG 2018
SITRANS P DS III
1 ■ Dimensional drawings
15 143 (5.6)
(0.6) 69 (2.7) 5
(0.94)
53 (2.1) 29 84 (3.31)
24
(1.14)
1
50 (1.97)
6
Ø80 (3.15)
128 (5.04)
3
166 (6.54)
7
2
8
min. 90 (3.54) 4)
262 (10.3)
12 9
Space for rotation
of housing
134 (5.28)
10
96 (3.8)
11
52 (2.05)
approx. 96 (3.78) 17 (0.67)
3 4
72 (2.83) 68 (2.7)
105 (4.1) 120 (4.7)
1 Electronic side, digital display 6 Blanking plug

(longer overall length for cover with window)1) 7 Screw cover - safety bracket (only for type of protection
2 Terminal side1) "Explosion-proof enclosure", not shown in the drawing)
3 Electrical connection: 8 Lateral venting for liquid measurement (Standard)
Screwed gland M20 x 1,5 or Screwed gland ½-14 NPT or 9 Lateral venting for gas measurement (suffix H02)
Han 7D/8D device plug2) 3)
10 Mounting bracket (option)
4 Harting adapter
11 Sealing screw with valve (option)
5 Protective cover over keys
12 Process connection: ¼-18 NPT (IEC 61518)
1)
Allow approx. 20 mm (0.79 inch) thread length to permit unscrewing
2)
Not with type of protection "Explosion-proof enclosure"
3)
Not with type of protection "FM + CSA" [IS + XP]"
4)
92 mm (3.62 inch) for minimum distance to permit rotation with indicator
SITRANS P DS III pressure transmitters for differential pressure and flow, dimensions in mm (inch)
1/258 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART Introduction 1
___________________
___________________
Safety instructions 2
SITRANS
___________________
Description 3
___________________
Installing/mounting 4
Pressure transmitter
SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART
___________________
Connecting 5
___________________
Operation 6
Operating Instructions
___________________
Operating functions through
HART 7
___________________
Functional safety 8
___________________
Commissioning 9
___________________
Service and maintenance 10
___________________
Technical data 11
___________________
Dimension drawings 12
___________________
Spare parts/accessories 13
___________________
Appendix A
7MF4.33..
___________________
List of abbreviations B
05/2015
A5E00047092-10
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Order number: A5E00047092 Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 05/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1 Purpose of this documentation ...............................................................................................11
1.2 Product information .................................................................................................................11
1.3 History .....................................................................................................................................11
1.4 Scope of the instructions ........................................................................................................12
1.5 Checking the consignment .....................................................................................................12
1.6 Transportation and storage .....................................................................................................13
1.7 Notes on warranty ...................................................................................................................13
2 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................................. 15
2.1 Precondition for use ................................................................................................................15
2.1.1 Other certificates .....................................................................................................................15
2.1.2 Laws and directives ................................................................................................................15
2.1.3 Conformity with European directives ......................................................................................16
2.2 Use in hazardous areas ..........................................................................................................17
3 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 19
3.1 System configuration ..............................................................................................................19
3.2 Application range ....................................................................................................................20
3.3 Structure .................................................................................................................................21
3.4 Nameplate layout ....................................................................................................................23
3.5 Measuring point label layout ...................................................................................................26
3.6 Functional principle .................................................................................................................27
3.6.1 Overview of mode of operation ...............................................................................................27
3.6.2 Operation of the electronics ....................................................................................................27
3.6.3 Measuring cell operation .........................................................................................................28
3.6.3.1 Measuring cell for gauge pressure .........................................................................................29
3.6.3.2 Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow rate .............................................................30
3.6.3.3 Measuring cell for level ...........................................................................................................31
3.6.3.4 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the differential pressure series ............................32
3.6.3.5 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series ...................................33
3.6.3.6 Measuring cell for gauge pressure, front-flush membrane .....................................................33
3.6.3.7 Measuring cell for absolute pressure, front-flush membrane .................................................34
3.7 Remote seal ............................................................................................................................35
3.8 SIMATIC PDM ........................................................................................................................35
4 Installing/mounting ................................................................................................................................ 37
4.1 Basic safety instructions .........................................................................................................37
4.1.1 Installation location requirements ...........................................................................................41

Operating Instructions, 05/2015, A5E00047092-10 5
Table of contents
4.1.2 Proper mounting..................................................................................................................... 41

4.2 Disassembly ........................................................................................................................... 42
4.3 Installation (except level) ....................................................................................................... 43
4.3.1 Instructions for installation (except level) ............................................................................... 43
4.3.2 Installation (except level) ....................................................................................................... 44
4.3.3 Fastening ............................................................................................................................... 44
4.4 "Level" installation .................................................................................................................. 46
4.4.1 Instructions for level installation ............................................................................................. 46
4.4.2 Installation for level ................................................................................................................ 47
4.4.3 Connection of the negative pressure line .............................................................................. 48
4.5 "Remote seal" installation ...................................................................................................... 51
4.5.1 Remote seal installation ......................................................................................................... 51
4.5.2 Installation of the remote seal with the capillary line.............................................................. 52
4.6 Turing the measuring cell against housing ............................................................................ 58
4.7 Rotating the display ............................................................................................................... 59
5 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 61
5.1 Basic safety instructions ........................................................................................................ 61
5.2 Connecting the device ........................................................................................................... 64
5.3 Connecting the Han plug ....................................................................................................... 66
5.4 Connecting the M12 connector .............................................................................................. 67
6 Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 71
6.1 Overview of operation ............................................................................................................ 71
6.2 Basic safety instructions ........................................................................................................ 72
6.3 Instructions for operation ....................................................................................................... 72
6.4 Display ................................................................................................................................... 73
6.4.1 Display elements .................................................................................................................... 73
6.4.2 Units display ........................................................................................................................... 74
6.4.3 Error display ........................................................................................................................... 75
6.4.4 Mode display .......................................................................................................................... 76
6.4.5 Status display ......................................................................................................................... 76
6.4.6 Overflow range ....................................................................................................................... 77
6.5 Local operation....................................................................................................................... 78
6.5.1 Local control elements ........................................................................................................... 78
6.5.2 Operation using buttons ......................................................................................................... 81
6.5.3 Start of scale value/full scale value ........................................................................................ 81
6.5.3.1 Difference between setting and adjusting .............................................................................. 81
6.5.3.2 Setting/adjusting the start of scale value ............................................................................... 85
6.5.3.3 Setting/adjusting the full scale value ...................................................................................... 86
6.5.4 Setting/adjusting electrical damping ...................................................................................... 88
6.5.5 Blind start of scale value/full scale value ............................................................................... 89
6.5.5.1 Difference between setting/adjusting and blind setting/adjusting .......................................... 89
6.5.5.2 Blind setting of start of scale value ........................................................................................ 91
6.5.5.3 Blind setting of full scale value ............................................................................................... 92
6.5.5.4 Blind adjusting of the start of scale value .............................................................................. 92

6 Operating Instructions, 05/2015, A5E00047092-10
Table of contents
6.5.5.5 Blind adjustment of the full scale value...................................................................................93

6.5.6 Trimming the zero point ..........................................................................................................93
6.5.7 Current simulator ....................................................................................................................94
6.5.8 Output current in case of fault .................................................................................................95
6.5.9 Locking buttons and functions ................................................................................................96
6.5.10 Releasing key lock or function lock .........................................................................................98
6.5.11 Flow rate measurement (only differential pressure) ...............................................................98
6.5.12 Measured value display ........................................................................................................101
6.5.13 Unit ........................................................................................................................................102
7 Operating functions through HART ...................................................................................................... 107
7.1 Operating functions through HART communication .............................................................107
7.2 Process tag data ...................................................................................................................108
7.3 Selecting the measuring modes ...........................................................................................108
7.3.1 Overview of measuring modes .............................................................................................108
7.3.2 Measuring mode selector .....................................................................................................109
7.3.3 Variable mapper....................................................................................................................109
7.3.4 Measuring mode "Pressure" .................................................................................................110
7.3.5 Customized characteristic curve ...........................................................................................111
7.3.6 Measuring mode "Level" .......................................................................................................111
7.3.7 Measuring mode "Flow rate" .................................................................................................114
7.3.8 Measuring mode "User" ........................................................................................................116
7.3.9 Measured value status ..........................................................................................................118
7.3.10 Analog output ........................................................................................................................122
7.3.11 Scaling the display value ......................................................................................................123
7.4 Setting zero point and limit point ...........................................................................................124
7.5 Blind setting of zero point and limit point ..............................................................................125
7.6 Zero point calibration (position correction)............................................................................125
7.7 Electrical damping.................................................................................................................126
7.8 Fast response mode .............................................................................................................126
7.9 Current sensor ......................................................................................................................126
7.10 Fault current ..........................................................................................................................126
7.11 Setting the current limits .......................................................................................................127
7.12 Key lock and write protection ................................................................................................128
7.13 Measured value display ........................................................................................................129
7.14 Selection of the physical unit ................................................................................................130
7.15 Bar graph ..............................................................................................................................131
7.16 Sensor calibration .................................................................................................................131
7.16.1 Sensor trim ............................................................................................................................131
7.16.2 Trimming the sensor .............................................................................................................132
7.17 Current simulator trim ...........................................................................................................132
7.18 Factory calibration.................................................................................................................134
7.19 Static configuration data .......................................................................................................134

Table of contents
7.20 Flow rate measurement (only differential pressure) ............................................................ 136

7.21 Diagnostic functions ............................................................................................................. 136
7.21.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 136
7.21.2 Operating hours counter ...................................................................................................... 137
7.21.3 Calibration timer and service timer ...................................................................................... 137
7.21.4 Min/max indicator ................................................................................................................. 138
7.21.5 Limit modules ....................................................................................................................... 139
7.22 Simulation ............................................................................................................................ 141
7.22.1 Overview of simulation ......................................................................................................... 141
7.22.2 Simulation as fixed value ..................................................................................................... 142
7.22.3 Simulation with a ramp function ........................................................................................... 143
7.23 Limit monitor......................................................................................................................... 143
8 Functional safety ..................................................................................................................................147
8.1 Safety function ..................................................................................................................... 147
8.2 Safety Integrity Level (SIL) ................................................................................................... 149
8.3 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 151
8.4 Safety characteristics ........................................................................................................... 152
8.5 Maintenance/check .............................................................................................................. 152
8.5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 152
8.5.2 Checking safety function/proof test ...................................................................................... 153
8.5.2.1 Checking temperature sensors ............................................................................................ 155
8.5.2.2 Simulating fault current ........................................................................................................ 155
8.5.2.3 Two-point measurement ≥ 10% of the maximum measuring range .................................... 155
8.5.2.4 Two-point measurement ≥ 50% of the maximum measuring range .................................... 158
8.5.2.5 Checking pressure transmitter for external damage ............................................................ 160
8.6 Add-on parts......................................................................................................................... 160
8.6.1 Checking a device with add-on pneumatic block ................................................................. 160
8.6.2 Checking a device with add-on remote seal ........................................................................ 161
9 Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................163
9.1 Basic safety instructions ...................................................................................................... 163
9.2 Introduction to commissioning ............................................................................................. 163
9.3 gauge pressure, absolute pressure from the differential pressure series and absolute
pressure from the gauge pressure series ............................................................................ 164
9.3.1 Commissioning for gases ..................................................................................................... 164
9.3.2 Commissioning with steam or liquid..................................................................................... 166
9.4 Differential pressure and flow rate ....................................................................................... 167
9.4.1 Safety notes for commissioning with differential pressure and flow rate ............................. 167
9.4.2 Commissioning in gaseous environments ........................................................................... 168
9.4.3 Commissioning for liquids .................................................................................................... 170
9.4.4 Commissioning with vapor ................................................................................................... 172
10 Service and maintenance .....................................................................................................................175
10.1 Basic safety instructions ...................................................................................................... 175
10.2 Maintenance and repair work............................................................................................... 178

Table of contents
10.2.1 Defining the maintenance interval ........................................................................................178

10.2.2 Checking the gaskets............................................................................................................179
10.2.3 Display in case of a fault .......................................................................................................179
10.2.4 Changing the measuring cell and application electronics.....................................................180
10.3 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................181
10.3.1 Servicing the remote seal measuring system .......................................................................181
10.4 Return procedure ..................................................................................................................183
10.5 Disposal ................................................................................................................................184
11 Technical data .................................................................................................................................... 185
11.1 Overview of technical data ....................................................................................................185
11.2 SITRANS P DS III input ........................................................................................................186
11.3 SITRANS P410 input ............................................................................................................192
11.4 Output ...................................................................................................................................194
11.5 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P DS III............................................................................195
11.6 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P410................................................................................203
11.7 Operating conditions .............................................................................................................205
11.8 Construction ..........................................................................................................................209
11.9 Display, keyboard and auxiliary power .................................................................................214
11.10 Certificates and approvals ....................................................................................................216
11.11 HART communication ...........................................................................................................217
12 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................................ 219
12.1 SITRANS P, DS III/P410 for gauge pressure and absolute pressure from the gauge
pressure series .....................................................................................................................219
12.2 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for differential pressure, flow rate and absolute pressure from
the differential pressure series ..............................................................................................221
12.3 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for level ..........................................................................................224
12.4 SITRANS P DS III/P410 (flush mounted) .............................................................................225
12.4.1 Note 3A and EHDG...............................................................................................................226
12.4.2 Connections as per EN and ASME .......................................................................................227
12.4.3 F&B and pharma flange ........................................................................................................228
12.4.4 PMC Style .............................................................................................................................232
12.4.5 Special connections ..............................................................................................................233
13 Spare parts/accessories ...................................................................................................................... 235
13.1 Order data .............................................................................................................................235
13.2 Order data for SIMATIC PDM ...............................................................................................237
A Appendix............................................................................................................................................. 239
A.1 Certificate ..............................................................................................................................239
A.2 Literature and standards .......................................................................................................239
A.3 Literature and catalogs .........................................................................................................239

Table of contents
A.4 Overview of HART operating structure ................................................................................ 240

A.5 Technical support ................................................................................................................. 243
B List of abbreviations .............................................................................................................................245
Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................247
Index ...................................................................................................................................................251

Introduction 1
1.1 Purpose of this documentation
These instructions contain all information required to commission and use the device. Read
the instructions carefully prior to installation and commissioning. In order to use the device
correctly, first review its principle of operation.
The instructions are aimed at persons mechanically installing the device, connecting it
electronically, configuring the parameters and commissioning it, as well as service and
maintenance engineers.
SITRANS P DS III and SITRANS P410

These instructions describe the pressure transmitters SITRANS P DS III and
SITRANS P410. The main difference of the SITRANS P410 is the higher measuring
precision compared to the SITRANS P DS III. Refer to the information in the section
Technical data (Page 185).
You order SITRANS P410 using the order option C41 for specific device versions.
1.2 Product information

The programming manual is an integral part of the CD, which is either supplied or can be
ordered. The programming manual is also available on the Siemens homepage.
On the CD, you will also find the catalog extract with the ordering data, the Software Device
Install for SIMATIC PDM for additional installation, and the required software.
See also
Product information on SITRANS P in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitransp)
Process instrumentation catalog (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/catalogs)
1.3 History
This history establishes the correlation between the current documentation and the valid
firmware of the device.

Introduction
1.4 Scope of the instructions
The documentation of this edition applies to the following firmware:
Edition Firmware identifier nameplate System integration Installation path for PDM
5/2015 FW: 11.03.03, FW: 11.03.04, SIMATIC PDM 8.x SITRANS P DSIII: SITRANS
FW: 11.03.05, FW: 11.03.06 P DSIII.2
SITRANS P410: SITRANS P
DSIII.2/P410
The most important changes in the documentation when compared with the respective
previous edition are given in the following table.
Edition Remark
5/2015 The following chapters have been changed:
• "Functional safety" chapter
• "Technical data" chapter
1.4 Scope of the instructions
Table 1- 1 "7MF4.33.." stands for:
Order number SITRANS P DS III/P410 for

7MF4033.. Gauge pressure
7MF4133.. Gauge pressure, flush mounted diaphragm
7MF4233.. Absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series
7MF4333.. Absolute pressure from the differential pressure series
7MF4433.. Differential pressure and flow rate, PN 32/160 (MAWP
464/2320 psi)
7MF4533.. Differential pressure and flow rate, PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi)
7MF4633.. Level
1.5 Checking the consignment

1. Check the packaging and the delivered items for visible damage.
2. Report any claims for damages immediately to the shipping company.

Introduction
1.6 Transportation and storage
3. Retain damaged parts for clarification.

4. Check the scope of delivery by comparing your order to the shipping documents for
correctness and completeness.
WARNING
Using a damaged or incomplete device
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas.
• Do not use damaged or incomplete devices.
See also
Return procedure (Page 183)

To guarantee sufficient protection during transport and storage, observe the following:
● Keep the original packaging for subsequent transportation.
● Devices/replacement parts should be returned in their original packaging.
● If the original packaging is no longer available, ensure that all shipments are properly
packaged to provide sufficient protection during transport. Siemens cannot assume
liability for any costs associated with transportation damages.
CAUTION
Insufficient protection during storage
The packaging only provides limited protection against moisture and infiltration.
• Provide additional packaging as necessary.
Special conditions for storage and transportation of the device are listed in "Technical data"
(Page 185).
1.7 Notes on warranty

The contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing
agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The sales contract contains all obligations on
the part of Siemens as well as the complete and solely applicable warranty conditions. Any
statements regarding device versions described in the manual do not create new warranties
or modify the existing warranty.
The content reflects the technical status at the time of publishing. Siemens reserves the right
to make technical changes in the course of further development.

Introduction

Safety instructions 2
2.1 Precondition for use
This device left the factory in good working condition. In order to maintain this status and to
ensure safe operation of the device, observe these instructions and all the specifications
relevant to safety.
Observe the information and symbols on the device. Do not remove any information or
symbols from the device. Always keep the information and symbols in a completely legible
state.
2.1.1 Other certificates
Figure 2-1 Chinese Manufacturing Certificate
Symbol Explanation
Consult operating instructions
2.1.2 Laws and directives

Observe the test certification, provisions and laws applicable in your country during
connection, assembly and operation. These include, for example:
● National Electrical Code (NEC - NFPA 70) (USA)
● Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) (Canada)
Further provisions for hazardous area applications are for example:
● IEC 60079-14 (international)
● EN 60079-14 (EC)

Safety instructions
2.1.3 Conformity with European directives

The CE mark on the device is a sign of conformity with the following European directives:
Electromagnetic Compatibil- Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the
ity EMC approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to elec-
2004/108/EC tromagnetic compatibility and repealing Directive 89/336/EEC.
Atmosphère explosible Directive of the European Parliament and the Council on the
ATEX approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning
94/9/EC equipment and protective systems intended for use in potential-
ly explosive atmospheres.
Pressure Equipment Di- Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the
rective PED approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning
97/23/EC pressure equipment.
The standards applied can be found in the EC declaration of conformity for the device.
WARNING
Improper device modifications
Danger to personnel, system and environment can result from modifications to the device,
particularly in hazardous areas.
• Only carry out modifications that are described in the instructions for the device. Failure
to observe this requirement cancels the manufacturer's warranty and the product
approvals.
Due to the large number of possible applications, each detail of the described device
versions for each possible scenario during commissioning, operation, maintenance or
operation in systems cannot be considered in the instructions. If you need additional
information not covered by these instructions, contact your local Siemens office or company
representative.
Note
Operation under special ambient conditions
We highly recommend that you contact your Siemens representative or our application
department before you operate the device under special ambient conditions as can be
encountered in nuclear power plants or when the device is used for research and
development purposes.

Safety instructions
2.2 Use in hazardous areas

Qualified personnel for hazardous area applications
Persons who install, connect, commission, operate, and service the device in a hazardous
area must have the following specific qualifications:
● They are authorized, trained or instructed in operating and maintaining devices and
systems according to the safety regulations for electrical circuits, high pressures,
aggressive, and hazardous media.
● They are authorized, trained, or instructed in carrying out work on electrical circuits for
hazardous systems.
● They are trained or instructed in maintenance and use of appropriate safety equipment
according to the pertinent safety regulations.
WARNING
Unsuitable device for the hazardous area
Danger of explosion.
• Only use equipment that is approved for use in the intended hazardous area and
labelled accordingly.
See also
Technical data (Page 185)
WARNING
Loss of safety of device with type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i"
If the device has already been operated in non-intrinsically safe circuits or the electrical
specifications have not been observed, the safety of the device is no longer ensured for use
in hazardous areas. There is a danger of explosion.
• Connect the device with type of protection "Intrinsic safety" solely to an intrinsically safe
circuit.
• Observe the specifications for the electrical data on the certificate and/or in Chapter
"Technical data (Page 185)".

Safety instructions
WARNING
Use of incorrect device parts in potentially explosive environments
Devices and their associated device parts are either approved for different types of
protection or they do not have explosion protection. There is a danger of explosion if device
parts (such as covers) are used for devices with explosion protection that are not expressly
suited for this type of protection. If you do not adhere to these guidelines, the test
certificates and the manufacturer warranty will become null and void.
• Use only device parts that have been approved for the respective type of protection in
the potentially explosive environment. Covers that are not suited for the "explosion-
proof" type of protection are identified as such by a notice label attached to the inside of
the cover with "Not Ex d Not SIL".
• Do not swap device parts unless the manufacturer specifically ensures compatibility of
these parts.
WARNING
Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge
To prevent the build-up of an electrostatic charge in a hazardous area, the key cover must
be closed during operation and the screws tightened.
The key cover may be opened temporarily at any time for the purposes of operating the
pressure transmitter, even during plant operation; the screws should then be tightened
again.
NOTICE
Electrostatic-sensitive devices
The device contains electrostatic-sensitive devices (ESD). ESD can be destroyed by
voltages far too low to be detected by humans. These voltages can occur if you simply
touch a component part or the electrical connections of a module without being
electrostatically discharged. The damage to a module caused by overvoltage cannot
normally be detected immediately; it only becomes apparent after a longer period of
operating time has elapsed.
Protective measures against the discharge of static electricity:
• Make sure that no power is applied.
• Before working with modules, make sure that you discharge static from your body, for
example by touching a grounded object.
• Devices and tools used must be free of static charge.
• Hold modules only by their edges.
• Do not touch connector pins or conductor tracks on a module with the ESD notice.

Description 3
3.1 System configuration
Overview
The pressure transmitter can be used in a number of system configurations:
● as a stand-alone version, supplied with the necessary auxiliary power
● as part of a complex system environment, e.g. SIMATIC S7
System communication
Communication is via the HART protocol, using:
● HART Communicator (load 230 ... 1100 Ω)
● PC with HART modem, on which appropriate software is installed, e.g. SIMATIC PDM
(load 230 ... 500 Ω)
● Control system which can communicate via the HART protocol, e.g. SIMATIC PCS7
Figure 3-1 Possible system configurations

Description
3.2 Application range
3.2 Application range
Overview
Depending on the variant, the pressure transmitter measures corrosive, non-corrosive and
hazardous gases, vapors and liquids.
You can use the pressure transmitter for the following types of measurement:
● Gauge pressure
● Absolute pressure
● Differential pressure
With appropriate parameter settings and the necessary add-on parts (e.g. flow limiters and
remote seals), the pressure transmitter can also be used for the following measurements:
● Level
● Volume
● Mass
● Volumetric flow
● Mass flow rate
The output signal is always a load-independent direct current between 4 and 20 mA.
You can install the "intrinsically-safe" or "flameproof enclosure" version of the pressure
transmitter in hazardous areas. The devices have an EC type examination certificate and
comply with the appropriate harmonized European CENELEC directives.
Pressure transmitters with remote seals of various shapes can be provided for special
applications. For example, measuring high-viscosity substances is a special application.
Gauge pressure
This version measures aggressive, non-aggressive and hazardous gases, vapors and
liquids.
The smallest span is 0.01 bar g (0.145 psi g), and the largest 700 bar g (10153 psi g).
Differential pressure and flow rate

This version measures corrosive, non-corrosive and hazardous gases, vapors and liquids.
You can use this version for the following measurement types:
● differential pressure, e.g. effective differential pressure
● Gauge pressure, suitable for small positive or negative pressure value
● in combination with a restrictor device: flow rate q ~
The smallest measuring span is 1 mbar (0.0145 psi), the largest 30 bar (435 psi).

Description
3.3 Structure
Level
This version with mounting flange measures the level of non-corrosive, corrosive and
hazardous liquids in open and closed containers. The smallest measuring span is 25 mbar
(0.363 psi), the largest 5 bar (72.5 psi). The nominal diameter of the mounting flange is DN
80 or DN 100 or 3" or 4".
The negative connection of the measuring cell is kept open when measuring the level of
open containers. This measurement is referred to as "measurement against atmosphere".
The negative connection is normally connected with the container when measuring the level
of closed containers. This balances the static pressure.
Wetted parts are made of various materials, depending on corrosion resistance
requirements.
Absolute pressure
This version measures the absolute pressure of aggressive, non-aggressive and hazardous
gases, vapors and liquids.
There are two series: a "differential pressure" series and a "gauge pressure" series. The
"differential pressure" series is distinguished by a high overload capability.
The smallest measuring span of the "differential pressure" series is 8.3 mbar a (0.12 psi a),
and the largest is 100 bar a (1450 psi a).
The smallest measuring span of the "gauge pressure" series is 8.3 mbar a (0.12 psi a), and
the largest is 30 bar a (435 psi a).
3.3 Structure
Depending on a customer-specific order, the device comprises different parts.

Description
3.3 Structure
① Key cover ⑧ Cable inlet, optionally with cable gland

② Cover (front), optionally with inspection window ⑨ Cover (rear) for electrical terminal compartment
③ Display (optional) ⑩ Electrical terminal compartment
④ Measuring point label ⑪ Protective conductor connector/equipotential bond-
ing terminal
⑤ Retaining screw; twist proofing of the measuring cell ⑫ Nameplate (approval information)
in relation to the electronics enclosure
⑥ Process connection ⑬ Blanking plug
⑦ Nameplate (general information)
Figure 3-2 View of the pressure transmitter: Left: Front right: Rear view
● The electronics enclosure is made of die cast aluminum or precision cast stainless steel.
● The housing has a removable circular cover at the front and the back.
● Depending on the device version, the front cover ② may be designed as an inspection
window. You can read the measured values straight off the digital display through this
inspection window.
● The cable inlet ⑧ to the electrical terminal compartment is at the side; either the left or
right-hand one can be used. The unused opening is closed with a blanking plug ⑬.
● The protective conductor terminal/equipotential bonding terminal ⑪ is located at the back
of the enclosure.
● The electrical terminal compartment ⑩ for the auxiliary power and shield is accessible
when you remove the back cover ⑨.
● The measuring cell with a process connection ⑥ is located in the lower section of the
enclosure. This measuring cell is secured against twisting by a retaining screw ⑤.
Thanks to the modular design of the pressure transmitter, the measuring cell and
application electronics or connection board can be replaced if required.
● On the upper face of the enclosure you can see crosshead screws which secure the key
cover ①, under which there are 3 keys for local operation.

Description
3.4 Nameplate layout
Layout of nameplate with general information

The nameplate bearing the order number and other important information, such as design
details and technical data, is on the side of the enclosure.
Figure 3-3 Example of SITRANS P DS III nameplate

Description
① Order number (machine-readable product ② Serial number

code)
Figure 3-4 Example of SITRANS P410 nameplate
Layout of nameplate with approval information

The nameplate with approval information is on the opposite side. This nameplate shows the
hardware and firmware versions, for example. You must also observe the information in the
relevant certificate for a pressure transmitter version for use in hazardous areas.

Description
Figure 3-5 Example for approval plate SITRANS P DS III

Description
3.5 Measuring point label layout
① Characteristics of the hazardous area ⑤ Maximum surface temperature (temperature

class)
② Category for operating area ⑥ Device protection level
③ Type of protection ⑦ Firmware ID
④ Group (gas, dust) ⑧ Hardware identifier
Figure 3-6 Example for approval plate SITRANS P410
Figure 3-7 Example of measuring point label

Description
3.6 Functional principle
3.6.1 Overview of mode of operation

This chapter describes how the pressure transmitter works.
First the electronics are described, and then the physical principle of the sensors which are
used with the various device versions for the individual measurement types.
3.6.2 Operation of the electronics
Description
① Measuring cell sensor ⑦ HART modem

② Measuring amplifier ⑧ Buttons (local operation)
③ Analog-to-digital converter ⑨ Display
④ Microcontroller ⑩ Connection for external ammeter
⑤ Digital-to-analog converter IA Output current
⑥ Each with an EEPROM in the measuring cell UH Auxiliary power
and in the electronics
Figure 3-8 Operation of the electronics with HART communication

Description
Function
● The input pressure is converted into an electrical signal by the sensor ①.
● This signal is amplified by the measuring amplifier ② and digitized in an analog-to-digital
converter ③.
● The digital signal is analyzed in a microcontroller ④ and corrected with regard to linearity
and thermal characteristics.
● The digital signal is then converted in a digital-to-analog converter ⑤ into the output
current of 4 to 20 mA. A diode circuit provides reverse voltage protection.
● You can make an uninterrupted current measurement with a low resistance ammeter at
the connection ⑩.
● The measuring cell-specific data, electronics data and parameter assignment data are
saved in two EEPROMs ⑥. The first memory is linked to the measuring cell, the second
to the electronics.
Operation
● The buttons ⑧ can be used to call up individual functions, so-called modes.
● If you have a device with a display ⑨, you can use it to track the mode settings and other
device messages.
● The basic mode settings can be changed with a computer and HART modem ⑦ via
PDM.
3.6.3 Measuring cell operation
WARNING
Destruction of the seal diaphragm
Danger of injury or damage to device
If the seal membrane is destroyed, the sensor may also be destroyed. If the seal
membrane is destroyed, no reliable measured values can be output.
Hot, toxic and corrosive process media can be released.
• Ensure that the material of the device parts wetted by the process medium is suitable for
the medium. Refer to the information in Technical data (Page 185).
• Make sure that the device is suitable for the maximum operating pressure of your
system. Refer to the information on the nameplate and/or in Technical data (Page 185).
• Define maintenance intervals for regular inspections in line with device use and
empirical values. The maintenance intervals will vary from site to site depending on
corrosion resistance.
In the following sections, the process variable to be measured is called general inlet
pressure.

Description
Overview
The following modes of operation are described:
● Gauge pressure
● Differential pressure and flow rate
● Level
The following process connections are available, for example:
● G1/2 B, 1/2-14 NPT
● Male thread: M20
● Flange connection in accordance with EN 61518
● Flush-mounted process connections
3.6.3.1 Measuring cell for gauge pressure
① Reference pressure opening ⑤ Filling liquid

② Measuring cell ⑥ Gauge pressure sensor
③ Process connection pe Inlet pressure
④ Seal diaphragm
Figure 3-9 Function chart of measuring cell for gauge pressure
The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the gauge pressure sensor ⑥ via the seal diaphragm
④ and the fill fluid ⑤, displacing its measuring diaphragm. The displacement changes the
resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the gauge pressure sensor. The
change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the inlet pressure.
Pressure transmitters with spans ≤ 6.3 MPa measure the inlet pressure against atmosphere,
those with spans ≥ 16 MPa the inlet pressure against vacuum.

Description
3.6.3.2 Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow rate
① Inlet pressure P+ ⑥ Overload diaphragm

② Pressure cap ⑦ Filling liquid
③ O-ring ⑧ Seal diaphragm
④ Measuring cell body ⑨ Inlet pressure P-
⑤ Differential pressure sensor
Figure 3-10 Function chart of the measuring cell for differential pressure and flow rate
● Differential pressure is transmitted to the differential pressure sensor ⑤ through the seal
diaphragms ⑧ and the filling liquid ⑦.
● When measuring limits are exceeded, the seal diaphragm ⑧ is displaced until the seal
diaphragm rests on the measuring cell body ④. The differential pressure sensor ⑤ is
thus protected against overloading since no further deflection of the overload diaphragm
⑥ is possible.
● The seal diaphragm ⑧ is displaced by the differential pressure. The displacement
changes the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the differential
pressure sensor.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the
differential pressure.

Description
3.6.3.3 Measuring cell for level
① Pressure cap ⑥ Seal diaphragm on the measuring cell

② O-ring ⑦ Filling liquid of the measuring cell
③ Measuring cell body ⑧ Capillary tube with the fill fluid of the mounting
flange
④ Overload diaphragm ⑨ Flange with a tube
⑤ Differential pressure sensor ⑩ Seal diaphragm on the mounting flange
Figure 3-11 Function chart of the measuring cell for level
● The inlet pressure (hydrostatic pressure) works hydraulically on the measuring cell
through the seal diaphragm ⑩ on the mounting flange ⑩.
● Differential pressure at the measuring cell is transmitted to the differential pressure
sensor ⑤ through the seal diaphragms ⑥ and the filling liquid ⑦.
● When measuring limits are exceeded, the overload diaphragm ④ is displaced until one of
the seal diaphragms ⑥ or ⑩ rests on the measuring cell body ③. The seal diaphragms
⑥ thus protect the differential pressure sensor ⑤ from overload.
● The seal diaphragm ⑥ is displaced by the differential pressure. The displacement
changes the resistance of the four doped piezoresistors in the bridge circuit.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the
differential pressure.

Description
3.6.3.4 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the differential pressure series
① Pressure cap ⑥ Overload diaphragm

② Seal diaphragm on the measuring cell ⑦ Measuring cell filling liquid
③ O-ring ⑧ Reference pressure
④ Measuring cell body pe Pressure input variable
⑤ Absolute pressure sensor
Figure 3-12 Function chart of measuring cell for absolute pressure
● Absolute pressure is transmitted to the absolute pressure sensor ⑤ through the seal
diaphragm ② and the filling liquid ⑦.
● When measuring limits are exceeded, the overload diaphragm ⑥ is displaced until the
seal diaphragm ② rests on the measuring cell body ④. The seal diaphragm thus
protects the absolute pressure sensor ⑤ from overload.
● The difference between the inlet pressure (pe) and the reference pressure ⑧ on the
negative side of the measuring cell displaces the seal diaphragm ②. The displacement
changes the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the absolute pressure
sensor.
● The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the absolute
pressure.

Description
3.6.3.5 Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series
① Measuring cell ④ Filling liquid

② Process connection ⑤ Absolute pressure sensor
③ Seal diaphragm Pe Inlet pressure
Figure 3-13 Function chart of measuring cell for absolute pressure
The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the absolute pressure sensor ⑤ via the seal
diaphragm ③ and the fill fluid ④, displacing its measuring diaphragm. The displacement
changes the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the absolute pressure
sensor. The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the inlet
pressure.
3.6.3.6 Measuring cell for gauge pressure, front-flush membrane
① Reference pressure opening ⑤ Filling liquid

② Measuring cell ⑥ Gauge pressure sensor
③ Process connection pe Inlet pressure
④ Seal diaphragm
Figure 3-14 Function chart of the measuring cell for gauge pressure, flush mounted diaphragm
The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the gauge pressure sensor ⑥ via the seal diaphragm
④ and the filling liquid ⑤, displacing its measuring diaphragm. The displacement changes

Description
the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the gauge pressure sensor. The
change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage proportional to the inlet pressure.
Pressure transmitters with measuring span ≤ 63 bar measure the inlet pressure against
atmosphere, those with measuring spans ≥ 160 bar the inlet pressure against vacuum.
3.6.3.7 Measuring cell for absolute pressure, front-flush membrane
① Measuring cell ④ Filling liquid

② Process connection ⑤ Absolute pressure sensor
③ Seal diaphragm pe Inlet pressure
Figure 3-15 Function chart of the measuring cell for absolute pressure, flush mounted diaphragm
The inlet pressure (pe) is transferred to the absolute pressure sensor ⑤ via the seal
diaphragm ③ and the filling liquid ④, and displaces its measuring diaphragm. The
displacement changes the resistance of the four piezoresistors (bridge circuit) of the
absolute pressure sensor. The change in the resistance causes a bridge output voltage
proportional to the inlet pressure.

Description
3.7 Remote seal
3.7 Remote seal
Product description
● A remote seal measuring system comprises the following elements:
– Remote seal
– Transmission line, e.g. capillary line
– Pressure transmitter.
Note
Malfunction of the remote seal measuring system
If you separate the components of the remote seal measuring system, this results in
malfunctioning of the system.
Do not separate the components under any circumstances.
● The measuring system based on a hydraulic principle is used to transfer pressure.

● The capillary line and the remote seal diaphragm are the most sensitive components in
the remote seal measuring system. The material thickness of the remote seal diaphragm
is only ∼ 0.1 mm.
● The smallest of leakages in the transmission system leads to the loss of transmission
fluid.
● The loss of transmission fluid results in inaccuracies in the measurement and failure of
the measuring system.
● In order to avoid leaks and measuring errors, please observe the installation and
maintenance instructions in addition to the safety notes.
3.8 SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC PDM is a software package for configuring, parameter assignment, commissioning,
diagnostics and maintenance of this device and other process devices.
SIMATIC PDM offers simple monitoring of process values, alarms, and device status
information.
SIMATIC PDM allows the process device data to be:
● displayed
● set
● modified
● saved
● diagnosed
● checked for plausibility

Description
3.8 SIMATIC PDM
● managed
● simulated

Installing/mounting 4
4.1 Basic safety instructions
WARNING
Wetted parts unsuitable for the process media
Danger of injury or damage to device.
Hot, toxic and corrosive media could be released if the process medium is unsuitable for
the wetted parts.
• Ensure that the material of the device parts wetted by the process medium is suitable for
the medium. Refer to the information in "Technical data" (Page 185).
WARNING
Incorrect material for the diaphragm in Zone 0
Danger of explosion in the hazardous area. If operated with intrinsically safe supply devices
of category "ib" or devices of the flameproof enclosure version "Ex d" and simultaneous use
in Zone 0, pressure transmitter explosion protection depends on the tightness of the
diaphragm.
• Ensure that the material used for the diaphragm is suitable for the process medium.
Refer to the information in the section "Technical data (Page 185)".
WARNING
Unsuitable connecting parts
Danger of injury or poisoning.
In case of improper mounting hot, toxic and corrosive process media could be released at
the connections.
• Ensure that connecting parts (such as flange gaskets and bolts) are suitable for
connection and process media.
Note
Material compatibility
Siemens can provide you with support concerning selection of sensor components wetted by
process media. However, you are responsible for the selection of components. Siemens
accepts no liability for faults or failures resulting from incompatible materials.

Installing/mounting
WARNING
Exceeded maximum permissible operating pressure
Danger of injury or poisoning.
The maximum permissible operating pressure depends on the device version. The device
can be damaged if the operating pressure is exceeded. Hot, toxic and corrosive process
media could be released.
• Make sure that the device is suitable for the maximum permissible operating pressure of
your system. Refer to the information on the nameplate and/or in "Technical data
(Page 185)".
WARNING
Exceeded maximum ambient or process media temperature
Device damage.
• Make sure that the maximum permissible ambient and process media temperatures of
the device are not exceeded. Refer to the information in Chapter "Technical data
(Page 185)".
WARNING
Open cable inlet or incorrect cable gland
• Close the cable inlets for the electrical connections. Only use cable glands or plugs
which are approved for the relevant type of protection.
WARNING
Incorrect conduit system
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas as result of open cable inlet or incorrect conduit
system.
• In the case of a conduit system, mount a spark barrier at a defined distance from the
device input. Observe national regulations and the requirements stated in the relevant
approvals.
See also

Installing/mounting
WARNING
Incorrect mounting at Zone 0
• Ensure sufficient tightness at the process connection.
• Observe the standard IEC/EN 60079-14.
WARNING
Danger with "flameproof enclosure" protection
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas. An explosion may be caused by hot gas escaping
from the flameproof enclosure if there is too little space between it and the fixed parts.
• Ensure that there is a space of at least 40 mm between the flameproof joint and the
fixed parts.
① Flameproof joint
WARNING
Loss of explosion protection
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas if the device is open or not properly closed.
• Close the device as described in Chapter "Connecting the device (Page 64)".

Installing/mounting
WARNING
these parts.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces resulting from hot process media
Danger of burns resulting from surface temperatures above 70 °C (155 °F).
• Take appropriate protective measures, for example contact protection.
• Make sure that protective measures do not cause the maximum permissible ambient
temperature to be exceeded. Refer to the information in Chapter "Technical data
(Page 185)".
CAUTION
External stresses and loads
Damage to device by severe external stresses and loads (e.g. thermal expansion or pipe
tension). Process media can be released.
• Prevent severe external stresses and loads from acting on the device.

Installing/mounting
4.1.1 Installation location requirements
WARNING
Insufficient air supply
The device may overheat if there is an insufficient supply of air.
• Install the device so that there is sufficient air supply in the room.
• Observe the maximum permissible ambient temperature. Refer to the information in the
section "Technical data (Page 185)".
CAUTION
Aggressive atmospheres
Damage to device through penetration of aggressive vapors.
• Ensure that the device is suitable for the application.
NOTICE
Direct sunlight
Increased measuring errors.
• Protect the device from direct sunlight.
Make sure that the maximum ambient temperature is not exceeded. Refer to the
information in the section Technical data (Page 185).
4.1.2 Proper mounting
NOTICE
Incorrect mounting
The device can be damaged, destroyed, or its functionality impaired through improper
mounting.
• Before installing ensure there is no visible damage to the device.
• Make sure that process connectors are clean, and suitable gaskets and glands are
used.
• Mount the device using suitable tools. Refer to the information in Technical data
(Page 185) for installation torque requirements.

Installing/mounting
4.2 Disassembly
CAUTION
Loss of degree of protection
Damage to device if the enclosure is open or not properly closed. The degree of protection
specified on the nameplate or in Chapter "Technical data (Page 185)" is no longer
guaranteed.
• Make sure that the device is securely closed.
See also
Connecting the device (Page 64)
4.2 Disassembly
WARNING
Incorrect disassembly
The following dangers may result through incorrect disassembly:
- Injury through electric shock
- Danger through emerging media when connected to the process
- Danger of explosion in hazardous area
In order to disassemble correctly, observe the following:
• Before starting work, make sure that you have switched off all physical variables such
as pressure, temperature, electricity etc. or that they have a harmless value.
• If the device contains dangerous media, it must be emptied prior to disassembly. Make
sure that no environmentally hazardous media are released.
• Secure the remaining connections so that no damage can result if the process is started
unintentionally.

Installing/mounting
4.3 Installation (except level)
4.3.1 Instructions for installation (except level)
Requirements
Note
Compare the desired operating data with the data on the nameplate.
Please also refer to the information on the remote seal if this is fitted.
Note
Protect the pressure transmitter from:
• Direct thermal radiation
• Rapid temperature fluctuations
• Severe soiling
• Mechanical damage
• Direct sunlight
The installation location is to be as follows:

● Easily accessible
● As close as possible to the measuring point
● Vibration-free
● Within the permitted ambient temperature values
Installation configuration
The pressure transmitter may in principle be configured above or below the pressure tapping
point. The recommended configuration depends on the aggregate state of the medium.
Installation configuration for gases

Install the pressure transmitter above the pressure tapping point.
Lay the pressure tubing with a constant gradient to the pressure tapping point, so that any
condensation produced can drain in the main line and thereby avoid corruption of the
measured values.
Installation configuration for vapor and liquid

Install the pressure transmitter below the pressure tapping point.
Lay the pressure tubing with a constant gradient to the pressure tapping point so that any
gas pockets can escape in the main line.

Installing/mounting
4.3.2 Installation (except level)
Note
Damage to measuring cell
When installing the process connection of the pressure transmitter, do not rotate the
housing. Rotating the housing may damage the measuring cell.
To avoid damage to the device, tighten the threaded nuts of the measuring cell using a
wrench.
Procedure
Attach the pressure transmitter to the process connection with an appropriate tool.
See also
Introduction to commissioning (Page 163)
4.3.3 Fastening
Fastening without the mounting bracket

You can fasten the pressure transmitter directly to the process connection.
Fastening with the mounting bracket

You can fasten the mounting bracket as follows:
● On a wall or a mounting frame using two screws
● On a vertical or horizontal mounting tube (Ø 50 to 60 mm) using a tube bracket
Fasten the pressure transmitter mounting bracket using the two screws provided.

Installing/mounting
Figure 4-1 Fastening the pressure transmitter on the mounting bracket
Figure 4-2 An example of fastening the pressure transmitter on the mounting bracket in the case of
differential pressure and horizontal differential pressure lines

Installing/mounting
4.4 "Level" installation
Figure 4-3 An example of fastening on the mounting bracket in the case of differential pressure and vertical differential
pressure lines
4.4.1 Instructions for level installation
Requirements
Note
Compare the desired operating data with the data on the nameplate.
Please also refer to the information on the remote seal if this is fitted.

Installing/mounting
Note
Protect the pressure transmitter from:
• Direct thermal radiation
• Rapid temperature fluctuations
• Severe soiling
• Mechanical damage
• Direct sunlight
Note
Select the height of the mounting flange such that the pressure transmitter is always
mounted below the lowest fill height to be measured.
The installation location is to be as follows:

● Easily accessible
● The measuring point must be as close as possible
● Vibration-free
● Within the permitted ambient temperature values
4.4.2 Installation for level
Note
Seals are required for the installation. The seals must be compatible with the medium to be
measured.
Seals are not included in the delivery.
Procedure
To install the pressure transmitter for level, proceed as follows:
1. Attach the seal to the container's mating flange.
Ensure that the seal is centrically positioned and that it does not restrict the movement of
the flange's seal diaphragm in any way as otherwise the tightness of the process
connection is not guaranteed.
2. Screw on the pressure transmitter's flange.
3. Observe the installation position.

Installing/mounting
4.4.3 Connection of the negative pressure line
Assembly on an open container

A line is not required when taking measurements in an open container since the negative
chamber is connected with the atmosphere.
Ensure that no dirt enters the open connection ports, for example by using connection
screws with a 7MF4997-1CP bleed valve.
Formula:
Start of scale value: pMA = ρ · g · hU
Full-scale value: pME = ρ · g · hO
Measurement assembly on an open container
hU Lower filling level ΔpMA Start of scale value

hO Upper filling level ΔpME Full-scale value
p Pressure ρ Density of the measured medium in
the container
g Acceleration due to gravity

Installing/mounting
Assembly on a closed container

When taking measurements in a closed container without or with little condensate formation,
the negative pressure line is not filled. Lay the line in such a way that pockets of condensate
do not form. Install a condensation container if required.
Formula:
Start-of-scale value: ΔpMA = ρ · g ·
hU
Full-scale value: ΔpME = ρ · g · hO
Measurement assembly on a closed container (no or

little condensate separation)

p Pressure ρ Density of the measured medium in
the container

Installing/mounting
When taking measurements in a closed container with strong condensate formation, you
must fill the negative pressure line (mostly with the condensate of the measured medium)
and install a condensate pot. You can cut off the device using the dual pneumatic block
7MF9001-2.
Formula:
Start-of-scale value:
ΔpMA = g · (hU · ρ- hV · ρ')
Full-scale value:
ΔpMA = g · (hO · ρ- hV · ρ')
Measurement assembly on a closed container (strong con-

densate formation)

hV Gland distance ρ Density of the measured medium in
the container
p Pressure ρ' Density of fluid in the negative pres-
sure line corresponds to the prevailing
temperature there
The process connection on the negative side is a female thread 1/4-18 NPT or an oval flange.
Lay the line for the negative pressure using a seamless steel tube 12 mm x 1.5 mm.

Installing/mounting
4.5 "Remote seal" installation
4.5.1 Remote seal installation
General installation instructions

● Keep the measuring system in the factory packing until it is installed in order to protect it
from mechanical damage.
● When removing from the factory packing and installing: ensure that damage to and
mechanical deformations in the membrane are prevented.
● Never loosen the sealed filling screws on the remote seal and the measuring instrument.
● Do not cause damage to the remote separating membrane; scratches on the remote
separating membrane, e.g. due to sharp-edged objects, are the main starting points for
corrosion.
● Select suitable gaskets for sealing.
● Use a gasket having an adequately large inner diameter for flanging. Insert the gasket
concentrically; contact with the membrane leads to deviations in measurements.
● When using gaskets made of soft materials or PTFE: follow the guidelines of the gasket
manufacturer, especially regarding the tightening torque and setting cycles.
● At the time of installation, use suitable fastening components such as screws and nuts
that are compliant with fitting and flange standards.
● Excessive tightening of screwed joints on the process connection may displace the zero
point on the pressure transmitter.
Note
Commissioning
If a shut-off valve exists, open the shut-off valve slowly when commissioning in order to
avoid pressure surges.
Note
Permissible ambient and operating temperatures
Install the pressure measuring device such that the permissible limits of ambient and
measured medium temperatures are not overshot or undershot even with the
consideration of the effect of convection and heat radiation.
• Note the effect of temperature on the measuring accuracy.
• When selecting the remote seals, ensure that fittings and flange components have
adequate pressure-temperature resistance by selecting suitable materials and
pressure ratings. The pressure rating specified on the remote seal applies to reference
conditions according to IEC 60770.
• For the maximum permissible pressure at higher temperatures, please refer to the
standard specified on the remote seal.

Installing/mounting
Using remote seals with pressure measuring device for hazardous areas:
● When using remote seals with pressure measuring device for hazardous areas, the
permissible limits of ambient temperatures for the pressure transmitter must not be
exceeded. Hot surfaces on the cooling section (capillaries or cooling elements) are a
possible source of ignition. Initiate suitable measures.
● When remote seals with a flame arrestor are used, the pressure measuring instrument
determines the permissible ambient temperature. In the case of potentially explosive
gaseous atmosphere, the temperature around the flame arrestor must not exceed
+60 °C.
4.5.2 Installation of the remote seal with the capillary line
Notes
● Do not rest the measurement assembly on the capillary line.
● Do not bend capillary lines; risk of leakages and/or risk of considerable increase in the
setting time of the measuring system.
● Owing to the risk of bending and breakages, pay attention to mechanical overloads at the
joints such as capillary line-remote seal and capillary line-measuring device.
● Unwinding the excess capillary lines with a radius of at least 150 mm.
● Fasten the capillary line such that there are no vibrations.
● Permissible height differences:
– When installing the pressure measuring device above the measuring point, keep the
following in mind: In the case of remote seal measuring systems with silicon, glycerin
or paraffin oil filling, the height difference of H1max. = 7 m must not be exceeded.
– If halocarbon oil is used as a fill fluid, this maximum height difference is only H1max. =
4 m; see installation type A and installation type B.
If negative overpressure is observed during measurements, reduce the permissible height
difference accordingly.

Installing/mounting
Installation type for gauge pressure and level measurements (open containers)
Installation type A
Start of scale value:
pMA = ρFL * g * HU + ρoil * g * H1
Full-scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HO + ρoil * g * H1
Pressure transmitter above the

measuring point
Installation type B
pMA = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * H1
Full-scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HO - ρoil * g * H1
Pressure transmitter below the

measuring point
H1 ≤ 7 m (23 ft); with halocarbon oil as the filling liquid, only H1 ≤ 4 m(13.1 ft)
Key
pMA Start of scale value
pME Full-scale value
ρFL Density of the process medium in the container
ρoil Density of the filling oil in the capillary line of the remote seal
HU Lower filling level
HO Upper filling level
H1 Distance between the container flange and the pressure transmitter
For absolute pressure measurements (vacuum), install the measuring device at least at the
height of the remote seal or below it (see installation types C).

Installing/mounting
Installation types for absolute pressure measurements (closed containers)
Installation type C1
pMA = pstart + ρoil * g * H1
Full-scale value:
pME = pend + ρoil * g * H1
Installation type C2
Pressure transmitter for absolute pressure always below the measuring point: H1 ≥ 200 mm
(7.9 inch)
Key
pstart Start of scale pressure
pend Full scale pressure
H1 Distance between the container flange and the pressure transmitter

Installing/mounting
Note
Effects of temperature
Keep the following instructions in mind in order to minimize keep the effects of temperature
in remote seal measuring systems with the differential pressure measuring device:
Install the device such that the positive and negative sides are symmetrical as far as ambient
effects, especially ambient temperatures, are concerned.
Installation type for differential pressure and flow rate measurements
Installation type D
pMA = pstart - ρoil * g * HV
Full-scale value:
pME = pend - ρoil * g * HV
Key
pstart Start of scale pressure
pend Full scale pressure
HV Gland distance

Installing/mounting
Installation types for level measurements (closed containers)
Installation type E
pMA = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * HV
Full-scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HU - ρoil * g * HV
Key
HV Gland distance

Installing/mounting
Installation type G
H1 ≤ 7 m (23 ft), for halocarbon oil, however only
H1 ≤ 4 m (13.1 ft)
Full-scale value:
pME = ρFL * g * HO - ρoil * g * HV
Pressure transmitter for differential

pressure above the upper measuring
point, no vacuum
Installation type H
Full-scale value:
Below the lower measuring point

Installation type J
H2 ≤ 7 m (23 ft); with halocarbon oil as the filling
liquid, only H2 ≤ 4 m(13.1 ft)
Full-scale value:
Between the measuring points, no

vacuum

Installing/mounting
4.6 Turing the measuring cell against housing
Key
HV Gland distance
4.6 Turing the measuring cell against housing
Description
You can turn the measuring cell against the housing. Rotating the pressure transmitter
facilitates its operation when it is installed at an angle, for example. The buttons and the
current connection can thus also be operated for an external measuring device. The display
also remains visible in enclosure covers with an inspection window.
Only limited turning is permissible! The turning range ① is marked at the foot of the
electronic housing. An orientation mark ③ is provided at the throat of the measuring cell.
This mark must remain in the marked section when turning.
① Turning range
② Retaining screw
③ Orientation mark
Figure 4-4 Example: Turning range of pressure transmitters for pressure and absolute pressure
from the gauge pressure series
The turning range for pressure transmitters for differential pressure and flow rate, absolute
pressure from the differential pressure series and level is identified in a similar manner.

Installing/mounting
4.7 Rotating the display
Procedure
NOTICE
Damage to the ribbon cable
If the pressure transmitter enclosure is rotated against the measuring cell, this can damage
the ribbon cable (sensor connection to the electronics).
• Comply with the specified range of rotation ① as detailed.
1. Loosen the retaining screw ② (Allen screw 2.5 mm).

2. Turn the electronic housing against the measuring cell. Follow the marked turning range
① while doing so.
3. Tighten the retaining screw (torque: 3.4 to 3.6 Nm).

You can rotate the display in the electronics enclosure. This makes it easier to read the
display if the device is not being operated in a vertical position.
Procedure
1. Unscrew the cover of the electrical cable compartment. See section Structure (Page 21).
An identification text "FIELD TERMINAL" is provided at the side of the housing.
2. Unscrew the display. Depending on the application position of the pressure transmitter,
you can reinstall it at four different positions. You can turn it by ±90° or ±180°.
3. Screw the covers back on as far as they will go.
4. Secure the covers with the cover catch.

Installing/mounting

Connecting 5
WARNING
Unsuitable cables and/or cable glands
• Only use suitable cables and cable glands complying with the requirements specified in
Chapter "Technical data (Page 185)".
• Tighten the cable glands in accordance with the torques specified in Chapter "Technical
data (Page 185)".
• When replacing cable glands use only cable glands of the same type.
• After installation check that the cables are seated firmly.
WARNING
Hazardous contact voltage in versions with 4-conductor extension
Danger of electrocution in case of incorrect connection.
• Observe the instructions in the 4-conductor extension operating manual for the electrical
connection.
See also
WARNING
Improper power supply
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas as result of incorrect power supply, e.g. using
direct current instead of alternating current.
• Connect the device in accordance with the specified power supply and signal circuits.
The relevant specifications can be found in the certificates, in Chapter "Technical data
(Page 185)" or on the nameplate.

Connecting
WARNING
Unsafe extra-low voltage
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas due to voltage flashover.
• Connect the device to an extra-low voltage with safe isolation (SELV).
WARNING
Lack of equipotential bonding
Danger of explosion through compensating currents or ignition currents through lack of
equipotential bonding.
• Ensure that the device is potentially equalized.
Exception: It may be permissible to omit connection of the equipotential bonding for devices
with type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i".
WARNING
Unprotected cable ends
Danger of explosion through unprotected cable ends in hazardous areas.
• Protect unused cable ends in accordance with IEC/EN 60079-14.
WARNING
Improper laying of shielded cables
Danger of explosion through compensating currents between hazardous area and the non-
hazardous area.
• Only ground shielded cables that run into the hazardous area at one end.
• If grounding is required at both ends, use an equipotential bonding conductor.
WARNING
Connecting device in energized state
• Connect devices in hazardous areas only in a de-energized state.
Exceptions:
• Circuits of limited energy may also be connected in the energized state in hazardous
areas.
• Exceptions for type of protection "Non-sparking nA" (Zone 2) are regulated in the
relevant certificate

Connecting
WARNING
Incorrect selection of type of protection
Danger of explosion in areas subject to explosion hazard.
This device is approved for several types of protection.
1. Decide in favor of one type of protection.
2. Connect the device in accordance with the selected type of protection.
3. In order to avoid incorrect use at a later point, make the types of protection that are not
used permanently unrecognizable on the nameplate.
NOTICE
Ambient temperature too high
Damage to cable sheath.
• At an ambient temperature ≥ 60 °C (140 °F), use heat-resistant cables suitable for an
ambient temperature at least 20 °C (36 °F) higher.
NOTICE
Incorrect measured values with incorrect grounding
The device must not be grounded via the "+" connection. It may otherwise malfunction and
be permanently damaged.
• If necessary, ground the device using the "-" connection.
Note
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
You can use this device in industrial environments, households and small businesses.
For metal housings there is an increased electromagnetic compatibility compared to high-
frequency radiation. This protection can be increased by grounding the housing, see Chapter
"Connecting the device (Page 64)".

Connecting
5.2 Connecting the device
Note
Improvement of interference immunity
• Lay signal cables separate from cables with voltages > 60 V.
• Use cables with twisted wires.
• Keep device and cables in distance to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Use shielded cables to guarantee the full specification according to HART.
• Refer to HART communication information in Chapter "Technical data (Page 185)".
Opening the device

1. Use a 3 mm Allen key to loosen the cover (if present).
2. Unscrew the cover of the electrical cable compartment. An identification text "FIELD
TERMINALS" is provided at the side of the housing.
Connecting the device

1. Lead the connecting cable through the cable gland ③.
2. Connect the device to the plant with the protective conductor connection ⑦.

Connecting
3. Connect the wires to the terminals "+" and "-". ④

Observe the correct polarity. If necessary, ground the device using the "-" connection by
connecting the "-" connection to the ground terminal ⑨.
4. If necessary, connect the shield to the screw of the ground terminal ⑨. The ground
terminal is electrically connected to the external protective conductor connection ⑦.
① Isolating power supply with integrated ⑤ Test connector for direct current measur-
load ing device or connection for external
display
② Auxiliary power ⑥ Safety catch
③ Cable entry for auxiliary power/analog ⑦ Protective conductor connection/
output equipotential bonding terminal
④ Connecting terminals ⑧ Process connection
⑨ Ground terminal
Figure 5-1 Electrical connection, power supply
Closing the device

1. Screw the covers ④⑦ back on as far as they will go.
2. Secure each cover with the cover catch ③⑥.
3. Close the key cover ①.

Connecting
5.3 Connecting the Han plug
4. Tighten the screws in the key cover.

5. Check the tightness of the blanking plugs ⑤ and cable gland ② in accordance with the
degree of protection.
① Key cover ⑤ Blanking plug

② Cable gland ⑥ Safety catch (front)
③ Safety catch (back) ⑦ Cover (front), optionally with inspection window
④ Cover (rear) for electrical terminal compartment ⑧ Safety catch for stainless steel enclosure
Figure 5-2 View of the pressure transmitter: Left: Back right: Front view
See also
Structure (Page 21)
5.3 Connecting the Han plug
WARNING
The connector may only be used for Ex ia devices and non-Ex devices; otherwise the
safety required for the approval is not guaranteed.
Note
Observe the protection class of the Han plug when defining the protection class.
The contact parts for the coupling socket are also supplied.

Connecting
5.4 Connecting the M12 connector
Procedure
1. Slide the sleeve and the screwed joint on the cable.
2. Strip approx. 8 mm of the cable ends.
3. Crimp the contact parts on the cable ends.
4. Assemble the coupling socket.
IA Output current
UH Auxiliary power
Connector pin assignment with

Han 7D or Han 8D plug
See also
Procedure
CAUTION
A conductive connection must not exist between the shield and the connector housing.
WARNING
The connector may only be used for Ex ia devices and non-Ex devices; otherwise the
safety required for the approval is not guaranteed.
Note
Observe the protection class of the M12 connector when defining the protection class.
For devices in which a connector is already available on the housing, the connection is
established using a cable jack.
1. Thread the parts of the cable jack as described by the connector manufacturer.
2. Strip approximately 18 mm of the bus cable ①.

Connecting
3. Twist the shield.

4. Thread the shield in the insulating sleeve.
5. Draw 8 mm of shrink sleeve over the cable, wires and shield up to the reference edge ②.
6. Screw the cable ends and the shield in the pin insert.
7. Fix the parts of the cable jack as described by the connector manufacturer.
Figure 5-3 Preparing the connecting cable
① Reference edge for stripping ③ Insulating sleeve over the shield

② Reference edge for the dimension ④ Shrink sleeve
specifications for cable assembly

Connecting
Pin assignment
Layout for M12 connector Layout for M12 jack

① M12 x 1 thread ① Positioning slot
② Positioning catch
1 + 1 +
2 Not connected 2 Not connected
3 - 3 -
4 Shield 4 Shield
Middle jack contact not connected
See also

Connecting

Operation 6
6.1 Overview of operation
Introduction
The following description contains an overview of the operating functions that you can
execute using the pressure transmitter, and the safety notes that are to be observed when
doing so. You can operate the transmitter on-site through HART communication. First, the
on-site operation and then, the operating functions using HART are described.
Contents of the chapter

● Basic safety instructions (Page 72)
● Instructions for operation (Page 72)
● Display (Page 73)
● Local operation (Page 78)
Overview of operating functions

You can configure basic settings of the pressure transmitter using the buttons on the device.
You can configure all settings through HART communication.
The following table describes the basic operating functions. More operating functions for
special applications are accessible through HART.
Table 6- 1 Operating functions
Function Using buttons Using HART

Start of scale value Yes Yes
Full scale value Yes Yes
Electrical damping Yes Yes
Blind adjustment of the start of scale Yes Yes
value
Blind adjustment of the full scale value Yes Yes
Zero point calibration (position correc- Yes Yes
tion)
Current simulator Yes Yes
Fault current Yes Yes
Keyboard lock and write protection Yes Yes, release except for write protec-
tion
Unit type, unit Yes Yes

Operation
Function Using buttons Using HART

Characteristic curve (lin., rad.) Yes Yes
(Not relevant for absolute
or gauge pressure)
Customized characteristic curve No Yes
Diagnostic function No Yes
More operating functions for special applications are accessible through HART.
If a device does not have a display, its operations are limited. This is however not applicable
for selecting functions using HART.
Note
Incorrect reproduction of the process pressure
If you have changed the basic functions of the pressure transmitter, the display and the
measurement output could be set such that the actual process pressure is not reproduced.
Therefore, check the basic parameters before commissioning.
6.3 Instructions for operation

The following rules are applicable for the operation of the pressure transmitter:
● The device counts numerical values always in an ascending order step by step starting
from the least significant digit displayed.
If you keep the button pressed for a longer time, it counts the next higher digit displayed.
This procedure is used for fast coarse adjustment over a wide number range. Release
the [↑] or [↓] button again for fine adjustment. Press the button again.
Violations of the measured value limits are output on the display by or .

● The keyboard must have been unlocked in order to operate the device using the
keyboard.
● If you are operating the pressure transmitter locally, write access through HART is denied
during this time.
However, it is always possible to read the data, e.g. measured values.
Note
The setting is saved and the measured values are automatically displayed again if more
than two minutes have passed after a button was pressed for the last time.
The operating instructions in the "Local operation without display" section apply if the
device has been delivered with a blind cover.

Operation
6.4 Display
6.4 Display
6.4.1 Display elements
Structure
① Measured value ⑤ Violation of lower limit

② Unit/bar graph ⑥ Symbol for measured value
③ Root display ⑦ Violation of higher limit
④ Mode/button lock ⑧ Communication display
Figure 6-1 Display layout
Description
The display is used for the local display of the measured value ① with:
● Unit ②
● Mode ④
● Sign ⑥
● Statuses ⑤ and ⑦
Depending on the customer setting, the displayed measured value ① represents the
following:
● The current emitted by the pressure transmitter
● The percentage measurement value of the adjusted measurement type, e.g. level, related
to the adjusted measurement range.
● The measurement value in a selectable physical unit
The Violation of lower limit ⑤ and Violation of upper limit ⑦ displays are also referred to as
status since they have meanings dependent on the settings.
If the communication display ⑧ blinks, this indicates an active communication.

Operation
6.4 Display
6.4.2 Units display
Description
The unit display comprises five 14-segment fields for representing the unit as a percentage
value, physical unit or current value. A bar graph showing the percentage measured value
range from 0 to 100% can be displayed as an alternative to the unit. The bar graph function
is disabled by default.
Display
Figure 6-2 Examples for measured value display for current and bar graph
The following messages may appear as a ticker in the bottom line of the display. They have
no influence on the current output.
Table 6- 2 Message as ticker
Ticker Meaning
"DIAGNOSTIC WARNING" Is always displayed if:
• An event configured by the user is to be signaled with a
warning. For example:
– Limit reached
– Event counter for limit values exceeded
– Calibration time expired
– Current saturation reached
• The status of one of the device variables is
"UNCERTAIN".
"SIMULATION" Is always displayed when the simulation of a pressure value
or temperature value is active.
See also
Measured value status (Page 118)

Operation
6.4 Display
6.4.3 Error display
Description
If hardware faults, software errors or diagnostic alarms occur in the pressure transmitter, the
message "Error" appears in the measured value display.
A ticker appears in the bottom line of the display indicating the type of error. This diagnostic
information is also available via HART communication.
Display
Figure 6-3 Example of error message
The following messages may appear as a ticker in the bottom line of the display.
Ticker Meaning
"HARDWARE FIRMWARE ALARM" Contains hardware faults such as:
• incorrect checksum
• incorrect EEPROM data
• Defective EEROM
• RAM fault
• ROM fault
• inconsistent data
• EEPROMs not initialized
"DIAGNOSTIC ALARM" Is always displayed if
• an event configured by the user is to be signaled
with an alarm.
For example:
– Limit reached
– Event counter for limit values exceeded
– Calibration time expired
– Current saturation reached
• the status of one of the device variables is "BAD".
"SENSOR BREAK" Appears when there is a sensor break.

Operation
6.4 Display
See also
6.4.4 Mode display
Description
The selected active mode is displayed in the mode display.
Display
Figure 6-4 Example of mode display
In the example, a damping of 0.2 seconds was set in mode 4.
6.4.5 Status display
Description
The arrows of the status display have a different meaning depending on the mode setting.
The table below shows the meanings of the arrows in the respective functions.
Meaning
Table 6- 3 Meaning of the arrow displays
Function Mode Display Display

Adjusting start of 2 if the upper current limit is exceed- if the value falls below the
scale value ed lower current limit
Adjusting full scale 3 if the upper current limit is exceed- if the value falls below the
value ed lower current limit
Adjusting damping 4 if the upper damping value is ex- if the value falls below the
ceeded lower damping value
only for the pressure device version only for the pressure device
version

Operation
6.4 Display
Function Mode Display Display

Blind adjustment of 5 if the upper sensor limit is exceed- if the value falls below the
the start of scale ed lower sensor limit
value
Blind adjustment of 6 if the upper sensor limit is exceed- if the value falls below the
the full scale value ed lower sensor limit
Position correction 7 if the max span is exceeded by if the value falls below the
more than 5% of the upper current lower current limit
limit
Root application point 12 if the root application point of 15% if the value falls below the root
is exceeded application point of 5%
Keyboard operation 2, 3, 5, when the span to be adjusted is when the span to be adjusted
6 larger than the maximum span is smaller than the minimum
span
Normal operation Current exceeds the upper satura- Current falls below the lower
tion limit saturation limit
Pressure exceeds the upper sensor Pressure falls below the lower
limit. sensor limit.
6.4.6 Overflow range
Description
The output signal is divided into defined ranges:
● Measuring range
● Saturation limits
● Fault current
The pressure transmitter emits the output current according to the device variable selected
as primary variable (PV). The working range of the current lies between 4 mA and 20 mA.
Meaning
When the measurement limits are exceeded or not reached, the measured values are
correctly displayed in the overflow range.
A ticker is displayed in the bottom line of the display showing alternately the message
UNDER or OVER and the selected unit. The possible overflow range can be adjusted via
HART communication. If either of the overflow limits are violated, the output current remain
constant. Violations of the measured value limits are output on the display by or .
Note
The setting of the overflow range and the fault current range can be freely selected via
HART communication.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Reference
NAMUR recommendation NE43 dated 03.02.2003
"Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters"
See also
Fault current (Page 126)
Setting the current limits (Page 127)
6.5 Local operation
6.5.1 Local control elements
Introduction
The pressure transmitter can be operated on-site using the keys. Selectable modes can be
used to choose and execute the functions described in the table. The number of available
functions is limited if the device does not have a display.
Control elements
① Display ④ Increment key

② Connecting plug for the display ⑤ Decrement key
③ Mode key ⑥ Key symbols shown in the key cover
Figure 6-5 Position of keys and display

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Operating functions
Note
Zero point calibration
For absolute pressure transmitters, the start of scale value is at vacuum.
• For absolute pressure transmitters, set vacuum for zero point calibration.
Table 6- 4 Operating functions using keys
Function Mode Key function Display, explanations Factory setting

[M] [↑] [↓] [↑] and [↓] (default value)
Measured value The The current measured value is
mode displayed as you have adjusted it
s are in the "Measured value display,
se- mode 13" function.
lected
here.
Start of scale 2 Current Current Set to 4 mA Output current in mA
value (only in higher lower
"Pressure" meas-
uring mode)
Full scale value 3 Current Current Set to 20 Output current in mA
(only in "Pressure" higher lower mA
measuring mode)
Electrical damping 4 Damping Damping Set to 0 Time constant T63 in seconds 2s
higher lower Adjustment range: 0.0 s to 100.0 s
Start of scale 5 Pressure Pressure Set the start Start of scale value in the selected "0"; for ordering
value in the so- higher lower of scale pressure unit options Y01 and
called blind ad- value to 0 Y02 as ordered
justment
Full scale value in 6 Pressure Pressure Set the full Full scale value in the selected Measuring cell full-
the so-called blind higher lower scale value pressure unit scale value;
adjustment to upper for ordering op-
measuring tions Y01 and Y02
limit as ordered
Zero point calibra- 7 Correction Correc- execute Pressurize the pressure transmit-
tion (position value tion value ter for gauge pressure, differential
correction) higher lower pressure, flow rate or level.
Evacuate the pressure transmitter
for absolute pressure (< 0.1‰ of
the measuring span).
(Start of scale value remains unaf-
fected)
Measured value in pressure unit
Current transmit- 8 Current Current switch on constant output current in mA
ter higher lower "3.6"; "4", "12", "20" or "22.8"
Switch off using the [M] key.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Function Mode Key function Display, explanations Factory setting

[M] [↑] [↓] [↑] and [↓] (default value)
Output current in 9 Switch between lower lower fault selected output current possible: 22.8 mA
case of fault fault current and up- current Fault current limits adjusted by
per fault current. user
Key lock or func- 10 Switch between the – 0 None "0" for devices
tion lock five functions LA all locked with inspection
window in the
LO all locked except for start cover
of scale value
"LS" for devices
LS all locked except for start with no inspection
of scale value and full window in the
scale value cover
L Write protection
Operation via HART not
possible.
Characteristic 11 Switch between the linear lin linear "lin" (also for or-
curve1) four functions srlin square root extracting dering option Y01)
(linear up to the applica- "srli2" for ordering
tion point) option Y02
sroff Square root extracting
(deactivated up to the
application point)
srli2 square root extracting
(linear up to the applica-
tion point 10%)
Application point 12 Greater Smaller 10% flow Adjustment range of 5 to 15% flow not available for
of the square root rate rate. ordering option
extracting charac- Y02 or character-
teristic curve1) istic curve = srli2
Measured value 13 Select from three – • Display type (input value) "mA" (for ordering
display options. options Y21 and
• Output current in mA
Y22, unit as speci-
• Measured value in % fied)
Unit 14 Select from the table In each Physical unit "bar" (for ordering
for measured value case, the options Y21 and
display. first value Y22, unit as speci-
from the fied)
table of the
physical unit
1) Not relevant for gauge and absolute pressure)
See also
Overview of operation (Page 71)
Operating functions through HART communication (Page 107)

Operation
6.5 Local operation
6.5.2 Operation using buttons
Introduction
This overview informs you about the most important safety notes to be observed when
operating the pressure transmitter. Furthermore, the overview guides you in adjusting the
operating functions on site.
Requirement
The keyboard must have been unlocked in order to operate the device using the buttons.
Procedure
In the default setting, the device is in the measured value display.
To adjust the operating functions, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen both the screws of the keyboard cover and lift it upwards.
2. Press the [M] button until the desired mode is displayed.
3. Keep pressing the [↑] or [↓] button until the desired value is displayed.
4. Press the [M] button.
Now you have saved the values and the device goes to the next mode.
5. Close the keyboard cover using the two screws.
Note
If you allow more than 2 minutes to pass after pressing a button, the setting is saved and
the measured value display is returned to automatically.
See also
Releasing key lock or function lock (Page 98)
6.5.3 Start of scale value/full scale value
6.5.3.1 Difference between setting and adjusting
Introduction
In "Pressure" measuring mode, you can set or adjust the start of scale value and full scale
value using the buttons. Modes 2 and 3 are used for this. Rising and falling characteristic
curves can be realized with appropriate use of the buttons. If the pressure transmitter is not
in "Pressure" measuring mode, this mode is skipped in local operation.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Difference
The difference between setting and adjusting lies in the calculation.
Setting with reference pressure

Requirement
Two reference pressures pr1 and pr2 are available. The reference pressures are initialized by
the process or generated by a pressure sensor.
When setting, a desired start of scale value or a full scale value is allocated to the standard
current values (4 mA or 20 mA). After setting, the span given on the nameplate may no
longer correspond to the setting made.
Depending on the series and measuring range, a maximum downscaling of 1:100 can be
achieved (measuring span ratio = r, turn down).
The correlation between the measured pressure and the output current generated is linear.
The square root extracting characteristic curve for differential pressure transmitters is an
exception. Calculate the output current using the following formula.
I Output current MAactual Old start of scale value

p Pressure MEactual Old full scale value
MA Start of scale value MAtarget New start of scale value
ME Full scale value MEtarget New full scale value
Figure 6-6 Current calculation formula for setting
Example of setting with reference pressure
A Initial situation
B Setting start of scale value
C Setting full scale value
Example of setting with reference pressure

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Explanations for the example of setting with reference pressure
A The measuring range is from 0 to 1.6 MPa. You change the start-of-scale value from 0 to
0.2 MPa and the full-scale value from 1.6 MPa to 1.4 MPa. The span is then 1.2 MPa.
B You apply a process pressure of 0.2 MPa.
Use the [M] button to set the pressure transmitter to mode 2. Press the [↑] and [↓] keys
simultaneously for 2 seconds to set the start of scale value.
If the input pressure is 0.2 MPa, the pressure transmitter generates an output current of
4 mA.
C You apply a process pressure of 1.4 MPa.
Use the [M] button to set the pressure transmitter to mode 3. Press the [↑] and [↓] keys
simultaneously for 2 seconds to set the full scale value.
If the input pressure is 1.4 MPa, the pressure transmitter generates an output current of
20 mA.
D The output current can be calculated for any input pressure using the "current calculation
formula for setting".
Note
If the value exceeds or falls below the preset measuring limits by more than 20% when
setting, the setting function is not carried out. The old value is retained in this case.
With a marked elevation of the zero point, the full scale value must therefore previously be
reduced such that it still lies within the permitted range after elevation of the zero point. This
setting function is only possible in "Pressure" measuring mode.
Adjusting with reference pressure

Requirement:
The reference pressure, the adjusted start of scale value and adjusted full scale value are
known.
When adjusting, a start of scale value or a full scale value can be allocated to a desired
current value with the aid of a reference pressure. This function is particularly suitable when
the required pressures for the start of scale value and the full scale value are not available.
After adjustment, the measuring range specified on the nameplate may no longer
correspond to the setting made.
Using the formulae below, the current to be set for the desired start of scale value and the
full scale value can be calculated.
To calculate the output currents when adjusting the start of scale value or the full scale
value, the reference pressure must be selected such that a value between 4 and 20 mA
results for the current.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
I Output current MAactual Old start of scale value

IMA Current to be adjusted with MAtarget MEactual Old full scale value
IME Current to be adjusted with MEtarget MAtarget New start of scale value
p Pressure MEtarget New full scale value
pref Existing reference pressure
Figure 6-7 Current calculation formula for adjusting with reference pressure
Example of adjusting with reference pressure
A Initial situation
B Calculating start of scale value
C Calculating full scale value
Example of adjusting with reference pressure

Explanations for the example of adjusting with reference pressure
A The measuring range is from 0 to 1.6 MPa. You change the start-of-scale value from 0 to
0.2 MPa and the full-scale value from 1.6 MPa to 1.4 MPa. The span is then 1.2 MPa.
You apply a reference pressure of 1.1 MPa.
B Use the [M] button to set the pressure transmitter to mode 2.
The "Current calculation formula for adjusting with reference pressure" can be used to
calculate the current to be set for the desired start-of-scale value IMA (13 mA at 0.2 MPa)
with the reference pressure applied. It can be adjusted with the [↑] or [↓] buttons IMA.
C Use the [M] button to set the pressure transmitter to mode 3.
The "Current calculation formula for adjusting" can be used to calculate the current to be
set for the desired full-scale value IME (16 mA at 1.4 MPa) with the reference pressure
applied. It can be adjusted with the [↑] or [↓] buttons IM.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Note
If the preset measuring limits are exceeded or fallen below by more than 20% during
adjustment, the resulting current cannot be set above these limits.
reduced such that it still lies within the permitted range after elevation of the zero point.
See also
Unit (Page 102)
6.5.3.2 Setting/adjusting the start of scale value
NOTICE
Inadvertent adjustment of parameters on devices without display or without visible display
Key lock is canceled if you press the [M] key for longer than 5 seconds, see chapter
"Releasing key lock or function lock (Page 98)". In the case of a device without display or
without a visible display, you could inadvertently change parameters.
• Always press the [M] key for less than 5 seconds.
Introduction
Set or adjust the start of scale value of the pressure transmitter in mode 2.
You can also adjust the start of scale value or the full scale value separately as well as
adjust both these values one after the other.
Requirement
You are familiar with the correct operation of the pressure transmitter and the associated
safety information.
You have selected a reference pressure that corresponds to the start of scale value and is
within the permissible tolerance range.
The pressure transmitter is in "Pressure" measuring mode.
Setting start of scale value

To set the output current of the start of scale value to 4 mA, proceed as follows:
1. Create the reference pressure.
2. Set mode 2.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
3. Set the start of scale value to 4 mA.

4. Save with the [M] button.
Adjusting start of scale value

If you do not set the output current but constantly adjust it, you need to calculate the currents
to be adjusted mathematically.
To the adjust the output current of the start of scale value, proceed as follows:
2. Set mode 2.
3. Adjust the output current of the start of scale value to the calculated value.
Setting the start-of-scale value without a display

You have a device without a display and wish to set the start of scale value.
To set the output current of the start of scale value to 4 mA, proceed as follows:
2. Press the [↑] and [↓] buttons simultaneously.
The device has set the start of scale value to 4 mA.
3. When you release the buttons, the device saves the adjusted value automatically.
Adjusting the start-of-scale value without a display

You have a device without a display and wish to adjust rather than set the start of scale
value.
You will need an ammeter for this purpose.
To the adjust the output current of the start of scale value, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the ammeter to the test connector.
3. Adjust the output current of the start of scale value using the [↑] or [↓] button.
4. When you release the button, the device saves the adjusted value automatically.
6.5.3.3 Setting/adjusting the full scale value
Introduction
Set or adjust the full scale value of the pressure transmitter in mode 3.
You can also adjust the start of scale value or the full scale value separately as well as
adjust both these values one after the other.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Requirement
safety information.
You have selected a reference pressure that corresponds to the full scale value and is within
the permissible tolerance range.
The pressure transmitter is in "Pressure" measuring mode.
Setting full scale value

To set the output current of the full scale value to 20 mA, proceed as follows:
2. Set mode 3.
3. Set the full scale value to 20 mA.
Adjusting full scale value

If you do not set the output current but constantly adjust it, you need to calculate the currents
to be adjusted mathematically.
To the adjust the output current of the full scale value, proceed as follows:
2. Set mode 3.
3. Adjust the output current of the full scale value to the calculated value.
Setting the full-scale value without a display

You have a device without a display and wish to set the full scale value.
To set the output current of the full scale value to 20 mA, proceed as follows:
2. Press and hold the [M] button.
3. Also press the [↑] and [↓] buttons simultaneously.
The device has set the full scale value to 20 mA.
4. When you release the buttons, the device saves the adjusted value automatically.
Adjusting the full-scale value without a display

You have a device without a display and wish to adjust rather than set the full scale value.
You will need an ammeter for this purpose.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
To the adjust the output current of the full scale value, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the ammeter to the test connector.
3. Press and hold the [M] button.
4. Adjust the output current of the full scale value to the calculated value using the [↑] or [↓]
button.
5. When you release the button, the device saves the adjusted value automatically.
6.5.4 Setting/adjusting electrical damping
Difference between setting and adjusting

You can set or adjust the time constant of electrical damping using the buttons. Setting
means that the time constant is automatically set to 0 seconds. Adjusting means that the
time constant is adjusted between 0 and 100 seconds using the increments of 0.1 seconds.
This electrical damping also has an effect on the built-in basic damping of the device.
Condition for "setting"

safety information.
Setting electrical damping

To set electrical damping to 0 seconds, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 4.
Result
Electrical damping has been set to 0 seconds.
Condition for "adjusting"

The default adjusting of steps is an interval of 0.1 seconds. If you press the [↑] or [↓] button
for a long time, the steps are increased.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Adjusting electrical damping

To adjust electrical damping, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 4.
2. Adjust the desired damping.
Result
Electrical damping has been set to the desired time constant.
6.5.5 Blind start of scale value/full scale value
6.5.5.1 Difference between setting/adjusting and blind setting/adjusting
Differences
In contrast to setting/adjusting with a reference pressure, you do not need a reference
pressure for blind setting/adjusting. You can adjust a value in the physical variable
"pressure" without a reference pressure, and an output current with a reference pressure.
Blind adjusting
First select the desired physical unit. Then, adjust two pressure values using the [↑] and [↓]
buttons and save them in the device. These theoretical pressure values are allocated to the
standard current values 4 mA and 20 mA.
Depending on the series and measuring range, a maximum downscaling of 1:100 can be
achieved (measuring span ratio = r, turn down).
The correlation between the measured pressure and the output current generated is linear.
The square root extracting characteristic curve for differential pressure transmitters is an
exception.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Example of blind adjusting
A Initial situation
B Blind adjustment
of the start of
scale value
C Blind adjustment
of the full scale
value
I Output current p Pressure

MAactual Old start of scale value MAtarget New start of scale value
MEactual Old full scale value MEtarget New full scale value
Explanations for the blind adjusting example
A The measuring range is from 0 to 16 bar. You are changing the start of scale value from
0 to 2 bar and the full scale value from 16 to 14 bar. The measuring span is then 12 bar.
In this example you create no pressure.
B Use the [M] button to set the pressure transmitter to mode 5. To adjust the start of scale
value to 2 bar, press one of the [↑] or [↓] buttons until 2 bar appears in the display.
If there is 2 bar input pressure, the pressure transmitter produces an output current of 4
mA.
C Use the [M] button to set the pressure transmitter to mode 6. To adjust the full scale val-
ue to 14 bar, press one of the [↑] or [↓] buttons until 14 bar appears in the display.
If the input pressure is 14 bar, the pressure transmitter generates an output current of
20 mA.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Note
If the preset measuring limits are exceeded or fallen below by more than 20% during
adjustment, the resulting current cannot be set above these limits.
Setting without reference pressure

Blind setting resets the start of scale value to the low sensor limit and the full scale value to
the high sensor limit.
Note
If the value exceeds or falls below the preset measuring limits by more than 20% when
setting, the setting function is not carried out. The old value is retained in this case.
6.5.5.2 Blind setting of start of scale value
Introduction
Blind setting resets the start of scale value to the low sensor limit.
Note
Changes in modes 5 and 6 only affect the pressure scaling. This does not affect the scaling
for level or customized characteristic curve. Therefore, only measured pressure values and
pressure units are displayed in these modes.
Requirement
safety information.
You have not created any reference pressure and have selected a pressure unit.
Procedure
To set the start of scale value blindly, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 5.
2. Press the [↑] and [↓] keys simultaneously for 2 seconds.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
6.5.5.3 Blind setting of full scale value
Introduction
Blind setting resets the full scale value to the high sensor limit.
Note
Requirement
safety information.
Procedure
To set the full scale value blindly, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 6.
6.5.5.4 Blind adjusting of the start of scale value
Introduction
In the case of blind adjustment, you adjust the pressure value of the start of scale value
continuously and without a reference pressure.
Note
You can toggle between rising and falling characteristic curves.
Requirement
safety information.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Procedure
To adjust the pressure value of the start of scale value blindly, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 5.
2. Adjust the pressure value of the start of scale value.
6.5.5.5 Blind adjustment of the full scale value
Introduction
In the case of blind adjustment, you adjust the pressure value of the full scale value
continuously and without a reference pressure.
Note
You can toggle between rising and falling characteristic curves by swapping the start of scale
value and the full scale value.
Requirement
safety information.
Procedure
To adjust the pressure value of the full scale value blindly, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 6.
2. Adjust the pressure value of the full scale value.
6.5.6 Trimming the zero point
Introduction
The zero point is calibrated in mode 7. Zero point calibration corrects zero point errors
resulting from the installation position of the pressure transmitter. The device type
determines the way in which you proceed.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
SIMATIC PDM or the HART communicator will display the total of all zero point corrections.
Requirement
safety information.
Zero point calibration for gauge pressure transmitter

To calibrate the zero point, proceed as follows:
1. Pressurize the pressure transmitter.
2. Set mode 7.
4. Save using the [M] key.
Zero point calibration for absolute pressure transmitter
Note
You need a reference pressure known to you which lies within the measuring limits.
To calibrate the zero point, proceed as follows:

2. Set mode 7.
3. Set the reference pressure on the display.
6.5.7 Current simulator
Introduction
In mode 8, switch the pressure transmitter into the constant current operation. You can
connect an external current simulator in the constant current operation. The current then no
longer corresponds to the process variable. The following output current can be adjusted
irrespective of the input pressure:
● 3.6 mA
● 4.0 mA
● 12.0 mA
● 20.0 mA
● 22.8 mA

Operation
6.5 Local operation
You can use HART communication to adjust intermediate values.
Procedure
To switch on the constant current operation, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 8.
"Cur" in the display stands for current.
3. Select constant current.
Switching off the constant current operation

To switch off the constant current operation, proceed as follows:
Press the [M] button in mode 8.
6.5.8 Output current in case of fault
Introduction
When a fault occurs, the upper fault current is displayed in the basic setting. In mode 9, you
can choose between the output of the upper and lower fault current. The standard values
3.6 mA and 22.8 mA are set.
The standard values of the upper and lower fault current can be changed via HART
communication.
Requirement
safety information.
Procedure
To change the fault current, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 9.
2. Select the fault current.
Note
If a current saturation interrupt is active, the setting of the output current may deviate from
your setting in the case of a fault.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Resetting fault current

To reset the fault current to the basic setting, proceed as follows:
Press the [↑] and [↓] [M] keys simultaneously.
Fault causes
Fault currents may be triggered by:
● FW alarm
● HW alarm
● Diagnostic interrupt
● Sensor breakage
● Measured value status BAD
Reference
NAMUR recommendation NE43 dated 02/03/2003
"Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital pressure
transmitters"
6.5.9 Locking buttons and functions
Introduction
In mode 10, you can disable the functions that can be executed using buttons. Application
example for a lock is e.g. safeguarding the saved parameters.
Lock options
You have the following lock options on the pressure transmitter:
Table 6- 5 Meaning of lock modes in mode 10
Lock mode Meaning

0 The device can be operated by means of the keys and HART communication.
LA Keys on the pressure transmitter are locked.
Exception:
• Releasing key lock
The device can be operated by means of HART communication.
LO Keys on the pressure transmitter are partially locked.
Exception:
• Setting start of scale value

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Lock mode Meaning

LS Keys on the pressure transmitter are partially locked.
Exception:
• Setting full scale value
L Write protection
Operation via keys and HART communication is blocked.
Exception:
Note
If you want to select the LO or LS lock, we recommend you first select the measured value
display of "Current" in "mA" or "%" in mode 13. Otherwise, a change in the output variable
using the [↑] and [↓] buttons is not detected.
If the blind cover is provided, the LS lock mode is effective, i.e. only the zero point and the
span can be changed. If you continuously operate the device with the blind cover, ensure
that the LS lock mode is constantly set.
Requirement
safety information.
Note
In the measured value display function, check whether the desired setting is displayed.
Procedure
To disable the buttons, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 10.
2. Select the desired lock mode.
3. Confirm the lock mode with the [M] button.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
6.5.10 Releasing key lock or function lock
Requirement
You own a device with installed display.
Releasing key lock
WARNING
Releasing key lock
Make sure that only authorized personnel may cancel the key locking of devices for safety-
related applications.
To release a set key lock (LA, LO, LS) using buttons, proceed as follows:
Press the [M] button for 5 seconds.
Removing write protection

To release write protection for HART (L) using buttons, proceed as follows:
Press the [M] button for 5 seconds.
6.5.11 Flow rate measurement (only differential pressure)
Introduction
The characteristic curve representing the relationship between the output current and input
pressure can be adjusted in mode 11. Adjust the root application point in mode 12.
You can select the following characteristic curve types of the output current in mode 11:
● linear "lin": proportional to differential pressure
● square root extracting "sroff": proportional to flow rate, deactivated up to the application
point
● square root extracting "srlin": proportional to flow rate, linear up to the application point
● square root extracting "srli2": proportional to flow rate, two-step linear up to the
application point
Variable application point

The output current for the "srlin" and "sroff" functions can be displayed linearly or set to zero
below the application point of the square root extracting characteristic curve.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Fixed application point

The "srli2" function has a permanently defined application point of 10%. The range up to this
point contains two linear characteristic curve sections. The first section ranges from the zero
point to 0.6% of the output value and 0.6% of the pressure value. The second section has a
higher gradient and it goes up to the root application point at 10% of the output value and 1%
of the pressure value. See the following figure for this purpose.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to set or adjust the type of characteristic curve:
1. Set mode 11.
2. Select the type of characteristic curve.
To set the characteristic curve to "linear", press the [↑] and [↓] buttons simultaneously.
Proceed as follows to set or adjust the root application point: This procedure is not applicable
for "srli2":
1. Set mode 12.
2. Select an application point between 5 and 15%.
To set the application point to 10%, press the [↑] and [↓] buttons simultaneously.
Note
Mode 12 cannot be selected if the "linear" or "srli2" measuring mode has been adjusted in
mode 11.
If the square root extracting characteristic curve has been adjusted in mode 11 and if the
measured value display has been set to "Pressure" in mode 13, the root sign and the
differential pressure corresponding to the flow rate are displayed.
The root extraction function "srli2" is set in "flow rate" measuring mode. You therefore set
the "characteristic curve" parameter in SIMATIC PDM to "linear".

Operation
6.5 Local operation
The dotted rectangle has

been magnified in the form of
the following characteristic
curves in order to show the
behavior of characteristic
curves.
Characteristic curves and application point of square root ex-

tracting characteristic curves

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Characteristic curve "lin": Square root extracting characteristic curve

"srlin"
Characteristic curve "sroff"

Characteristic curve "srli2"
6.5.12 Measured value display
Note
To use the operating functions with the buttons, first set the device variable (DV) parameters
with a host system such as SIMATIC PDM. You will finds details of the relation between
primary variable (PV) assignment and the DV in the following section:
Measuring mode "Pressure" (Page 110)

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Introduction
In mode 13, adjust the following types of measured value display:
● mA
● %
● Display of the PV selected via HART. (Default setting: P pressure)
Table 6- 6 Display of measuring mode/device variables
Display DV Meaning
P 0 Pressure
t-SE 1 Sensor temperature
t-EL 2 Electronics temperature
P-UNC 3 Pressure (untrimmed)
LEVEL 4 Level
Vol 5 Volume
MASS 6 Mass
V-Flo 7 Volumetric flow rate (not relevant for gauge or absolute pressure)
M-Flo 8 Mass flow rate (not relevant for gauge or absolute pressure)
CUSt 9 Users
Requirement
safety information.
Procedure
To select the display type, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 13.
2. Select the measured value display.
See also
Measured value display (Page 129)
6.5.13 Unit
Introduction
In mode 14, select the physical unit in which the measured value display of the device
should be shown.

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Requirement
safety information.
You have already selected the desired measured value display via HART.
Procedure
To adjust the physical unit, proceed as follows:
1. Set mode 14.
2. Select a unit.
Press the [↑] and [↓] buttons simultaneously to set the unit to the first value in the
following table depending on the measuring mode set.
Instructions for selecting the unit

● Unit selection depends on the type of measurement set. For example, only pressure units
are available in "Pressure" measuring mode and only level units are available in the
"Level" measuring mode.
● The displayed measured value is always converted into the new unit. "9.9.9.9.9" appears
on the display when its display capacity is exceeded.
● The selected unit is visible on the display in the measuring mode only if you have
selected the display of a physical unit via HART. "mA" or "%" will be displayed if you have
not selected mode 13, "Measuring mode".
Units
Table 6- 7 Units available for pressure
Pressure units Display Pressure units Display

bar bar Psi PSi
mbar mbar Pa Pa
mm water column (20°C / 68°F) mmH2O KPa² KPa
Inch water column (20°C / 68°F) inH2O MPa MPa
Feet water column (20°C / 68°F) FTH2O g/cm2 Gcm2
mm mercury column mmHG Kg/cm2 KGcm2
Inch mercury column in_HG Torr TORR
mm water column (4°C / 39 °F) m4H2O ATM ATM
Inch water column (4°C / 39°F) i4H2O

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Table 6- 8 Units available for level
Level unit Display Level unit Display

Feet FT cm cm
Inch inch mm mm
M m
Table 6- 9 Units available for mass
Mass unit Display Mass unit Display

Gram G Long ton lTon
Kilogram KG Pound lb
Ton T Ounce OZ
Short ton STon
Table 6- 10 Units available for mass flow rate
Mass flow rate unit Display Mass flow rate unit Display
g/s G/S Pound / s P/S
g / min G/m Pound / min lb/m
g/h G/h Pound / h lb/h
Kg / s KG/S Pound / d lb/d
Kg / min KG/m Short ton / min ShT/m
Kg / h KG/h Short ton / h ShT/h
Kg / d KG/d Short ton / d ShT/d
T / min T/m Long ton / h lT/h
T/h T/h Long ton / d lT/d
T/d T/d
Table 6- 11 Units available for temperature
Temperature unit Display Temperature unit Display

° Celsius °/C Kelvin K
° Fahrenheit °/F Rankine R

Operation
6.5 Local operation
Table 6- 12 Units available for volume
Volume unit Display Volume unit Display

M3 m3 Buschels buShl
Liter L yard3 Yd3
Hectoliter HL Feet3 FT3
US gallon Gal inch3 in3
British gallons in Gal Standard l STdL
British barrel bbl Standard m3 STdm3
British barrel liquid bblli Standard feet3 STFT3
Table 6- 13 Units available for volumetric flow
Unit of volumetric flow Display Unit of volumetric flow Display

m3 / second m3/S Gallons / hour Gal/h
m3 / minute m3/m Gallons / day Gal/d
m3 / hour m3/H Million gallon / day MGl/D
m3 / day m3/d British gallons / second iGl/S
Liters/second L/S British gallons / minute iGl/m
Liters/minute L/m British gallons / hour iGl/h
Liters/hour L/h British Gallons / day iGL/d
Million liter / day mL/d Standard m3 / hour Sm3/h
Feet3 / second FT3/S Standard l / hour STL/h
Feet3 / minute FT3/m Standard feet3 / minute SFT3m
Feet3 / hour FT3/h British barrel liquid / second bbl/S
Feet3 / day FT3/d British barrel liquid / minute bbl/m
Gallons / second Gal/S British barrel liquid / hour bbl/h
Gallons / minute Gal/m British barrel liquid / day bbl/d
See also
Selection of the physical unit (Page 130)

Operation
6.5 Local operation

Operating functions through HART 7
7.1 Operating functions through HART communication
Requirement
You can operate the pressure transmitter through HART communication. The following is
required for this purpose:
● A HART communicator or PC software such as SIMATIC PDM.
● A HART modem to connect a PC with the pressure transmitter or a lead to connect a
HART communicator with the pressure transmitter.
Introduction
The full functionality of the pressure transmitter is available via HART communication. The
HART communicator and PC software are not supplied with the pressure transmitter. The
procedure for connecting and operating a HART communicator or PC software is described
in separate instructions or in the online help for both these tools.
Fundamental description
The input signal is provided in the form of digital information in the following variables
through HART communication:
● Pressure
● Level
● Volume
● Mass
● Volumetric flow
● Mass flow rate
● User programmable "characteristic curve"
As soon as you have set up the HART communication and the pressure transmitter, you can
adapt the pressure transmitter to your respective measuring task. When doing so you are
assisted by the selectable measuring modes "Pressure", "Level", "Flow rate" and a user
programmable "Characteristic curve". One or more device variables are permanently
allocated to each measuring mode in order to execute corresponding measuring tasks.
See also
Overview of operation (Page 71)

Operating functions through HART
7.2 Process tag data
7.2 Process tag data

You can store your process tag data in user definable fields. The following table contains
information about the structure of these fields and the format in which you can enter
information in these fields:
Table 7- 1 Process tag data
Field Explanations
Tag designation Eight characters
Date Day:Month:Year
Description 16 characters
Message 32 characters
Works number Integer number
Tag designation long 32 characters
Freely definable material parameter 21 x 16 characters
7.3 Selecting the measuring modes
7.3.1 Overview of measuring modes
Overview
The pressure transmitter can be adjusted for the corresponding measuring task using a few
parameters. You can select the following measuring modes:
● Pressure
● Level
● Flow rate
● Users: user programmable characteristic curve
You can use the measuring mode selector to activate measuring modes "Level", "Flow rate"
and "User".
Selecting the device variables

One or more device variables are permanently allocated to each measuring mode. The
following device variables are always active and are therefore always displayed:
● Pressure
● Sensor temperature
● Electronics temperature
● Pressure (untrimmed)

The following device variables are activated only when the allocated measuring mode is
activated and parameterized simultaneously:
● "Level", "Volume" and "Mass" are allocated to the "Level" measuring mode.
● "Volumetric flow" and "Mass flow rate" are classified as "Flow rate" measuring mode.
● "User" is allocated to the "User" measuring mode.
The inactive device variables have the CONSTANT status.
7.3.2 Measuring mode selector

You can use this switch to toggle between measuring modes "Pressure", "Level", "Flow rate"
and a characteristic curve programmable by a "User".
If a measuring mode has been selected using the measuring mode selector, it has to be
configured. This does not mean that this block has an automatic effect on the current output
(4 to 20 mA). For that, you need to switch the corresponding device variable to the primary
variable (PV) using a so-called variable mapper.
7.3.3 Variable mapper
Introduction
In this pressure transmitter, the dynamic variable that determines the behavior of current
output is always called the primary variable (PV). You need to use the variable mapper for a
number of purposes, including selecting which device variable is to be switched to PV. The
variable selected as PV using a PC program such as SIMATIC PDM or using the HART
Communicator is scaled once again in the analog output stage to a start of scale value and a
full scale value. These two values then correspond to the current values 4 and 20 mA.
As soon as the PV is switched over using the variable mapper, the start of scale value and
full scale value in the analog output stage are preset to the limit values of the new device
variables. You can define these limit values within the individual block functions.
The dynamic variables "Primary", "Secondary", "Tertiary" and "Quarternary" (PV, SV, TV,
QV) can be interconnected with any active device variables. Various measuring mode
examples are conceivable with a 4 bar pressure transmitter.
See also

7.3.4 Measuring mode "Pressure"

The "Pressure" measuring mode contains the "Sensor trim" function, and is always active
since it is the standard measuring mode. When the measuring mode selector is set to "Off",
no other measuring variables are derived from the "Pressure" measured variable. Except the
first four variables, all other device variables are marked as inactive and have the
CONSTANT status. These four variables are mapped with dynamic variables PV, SV, TV
and QV by default.
Switching an inactive device variable to the primary variable (PV) generates an error
message since the variable currently does not have a valid measured value. This message
is displayed in SIMATIC PDM or the HART communicator.
DV Device variable
MA Start of scale value
ME Full scale value
PV Primary variable
QV Quarternary variable
SV Secondary variable
TV Tertiary variable
Figure 7-1 Measuring mode "Pressure"

7.3.5 Customized characteristic curve
Introduction
The customized "characteristic curve" is continuously active as an identical function in the
three following measuring modes "Level", "Flow rate" and "User". This means that the
customized "characteristic curve" always provides a result for the following function, thus
also influencing the measured value status of the affected device variables.
In the device, the characteristic curve vertices are only provided once in the EEPROM.
Therefore, if the measuring mode is changed, you will usually need to adjust the
characteristic curve accordingly.
The characteristic curve function expects at least two and at the most 30 characteristic curve
vertices as input parameters. Characteristic curve vertices are entered in pairs of values
x %;y %. The values for the x-coordinate are only accepted by the device when they run
monotonically. The y-coordinates, on the other hand, may also be non-monotonic. A warning
will however be issued by the configuring device, which you as the user have to recognize
and acknowledge. The output of the characteristic curve is not explicitly stored in a device
variable, but rather is directly interconnected with the input of the next function block in each
case. The pairs of values 0%;0% and 100%;100% are set as default values. In principle,
rising and falling characteristic curves can be configured. With regard to the device variable
status, rising characteristic curves are however preferred. Otherwise the meanings of HIGH
LIMIT and LOW LIMIT are swapped.
See also
7.3.6 Measuring mode "Level"
Description
Once you have configured the measuring mode "Level", the device variables "Level",
"Volume" and "Mass" are activated. They are all derived from the measured pressure. The
"Level" block here represents a series of permanently interconnected functions which you
need to configure with appropriate parameters. Only then will you obtain a meaningful
measured value for the three device variables.

Figure 7-2 Measuring mode "Level"
DV Device variable
ME Full scale value
Functions of the "Level" block

The first function, "Input scaling, pressure", sets the pressure range used by the following
functions in all three blocks in the same way. Ideally, this range corresponds to the sensor
limits of the pressure transmitter. In the following calculation examples, 0 and 4 bar are
assumed for these sensor limits for all blocks. You can also adjust down-scaling, e.g. 1:2.
This down-scaling of 1:2 means that 50% of the nominal measuring range, i.e. in this case
2 bar, controls 100% of the following characteristic.
Use the "Output scaling, level" to set the measuring limits for the measuring mode "Level"
with a unit from the level range. Parameter assignment in this example is 10 and 20 m. At
0 bar process pressure, 10 m is displayed in DV4 and 20 m is displayed at 2 bar. The values
for the start of scale value and the full scale value, which are effective for the analog output,
are configured in the "analog output" block.
In the calculation example, the two pairs of values 0%;0% and 100%;100% are configured
for the customized "characteristic curve". This is the default setting. The measured value in
this example is passed on from the pressure scaling 1:1.

Figure 7-3 Functions of the "Level" block
DV [x] Device variable x

L Level
m Mass
ME Full scale value
P Pressure
V Volume
Configure the "Output scaling, volume" with a unit from the volume range and the measuring
limits for the device variable "Volume". The characteristic curve output directly affects the
volume scaling input.
In the calculation example, for the measuring limits from 0 and 100 l, a volume of 50 l is
yielded for process pressure of 1 bar.
The "Level" parameter setting also still automatically activates the device variable for the
mass. If you have not yet configured a value for the density, the initial value of 1 kg/l is
preset. In the calculation example for the "Mass" device variable, a mass of 250 kg is derived
at a density of 5 kg/l.
Note
When the density changes, the measuring range limits have to be adjusted accordingly.
You can configure all parameter settings for the "Level" block in SIMATIC PDM or the HART
communicator. Activate the "Level" measuring mode for this purpose. For all adjustments,
the measuring limits may be exceeded by +/-20%. Values which lie above or below this are
rejected by the device.

7.3.7 Measuring mode "Flow rate"
Description
When you activate the "Flow rate" measuring mode, only two other device variables are
active: volumetric flow and mass flow rate. If another block was active earlier, the
corresponding device variables remain inactive and have the "CONSTANT" status. The
"Flow rate" block here represents a series of permanently interconnected functions which
you need to configure with appropriate parameters.
DV Device variable
ME Full scale value
Figure 7-4 Measuring mode "Flow rate"
Functions of the "Flow rate" block

The "Input scaling, pressure" function defines the pressure range of 0 to 2 bar that is
interpreted as 0 and 100% by the following square root extracting function. A process
pressure of 0.5 bar has been assumed in the following figure.
In the "Flow rate" measuring mode, a square root extracting characteristic curve "srlin2" is
plotted with a fixed root application point of 10%.
In the calculation example, the input value for the "root extraction function" is approx. 25 %
for a prevailing process pressure of 0.5 bar. The output value is approximately 50%.

Note
When using the "Flow rate" block, other square root extracting characteristic curves must be
deactivated if required. (The "characteristic curve" parameter must be "linear", as root
extraction is already implemented in "flow rate" measuring mode).
DV [x] Device variable x MF Mass flow rate

MA Start of scale value p Pressure
ME Full scale value VF Volumetric flow
Figure 7-5 Functions of the "Flow rate" block
for the customized "characteristic curve". This setting corresponds to a bisection of the input
value for all output values.
Configure the output scaling "volumetric flow" with a unit from the volume flow range and the
measuring limits for the device variable "Volumetric flow". In the calculation example, 0 l/s
and 1000 l/s are defined as lower and upper measuring limits. The volumetric flow rate is
500 l/s at a prevailing process pressure of 0.5 bar.
The "Mass flow rate" device variable is automatically activated when the "Flow rate" block is
configured. If you have not yet configured a value for the density, the initial value of 1 kg/l is
preset.
In the calculation example, a mass of 2000 kg/s is derived for the "mass flow rate" device
variable at a value of 1 kg/l. The density value entered is only used to calculate the mass
flow rate. The entered value of density has no effect on the diaphragm calculation that is to
be carried out by the user.
In SIMATIC PDM or the HART communicator, the "Flow rate" block is configured in an online
dialog box in an extremely compact manner. In this online dialog box, you can compile all
values in a menu and transfer them to the device collectively.

7.3.8 Measuring mode "User"
Description
The "User" measuring mode is the simplest of the measuring modes that you can select with
the measuring mode selector. Only one further device variable, "User", is activated in this
measuring mode in addition to the four standard device variables. The variables "Level",
"Volume", "Mass", "Volumetric flow" and "Mass flow rate" are marked as inactive and are
given the status CONSTANT.
In the "User" measuring mode, you have an option to define a customized unit for output
scaling. This customized unit is, e.g. a specific quantity of liquid. This quantity of liquid
depends on the input process pressure.
Example: Fill the beverages in cans having a capacity of 0.33 l. You can now define a
customized unit "Can" that is exactly equal to 0.33 l. The quantity of "cans" depends on the
input process pressure.
Note
Permissible input values
All alphabetic a...z, A...Z and numeric 0...9 inputs are allowed for the customized unit. The
following characters are also allowed:
°"$/<>*,_+-=@

DV Device variable MA Start of scale value

PV Primary variable ME Full scale value
Figure 7-6 Measuring mode "User"
Functions of the "User" block

The first function, "Input scaling, pressure", defines the pressure range which is used by the
customized characteristic curve. Ideally, this range corresponds to the sensor limits.
In the calculation example, 0 and 2 bar are assumed. This means that with process pressure
of 0.5 bar, there is a value of 25% on the characteristic curve.
DV [x] Device variable x MA Start of scale value

p Pressure ME Full scale value
Figure 7-7 Functions of the "User" block
for the customized "characteristic curve". Any curve shapes can be calculated with the help

of 30 characteristic curve vertices. These curve shapes can be stored in the device using
SIMATIC PDM or the HART communicator.
In the calculation example, the value at the input of the characteristic curve is transferred 1:1
to the output.
In the calculation example, a number of filled cans is set for the output scaling. You can
enter up to five characters for any given unit. Do not confuse this with the user-
programmable display unit of the "Analog output" block.
In the calculation example, you have a start of scale value of 0 cans and a full scale value of
1000 cans. At a process pressure of 0.5 bar, you get a value of 250 cans for the "User"
device variable.
See also
Analog output (Page 122)
7.3.9 Measured value status
Introduction
Every device variable is assigned a status byte to indicate the quality of the measured
values. This status byte can have the following values:
● BAD
● GOOD
● MANUAL
● UNCERTAIN
The following values are also possible:
● CONSTANT
● HIGH LIMIT
● LOW LIMIT
A higher-level diagnosis program can display and analyze these states.
GOOD status
During smooth, uninterrupted operation, the measured value status of all active device
variables is GOOD.
BAD/CONSTANT status
All inactive device variables have CONSTANT/BAD status.
If a variable having the BAD status is an output value for calculation, the measured value is
BAD.

The basic measured values, namely pressure and temperatures, have the BAD status in the
following cases:
● The analog-to-digital converter does not function.
● Linearization values in the EEPROM are defective.
● If the two end points of the customized characteristic curve are exceeded for the status of
the device variables of the following function.
UNCERTAIN status
If a pressure value exceeds or falls below the sensor limits of the device by more than 20%,
the corresponding measured value and the variables inferred from it are UNCERTAIN.
If the analog-to-digital converter for pressure control is over/underrange, the status is
UNCERTAIN.
HIGH LIMIT and LOW LIMIT

If the analog-to-digital converter is overrange, the HIGH LIMIT label is allocated. If the
analog-to-digital converter is underrange, the LOW LIMIT label is allocated.
Change in status
If the status of a device variable changes and it was right at the front of the sequence of
operations for a block, e.g. pressure, then all variables that are derived from it will take on
the same status. In the following example, the device variable "Pressure" has the BAD
status. Since the measuring mode selector is set to "USER", the device variable "User" is
also given the BAD status.
The reasons for changes in the status of a device variable are summarized in the table. If
there were several reasons for a change in status, MANUAL always has the highest priority.
BAD has the second highest and UNCERTAIN the third highest priority.

DV Device variable MA Start-of-scale value

PV Primary variable ME Full-scale value
Figure 7-8 Device status dependency
Table 7- 2 Events which result in a change of status
DV Measuring BAD MANUAL UNCERTAIN CONSTANT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT

mode
0 Pressure DV3 = BAD, When DV3 = UNCERTAIN - DV3 = DV3 =
fault in lineari- DV0 is HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT
zation simulated
1 Sensor tem- DV2 = BAD, When DV1 more than 20% - Analog-to- Analog-to-
perature analog-to- DV1 is outside the sensor digital convert- digital convert-
digital converter simulated limits er in overrange er in under-
in DV2 = UNCERTAIN range
over/underrang DV2 = MANUAL
e, fault in line-
arization
2 Electronics Analog-to- When DV2 more than 20% - Analog-to- Analog-to-
temperature digital converter DV2 is outside the sensor digital convert- digital convert-
in simulated limits er in overrange er in under-
over/underrang range
e, fault in line-
arization

DV Measuring BAD MANUAL UNCERTAIN CONSTANT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT

mode
3 Pressure (un- Analog-to- - Analog-to-digital - Analog-to- Analog-to-
trimmed) digital converter converter in over- digital convert- digital convert-
in range/underrange, er in overrange er in under-
over/underrang DV3 more than 20% range
e, DV1 sensor outside the sensor
breakage, limits
DV2 = BAD, DV2 = MANUAL
fault in lineari-
zation
4 Level If DV0 = BAD When DV0= UNCERTAIN DV not ac- DV0 = DV0 =
DV0 is tive HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT
simulated
5 Volume DV0 = BAD, When DV0 = UNCERTAIN, Characteris- DV4 = DV4 =
Characteristic DV0 is input value is out- tic curve is HIGH LIMIT, LOW LIMIT,
curve is faulty simulated side the specified faulty Characteristic Characteristic
characteristic curve DV not ac- curve for max- curve for mini-
range tive imum value mum value
with gradient 0 with gradient 0
6 Mass DV5 = BAD When DV5= UNCERTAIN DV not ac- DV5 = DV5 =
DV0 is tive, HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT
simulated DV5 =
CONSTANT
7 Volumetric DV0 = BAD, When DV0 = UNCERTAIN, Characteris- DV4 = DV4 =
flow characteristic DV0 is input value is out- tic curve is HIGH LIMIT, LOW LIMIT,
(not absolute curve is faulty simulated side the specified faulty, Characteristic Characteristic
and gauge characteristic curve DV not ac- curve for max- curve for mini-
pressure) range tive imum value mum value
8 Mass flow rate DV5 = BAD When DV5= UNCERTAIN DV not ac- DV5 = DV5 =
(not absolute DV0 is tive #HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT
and gauge simulated DV5 =
pressure) CONSTANT
9 Users DV0 = BAD, When DV0 = UNCERTAIN, Characteris- DV0 = DV0 =
Characteristic DV0 is input value is out- tic curve is HIGH LIMIT, LOW LIMIT,
curve is faulty simulated side the specified faulty Characteristic Characteristic
characteristic curve DV not ac- curve for max- curve for mini-
range tive imum value mum value
If you use falling characteristic curves in the blocks, the meanings of HIGH LIMIT and LOW
LIMIT are swapped around.
If you mix falling and rising characteristic curves, the meanings will be swapped each time a
falling characteristic curve is run.

7.3.10 Analog output
Introduction
The "Analog output" block converts the value provided by the dynamic primary variable (PV)
into a current value of 4 to 20 mA. When you actuate the measuring mode selector, you
automatically define the start of scale value and the full scale value to the current values 4
and 20 mA, respectively. Limit values of corresponding device variables are used for scaling
the analog output by default. You have entered these limits when setting the parameters of
your measuring mode.
Example for measuring mode "Level"

This means that for a "Level" device variable as PV, 10 m corresponds to the value for 4 mA
and 20 m corresponds to the value for 20 mA. You can change this presetting again in the
"Analog output" block. This is done by restricting the range of the "Level" device variable for
scaling the output current to e.g. 12 to 18 m. This downscaling has no effect on the previous
block scaling. In this case, a current of 4 mA is output for a measured height of 12 m, and a
current of 20 mA for 18 m.

Figure 7-9 "Analog output" scaling

Description of measuring mode "Level"
MA Start of scale value p Pressure

ME Full scale value PV Primary variable
Figure 7-10 "Analog output" block
Note
If, when setting the analog output, the values for the start of scale value zero and the full
scale value are more than 20% below or above the limit values of the set PV (set using the
variable mapper), the values will be rejected by the device. The values configured previously
are retained. Similarly, the span must not fall below the minimum.
Minimum span = ME - MA
The square root extracting function can only be selected in the "Pressure" measuring mode.
The root extraction function "srli2" is set in "flow rate" measuring mode. You therefore set the
"characteristic curve" parameter in SIMATIC PDM to "linear".
7.3.11 Scaling the display value
Introduction
You can scale the value shown in the display as you wish and allocate it any unit of 5
characters. The scaling of the value is independent of the selection of the measuring mode
selector, the primary variable (PV) and the display unit defined. Use the "Display settings"
item in SIMATIC PDM or the HART communicator for this purpose.
The percent value of the PV is the basis for this scaling. This percent value is also used to
scale the current output. In SIMATIC PDM, this item is referred to as "Setting the PV output
scaling". After selecting the "Display settings" menu item, you must enter a start-of-scale
value, a full-scale value and a unit string.
This display option has the highest priority amongst all options. A switch over to %, mA or
any other unit is not possible in this status. You need to deactivate the LCD scaling again for
this purpose.

7.4 Setting zero point and limit point
Example
In the Level measuring mode, the start of scale value is assumed as 0 m and the full scale
value as 10 m in the example illustrated in the following picture. (Input scaling: 0 to 2 bar)
The value of 2 m is displayed at a process pressure of 0.4 bar.

Figure 7-11 Free LCD scaling
7.4 Setting zero point and limit point

You can set the zero point and the limit point using the SIMATIC PDM or HART
Communicator. You can use this function to realize rising or falling characteristic curves.
The pressure unit can be set separately for the display and for HART communication.
See also
Difference between setting and adjusting (Page 81)

7.5 Blind setting of zero point and limit point
7.5 Blind setting of zero point and limit point

● The start of scale value and the full scale value can be set without creating a reference
pressure.
● Both values can be selected as any point within the sensor limits.
● The maximum downscaling is 1:100, depending on the series and the measuring range.
● You can use this function to realize rising and falling characteristic curves.
7.6 Zero point calibration (position correction)
Description
A zero point calibration is used to correct a zero point error resulting from the mounting
position.
Procedure
● Pressurize the device or evacuate it (at absolute pressure, < 0.1 ‰ of the measuring
span).
● Perform the zero point calibration using SIMATIC PDM or the HART Communicator.
● If you do not have a vacuum, perform a trimming of the lower sensor calibration point at a
known reference pressure.
CAUTION
For absolute pressure transmitters, the start of scale value is at vacuum. A zero point
calibration with a pressurized pressure transmitter will lead to faulty settings!
Note
The effective measuring range is reduced by the amount of the upstream pressure.
Example:
With an upstream pressure of 100 mbar, the effective measuring range of a 1-bar
pressure transmitter is reduced to a point between 0 and 0.9 bar.
See also
Trimming the sensor (Page 132)

7.7 Electrical damping
7.7 Electrical damping
Description
You can set the time constant of electrical damping to a point within a range from 0 to 100 s.
It always applies to the "Pressure" device variable (DV0) and thus to the measured values
derived from it.
7.8 Fast response mode
Description
This mode is only intended for special applications such as fast recognition of jumps in
pressure, e.g. pressure drop in the event of pipe breakage. The internal recording of
measured values is sped up at the cost of accuracy. From your point of view, an increased
low-frequency noise is caused for the measured value. For this reason, good accuracy can
only be achieved by setting the measuring span to the maximum.
7.9 Current sensor
Description
The pressure transmitter can be switched to constant current operation for test purposes. In
that case, the current no longer corresponds to the process variable. A "C" will appear in the
mode display of the display.
7.10 Fault current
Description
You can use this function to adjust the size of the lower (< 4 mA) and upper (> 20 mA) fault
current. Both signal a hardware/firmware fault, sensor breakage, or that the alarm limit has
been reached (diagnostic interrupt). ERROR will in this case appear in the display. You can
obtain a detailed guide to the display using SIMATIC PDM or the HART Communicator.
Reference
NAMUR recommendation NE43 dated 02/03/2003
"Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital pressure
transmitters"

7.11 Setting the current limits
See also
Error display (Page 75)
Limit modules (Page 139)
7.11 Setting the current limits
Description
The level of the upper and lower fault current and the high and low saturation limits can be
freely selected within the preset limits of the current output signal.
The specified accuracy of the current output signal is only valid within the current limits 4 to
20 mA.
① Linear control range

② Low saturation limit (default value)
③ High saturation limit (default value)
④ Lower fault current value (default value)
⑤ Upper fault current value (default value)
⑥ Recommended setting range for lower fault current range and lower control range limit
⑦ Recommended setting range for upper fault current range and upper control range limit
Figure 7-12 Current limits

7.12 Key lock and write protection
7.12 Key lock and write protection
Introduction
You can use this function to lock the keys or activate write protection to safeguard the saved
parameters.
Lock options
You have the following lock options:
Table 7- 3 Meaning of the HART lock modes
Lock mode Meaning

0 The device can be operated by means of the keys and HART communication.
LA Keys on the pressure transmitter are locked.
Exception:
LO Keys on the pressure transmitter are partially locked.
Exception:
LS Keys on the pressure transmitter are partially locked.
Exception:
• Setting full scale value
LL Write protection
You can now only release the lock using HART communication.
See also
Locking buttons and functions (Page 96)

7.13 Measured value display
7.13 Measured value display
Introduction
You can use this function to set one of three options for the device display:
● Display in mA
● Display in % (of the set measuring range)
● Display in a physical unit
Table 7- 4 Display of measuring mode/device variables
DV Meaning
0 Pressure
1 Sensor temperature
2 Electronics temperature
3 Pressure (untrimmed)
4 Level
5 Volume
6 Mass
7 Volumetric flow rate (not relevant to gauge or absolute pressure)
8 Mass flow rate (not relevant to gauge or absolute pressure)
9 Users
Points to note for "Pressure" DV

If the device variable (DV) is set to "Pressure", you can configure the displayed pressure unit
with an extension, GAUGE (G) or ABS (A). The add-on has no effect on the real measured
value.
To do so, select the option Gauge or Absolute under the "Pressure display type" menu item.

7.14 Selection of the physical unit
There are two options for the display:

● If the pressure unit is < 5 characters, an A or a G is added at the end, respectively.
● If the pressure unit is ≥ 5 characters, the letters GAUGE or ABS flash alternately with the
pressure unit.
Figure 7-13 Add-on with example GAUGE
Note
The change of the display with GAUGE or ABS does not change the physical pressure
used by the pressure transmitter, rather only the nature of the display.
See also
Measured value display (Page 101)
7.14 Selection of the physical unit
Introduction
You can use this function to select a unit from a table with predefined units.
Description
The only units available will be those of the device variable that was mapped as the Primary
Variable (PV).
The unit can be set separately for the display and for HART communication. You can also
choose to link the setting of the two units.
See also
Unit (Page 102)

7.15 Bar graph
7.15 Bar graph
Description
You can use this to switch on the "Bar graph" function in the device display as an alternative
to the unit display. The "Bar graph" function is disabled in the factory state.
See also
Display elements (Page 73)
7.16 Sensor calibration
7.16.1 Sensor trim
Description
The sensor trim can be used to set the characteristic curve of the pressure transmitter at two
sensor trim points. The results are then correct measured values at the sensor trim points.
The sensor trim points can be selected as any points within the nominal range.
Devices that are not turned down prior to delivery are trimmed at 0 bar and the high limit of
the nominal range; devices that are turned down prior to delivery are trimmed at the low and
high limits of the set pressure measuring range.
Application examples
● For a particular device that is not turned down (e.g. 63 bar), the typical measured value is
50 bar. To attain the highest possible accuracy for this value, set the upper sensor trim at
50 bar.
● A 63-bar pressure transmitter is turned down to 4 to 7 bar. You can attain the highest
possible accuracy by selecting 4 bar for the low sensor trim point and 7 bar for the high
point.
● A 250-mbar absolute pressure transmitter shows 25 mbar at 20 mbar (abs). A reference
pressure of 100 mbar is available. You can carry out zero-point correction by performing
a lower sensor trim at 100 mbar.
Note
The accuracy of the test device should be at least three times as high as that of the
pressure transmitter.

7.17 Current simulator trim
7.16.2 Trimming the sensor
Trim the sensor at the lower trim point

The pressure at which the lower sensor trim is to be performed is applied at the pressure
transmitter. Via SIMATIC PDM or the HART Communicator, you instruct the pressure
transmitter to accept this pressure.
This represents an offset shift of the characteristic curve.
Trim the sensor at the upper trim point

The pressure at which the upper sensor trim is to be performed is applied at the pressure
transmitter. Via SIMATIC PDM or the HART Communicator, you instruct the pressure
transmitter to accept this pressure.
A gradient correction is thereby applied to the characteristic curve. The lower sensor trim
point is not affected by this. The upper trim point needs to be greater than the lower trim
point.
A Original characteristic
B Characteristic curve after lower sensor trim
C Characteristic curve after upper sensor trim
Figure 7-14 Sensor calibration

The current that is output by the pressure transmitter can be trimmed independently of the
pressure measuring circuit. This function is designed for compensating inaccuracies in the
processing chain following the pressure transmitter.

Example of an application
The current is to be measured as a voltage drop from 1 to 5 V at a resistance of 250 Ohm +/-
5%. To trim the tolerance of the resistance, set the current simulator so that the voltage drop
at 4 mA is exactly 1 V and at 20 mA is exactly 5 V.
● Trim at 4 mA:
Use the current transmitter trim menu option to instruct the pressure transmitter to output
4 mA. Read the measured value at an ammeter and input it. The pressure transmitter
uses this value for offset correction of the current.
● Trim at 20 mA:
Use the current transmitter trim menu option to instruct the pressure transmitter to output
20 mA. Read the measured value at an ammeter and input it. The pressure transmitter
uses this value for gradient correction of the current. The value for 4 mA is not affected by
this.
Note
If a multimeter is used, it must always be sufficiently accurate.
A Original characteristic
B Characteristic curve after current simulator trim 4 mA
C Characteristic curve after current simulator trim 20 mA
Figure 7-15 Current simulator trim

7.18 Factory calibration
7.18 Factory calibration
Introduction
You can use factory calibration to reset the pressure transmitter to the delivery state.
Description
You can use the menu-guided interface of SIMATIC PDM or HART Communicator to select
the range of parameters to be restored:
1. Return of current calibration
2. Return of sensor zero-point calibration (position correction)
3. Return of pressure corrections (zero-point calibration and sensor trim)
4. Return of all parameters relevant for the processing of measured values, such as start of
scale value, full scale value, electrical damping, display unit, current trim, zero-point
calibration (position correction), sensor trim, measuring speed, alarm current limits, alarm
setting, overflow ranges of current.
5. Reset of the variable mapper. This is the effect of the following setting:
PV= Pressure, SV= Sensor temp., TV= Electronics temp., QV= Non-linearized pressure
PV Primary variable
See also
Factory calibration - FAQ
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10806940/133000)
7.19 Static configuration data
Description
A further menu command in the corresponding operating program allows you to read and
also write a series of sensor-specific material data. With the factory state, this data is pre-
allocated according to the particular device model. These values are not contained in the
"Factory calibration" function; in other words, changes in the device are permanently saved.
List of variable material parameters:
● Flange type
● Flange material

7.19 Static configuration data
● Remote seal type

● Filling medium
● O-ring material
● Remote seal
● Remote seal diaphragm material
● Number of remote seals
● Sensor filling medium
● Sensor seal diaphragm material
● Pressure transmitter version
● Housing material
● Tube length
● Process connection
● Electrical connection
● Process connection screw material
● Vent valve position
For a series of these material data items, you can enter any designation of your choice under
the option "Special". This applies to the following parameters:
● Process connection
● Flange type
● Process connection screws
● O-ring material
● Material of vent valve
● Vent valve position
● Remote seal type
● Remote seal
● Diaphragm material
● Remote seal filling medium
You can use up to 16 characters for each entry.

7.20 Flow rate measurement (only differential pressure)
7.20 Flow rate measurement (only differential pressure)
Description
For the "Differential pressure and flow rate" device version, you can select the characteristic
curve of output current as follows without actuating the measuring mode selector:
● linear "lin": proportional to differential pressure
● square root extracting "sroff": proportional to flow rate, deactivated up to the application
point
● square root extracting "srlin": proportional to flow rate, linear up to the application point
● square root extracting "srlin2": proportional to flow rate, two-step linear up to the
application point
Variable application point

The output current for the "srlin" and "sroff" functions can be displayed linearly or set to zero
below the application point of the square root extracting characteristic curve.
Fixed application point

The "srlin2" function has a permanently defined application point of 10%. The range up to
this point contains two linear characteristic curve sections. The first section ranges from the
zero point to 0.6% of the output value and 0.6% of the pressure value. The second section
has a higher gradient and it goes up to the root application point at 10% of the output value
and 1% of the pressure value.
See also
Flow rate measurement (only differential pressure) (Page 98)
7.21 Diagnostic functions
7.21.1 Overview
Description
HART communication allows you to activate and evaluate a wide range of diagnostic
functions from a central control room or on site.
● Calibration/service timer
● Min/max pointer
● Limit monitoring blocks

● Simulation of measured pressure and temperature values

● Limit monitoring of all device variables
The diagnostics strategy employed for the pressure transmitter allows for the configuration of
a diagnostic warning and a diagnostic alarm for diagnostic functions for monitoring limit
values, e.g. for monitoring current saturation:
● Diagnostic warning: The device transmits via HART communication the diagnostic event
that has occurred. The current output value is unaffected. The message "Diagnostic
Warning" alternates with the unit on the display.
● Diagnostic alarm: The device goes into the fault current state. The message "Diagnostic
Warning" or "Diagnostic Alarm" appears on the display, along with the message ERROR.
In addition, the diagnostic event is made available via HART communication.
In the default settings, all warnings and alarms are switched off. You can choose to set either
the diagnostic warning only or the diagnostic alarm and warning. For HART communication,
use the HART Communicator or PC software such as SIMATIC PDM. To see the steps
required, refer to the attached table for operation of the HART Communicator or the help
functions in the SIMATIC PDM software.
7.21.2 Operating hours counter
Description
You can read out one operating hours counter for the electronics and one for the sensor via
HART communication. For HART communication, use the HART Communicator or PC
software such as SIMATIC PDM. The counters are activated the first time the pressure
transmitter is put into operation. If the power supply to the device is interrupted, the counter
readings are automatically stored in the non-volatile memories. This means you have access
to the latest counter readings with the next restart. The operating hours counters cannot be
reset.
7.21.3 Calibration timer and service timer
Description
To ensure regular calibration of the electronics and for service work on the sensor, you
activate a two-stage timer in each case. On expiry of the first time period, a calibration or
service request is made. On expiry of a second time span set by parameter as a time
difference, a diagnostic alarm is reported and a fault current is output.
The calibration intervals for the electronics are calculated using the following formula:

For performance of the calibration work, you must acknowledge the requests and alarms.
Then you can reset the timer. In addition, there is a facility to deactivate the monitoring
function.
The following procedure applies for acknowledgement of requests and alarms:
As long as the warning/alarm limit has not been reached, the following applies:
1. "Reset the timer" this resets the timer, which then restarts from 0. The monitoring remains
active.
2. "Alarm/Acknowledge the request" this has no effect; the timer continues to run and the
monitoring remains active.
When the warning/alarm limit has been reached, the following applies:
1. "Alarm/Acknowledge the request" resets the request / alarm message, but allows the
timer to continue to run. In this state, a new alarm or warning is not possible since the
time limits have already been exceeded.
2. "Reset timer" resets the request / alarm message, also resets the timer. It acknowledges
the interrupt or warning at the same time. The timer immediately starts running again from
zero and will report again when the warning/alarm limit is next reached. The next
calibration interval is therefore immediately active.
7.21.4 Min/max indicator
Description
The pressure transmitter has three pairs of min/max pointers which you can use to monitor
the three measured variables pressure, sensor temperature, and electronics temperature for
negative and positive peak values. For each measured value, a resettable min/max pointer
saves the maximum and minimum peak values in long-term storage in the two non-volatile
memories. Consequently, the values are available even after the device is restarted. The
min/max pointers are also updated during a simulation.

p Pressure
Figure 7-16 Basic representation of min/max pointers
7.21.5 Limit modules
Introduction
The diagnostic functions of this device give you an option to monitor the measured values in
programmable limits. If the limits are not adhered to, the device sends a warning through
HART communication or notifies a higher-level instance about an analog fault current.
Monitoring of current saturation

You can monitor the current output in the saturation range using a simple limit module. This
limit module is configured and activated via HART communication. For HART
communication, use a HART communicator or PC software such as SIMATIC PDM.
You need to set two time periods to configure the limit module:
The first time period specifies how long the current output is allowed to be in saturation
before an interrupt is triggered and the device outputs its set fault current. This first time
period is the response time.
The second time period specifies the duration of the interrupt. This second time period is the
stop time.
Different outputs of the fault current corresponding to the set response and stop times are
shown in the following example.

Configuring the direction of fault current

The current value is proportional to pressure within the saturation limits. When the saturation
limits are exceeded, the direction of fault current can however vary from the direction of
saturation. The upper or the lower fault current is displayed depending on the parameter
settings of the direction of fault current.
You can configure the direction of fault current for a current saturation interrupt depending on
your requirements. The following settings are possible under the current saturation menu:
Active interrupt value The applicable settings are those under the current interrupt type
menu command.
Inverse interrupt value The applicable settings are the inverse settings under the current
interrupt type menu command.
Saturated interrupt value The fault current is output in the direction of current saturation.
Inverse saturated interrupt The fault current is output in the opposite direction to current satu-
value ration.
The difference between different settings is evident in examples 3 and 4 in the following
figure. Example 3 shows the direction of fault current with the "Saturated current value"
setting. Example 4 shows the direction of fault current with the "Active upper interrupt value"
setting.
Example
The configured saturation limits in the following figures are 3.8 mA and 20.5 mA.
Example 1: the response time starts at t1. At t1, current reaches the configured saturation
limit of 20.5 mA for the first time. At t2, the response time ends. The stop time begins and the
interrupt is triggered. Time t3 is the configured end of the stop time. At t3, the interrupt is
immediately revoked even if the current then drops below the saturation limit again.
Example 2: the duration of the current saturation is shorter than the response time (t1, t2). In
that case, the device does not go into "fault current" state.
Example 3: the current drops below the lower saturation limit only for a short time. The fault
current is not switched off until after the end of the stop time (t3). The direction of fault current
corresponds to the "Saturated interrupt value" setting. The fault current is output in the
direction of current saturation.
Example 4: the current drops below the lower saturation limit only for a short time. The fault
current is not switched off until after the end of the stop time (t3). The direction of fault current
corresponds to the "Active upper interrupt value" setting. The upper fault current is outputted
although the direction of current saturation is downward.

7.22 Simulation
Figure 7-17 Four examples of saturation monitoring
See also
Fault current (Page 126)
7.22 Simulation
7.22.1 Overview of simulation
Description
With the "Simulation" diagnostic function, you can receive and process simulated measured
data on site or in the control room without having process pressure or a temperature value.
This allows you to run individual process sequences in the "cold" state and thus simulate
process states. In addition, if you inject simulation values you can test the line routing from
the control room to the individual pressure transmitter.
The value to be simulated can be provided as a fixed value or in the form of a ramp function.
Simulation of pressure and temperature values is handled in the same way in terms of
parameter assignment and function, so the following will only deal with the general
simulation procedures "Fixed value" and "Ramp function".

7.22 Simulation
For security reasons, all simulation data is held only in the non-volatile working memory. This
means that when the device is restarted, any simulation which may be active will be shut
down. You can simulate the pressure and both temperature values. It should be noted here
that changing the temperatures by simulation will have no effect on the measured pressure
value.
Figure 7-18 Block diagram of simulation
7.22.2 Simulation as fixed value
Description
Taking the physical unit into account, you can configure a fixed simulation value for all three
possible simulation paths. You can simulate the pressure value and both temperature values
simultaneously. While pressure simulation is activated, the pressure transmitter will not react
to changes in the process pressure. The current output value adjusts itself in accordance
with the preset pressure value. Simulation of the temperature values has no effect on the
current output. It can only be observed via HART communication.

7.23 Limit monitor
7.22.3 Simulation with a ramp function
Description
In addition to the adjustable fixed values for all three simulation paths, you can, as a second
option, also configure one ramp function in each case. Adjustable lower and upper values
together determine the limits between which the simulation values with a rising or falling
tendency can move. The step width can be calculated with the step number, which is also
adjustable. You can specify the rate of rise of the ramp via the duration of the individual ramp
steps.
7.23 Limit monitor
Description
You can activate up to three limit monitors in order to monitor any of the device variables.
The limit monitor monitors a value at an upper or lower limit value. If this limit is violated it
sends a diagnostic warning or a diagnostic interrupt. Select the "Limit Monitor" menu
command in SIMATIC PDM or in the HART communicator. You can program the following
values for each of the three limit monitors:
Table 7- 5 Parameter of the limit monitor
Monitoring variable You will be shown a list of the active device variables. This list is inde-
pendent of the measuring mode selected.
Limit monitoring: warning / interrupt Select whether a warning or a warning plus an interrupt should be trig-
gered when a limit is violated.
Limit monitoring: upper / lower Specify here whether a device variable monitors the upper limit, the
lower limit, or both limits.
Upper limit value Upper limit value in the unit of the device variable.
Lower limit value Lower limit value in the unit of the device variable.
Hysteresis Operating point for chatter suppression in the case of small pressure
changes.
Response time The time which must pass after the limit is violated before this violation
is registered.
Stop time The time for which a limit interrupt or warning will always be sustained
even when the event which triggered it is no longer present.

7.23 Limit monitor
Figure 7-19 Trip levels for the limit monitor
You can count the limit violations for each limit monitor by activating an event counter that
provides separate, cumulative totals of upper and lower limit violations. A diagnostic warning
and / or a diagnostic interrupt can be issued once a certain number of violations is reached,
a number which you can also program. You can program the following values for the event
counter:
Table 7- 6 Parameters of the event counter
Event counter: upper limit Select here whether a warning or a warning plus an interrupt should be
triggered when the comparison value is exceeded.
Event counter: lower limit Select here whether a warning or a warning plus an interrupt should be
triggered when the comparison value is not met.
Comparison value: upper limit Specify here the number of overflows at which a warning or a warning
plus an interrupt should be triggered.
Comparison value: upper limit Specify here the number of underflows at which a warning or a warning
plus an interrupt should be triggered.
Limit monitoring, warning/interrupt: upper limit Select whether a warning or a warning plus an interrupt should be trig-
gered when the event counter upper limit is violated.
Limit monitoring, warning/interrupt: lower limit Select whether a warning or a warning plus an interrupt should be trig-
gered when the event counter lower limit is violated.
Reset event counter upper limit Here you can reset the upper limit counter to zero. A new event is not
possible until the counter has been reset.
Reset event counter lower limit Here you can reset the lower limit counter to zero. A new event is not
possible until the counter has been reset.
Warning/interrupt acknowledgement Here you can acknowledge each warning or interrupt separately.

7.23 Limit monitor
Figure 7-20 Limit monitor and event counter
Messages from the limit monitor and from the event counter can be acknowledged
separately. Resetting the event counter starts a new monitoring interval.

7.23 Limit monitor

Functional safety 8
8.1 Safety function
The safety function of SITRANS P refers to the measurement of pressures. (Order option -
Z C20 and -Z C23) Add an additional safety accuracy of 2% of the maximum measuring
range to the application-specific measurement error.
Total tolerance (safety function) = ± [application-specific measuring error + 2% safety
accuracy].
Pressure transmitter safety accuracy: the maximum effect of a random non-critical individual
error on the measured value.
The diagnostics function will respond within 4 seconds in the worst-case scenario.
The safety accuracy together with the application-specific measurement error allows the
system operator to include a backup for process monitoring. Even if a random individual
error occurs that is within the safety accuracy, the system can still be safely shut down.
As there is also always a possibility of dangerous faults occurring, these are categorized and
listed in the manufacturer declaration for the device (SIL declaration of conformity, functional
safety pursuant to IEC 61508 and IEC 61511).
Example:
A silo is to be securely monitored to check that the level does not exceed 10 meters.
Application-specific measurement error: 0.1%
Safety accuracy: 2.0%
Total tolerance: 2.1%
2.1% of 10 meters is 21 centimeters. If process monitoring is set to 9.79 meters, safe
shutdown is guaranteed even in the event of a random individual error within the safety
accuracy.
Note
Use of remote seals
If remote seals are used, the application-specific measurement error is the product of the
pressure transmitter and remote seal measurement errors.

Functional safety
8.1 Safety function
WARNING
Disregarding conditions for fulfilling the safety function
Disregarding conditions can result in a malfunction of the process system or application, for
example, process pressure too high, maximum level exceeded.
The binding settings and conditions are listed in the chapters "Settings (Page 151)" and
"Safety characteristics (Page 152)".
Please observe the applicable conditions to ensure the safety function.
Safety-instrumented system in single-channel operation (SIL 2)
Figure 8-1 Safety-instrumented system in single-channel operation
The combination of transmitter, automation system and final controlling element forms a
safety-instrumented system that performs a safety function. The emphasis of this description
is on the transmitter. For information on requirements for the automation system or final
controlling element, please refer to the corresponding standards.
The transmitter generates a process-related measured value that is transferred to the
automation system. The automation system monitors this measured value. If the measured
value violates the high or low limit, the automation system generates a shutdown signal for
the connected final controlling element, which switches the corresponding valve to the
specified safety position.
Only one SITRANS P device is required for single-channel operation for SIL 2.
Safety-instrumented system in multi-channel operation (SIL 3)
Figure 8-2 Safety-instrumented system in multi-channel operation
The combination of transmitter, automation system and final controlling element forms a
safety-instrumented system that performs a safety function. The emphasis of this description

Functional safety
8.2 Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
is on the transmitter. For information on requirements for the automation system or final
controlling element, please refer to the corresponding standards.
The transmitter generates process-related measured values that are transferred to the
automation system. The automation system monitors these measured values. In the event of
a fault, the automation system generates shutdown signals for connected final controlling
elements that set the associated valve to the defined safety position. Faults are:
● Violations of the preset high or low limits
● Deviations between the two measured values
The automation system program must monitor the measured values of both SITRANS
P devices. As soon as the measured values differ by e.g. 2% or more, the system must be
brought into the safe state and the fault must be located.
Two SITRANS P devices are required for multi-channel operation for SIL 3. Operation with
one device is not permitted.
Note
Switching-off of system at high monitoring accuracy
The two transmitters are connected to the process at different positions. Actual differences in
pressure ≥ the total tolerance (safety function) can occur when the process is started up or if
there are other pressure variations. A difference in pressure ≥ the total tolerance (safety
function) will shut down the system.
• Match the monitoring accuracy of the automation system to the process.
• Mount the two transmitters exposed to equal conditions.

The international standard IEC 61508 defines four discrete Safety Integrity Levels (SIL) from
SIL 1 to SIL 4. Every level corresponds to a probability range for the failure of a safety
function.
Description
The following table shows the dependency of the SIL on the "average probability of
dangerous failures of a safety function of the entire safety-instrumented system" (PFDAVG).
The table deals with "Low demand mode", i.e. the safety function is required a maximum of
once per year on average.
Table 8- 1 Safety Integrity Level
SIL Interval
4 10-5 ≤ PFDAVG < 10-4
3 10-4 ≤ PFDAVG < 10-3
2 10-3 ≤ PFDAVG < 10-2
1 10-2 ≤ PFDAVG < 10-1

Functional safety
The "average probability of dangerous failures of the entire safety-instrumented system"

(PFDAVG) is normally split between the following three components:
Figure 8-3 PFD distribution
The following table shows the achievable Safety Integrity Level (SIL) for the entire safety-
instrumented system for type B devices depending on the safe failure fraction (SFF) and the
hardware fault tolerance (HFT).
● Type B devices include analog transmitters and shut-off valves with complex
components, e.g. microprocessors (also see IEC 61508, Section 2).
● For detailed information on values and hardware/firmware versions for your device, refer
to the manufacturer declaration for the device (Declaration of Conformity, Functional
Safety according to IEC 61508 and IEC 61511): Certificates
(http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/certificates).
SFF HFT for type B devices

0 1 (0) 1) 2 (1) 1)
< 60 % Not permitted SIL 1 SIL 2
60 to 90 % SIL 1 SIL 2 SIL 3
90 to 99 % SIL 2 SIL 3 SIL 4
> 99 % SIL 3 SIL 4 SIL 4
1) Operational reliability in accordance with IEC 61511-1, Section 11.4.4
Operational reliability
According to IEC 61511-1, Section 11.4.4, the hardware fault tolerance (HFT) can be
reduced by one (values in brackets) for transmitters and final controlling elements with
complex components if the following conditions apply to the device:
● The device is proven in operation.
● The user can configure only the process-related parameters, e.g. control range, signal
direction in case of a fault, limiting values, etc.
● The configuration level of the firmware is blocked against unauthorized operation.
● The function requires SIL of less than 4.
See also
General functional safety (http://www.siemens.com/safety)
Functional safety in process instrumentation (http://www.siemens.com/SIL)

Functional safety
8.3 Settings
8.3 Settings
Introduction
This section details the following areas:
● Settings for devices with functional safety
● Measures you must take when using the device for functional safety.
Procedure
1. Adjusting safety-relevant parameters
2. Checking the safety function
3. Activate button and function lock
Adjusting safety-relevant parameters
Parameter name Adjust parameter value

Low saturation limit 3.8 mA
High saturation limit 20.5 mA
Lower fault current value 3.6 mA
Upper fault current value 22.8 mA
See section Setting the current limits (Page 127).
Checking the safety function

After adjusting the device, check the safety function. You can find a description for checking
the safety function in the chapter Checking the safety function (Page 153).
See also
Locking buttons and functions (Page 96)

Functional safety
8.4 Safety characteristics
8.4 Safety characteristics

The safety characteristics necessary for using the system are listed in the "SIL declaration of
conformity". These values apply under the following conditions:
● The SITRANS P pressure transmitter is only used in applications with a low demand for
the safety function (low demand mode).
● Communication with the HART protocol is used only for the following:
– Device configuration
– Reading diagnostics values
– However, it is not used for operations critical to safety. In particular, the simulation
function must not be activated in safety-related operation.
● The safety-related parameters/settings have been entered by local operation or HART
communication before commencing safety-related operation. Check the
parameters/settings on the device display. See section Settings (Page 151).
● The safety function test has been concluded successfully.
● The transmitter is blocked against unwanted and unauthorized changes/operation.
● The current signal of 4 to 20 mA of the transmitter is evaluated by a safe system.
● Fault rates are calculated on the basis of a Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) of eight hours
(order option C20) or 72 hours (order option C23).
Special points to note for multi-channel operation (SIL 3)

● Two devices are required for multi-channel operation in accordance with SIL 3.
● The automation system must monitor the measured values of both devices. The system
must be put into safe mode as soon as the measured values differ too greatly.
8.5 Maintenance/check
8.5.1 Overview
Checking safety
Check the safety function of the entire safety circuit on a regular basis in accordance with
IEC 61508/61511. The test intervals are determined in the course of calculations for each
safety circuit of a system (PFDAVG).
Checking safety function/proof test

Runs this test to detect hidden serious faults of the pressure transmitter.

Functional safety
Hidden faults result in incorrect measurements and dangerous failures in your safety-related
system.
If necessary, replace the pressure transmitter.
Activate button and function lock

After parameter assignment/commissioning as well as after a proof test, perform the
following steps:
1. Set the lock mode in Mode 10 to write protection "L".
Operation via keys and HART communication is blocked.
2. Protect the keys from unintended change in the parameters, e.g. by lead-sealing.
Electronics and measuring cell

The safety function of the pressure transmitter is ensured only if you use the electronics,
measuring cell, display and connection board delivered by the factory. These components
cannot be replaced.
See also
Settings (Page 151)
Checking safety function/proof test (Page 153)
8.5.2 Checking safety function/proof test
Requirement
● You should check the safety function while the device is installed, if possible. If this is not
possible, you can also check the safety function when the device is not installed. Make
sure that the pressure transmitter is mounted in the same position for testing as it is in the
system.
● Observe the information in the section Key lock or function lock.
● If you are using add-on parts, also see the tests in chapter Add-on parts (Page 160).
Procedure
1. Make sure that the test does not inadvertently result in an emergency shutdown of the
system.
2. Make sure that there are no active warnings or error messages.
3. Checking temperature sensors (Page 155)
4. Simulate the fault current. (Page 155)

Functional safety
5. Conduct a two-point measurement:

Two-point measurement ≥ 10% of the maximum measuring range. (Page 155)
- or -
Two-point measurement ≥ 50% of the maximum measuring range. (Page 155)
6. Make sure that the pressure transmitter is in measuring mode.
7. After the test, make sure that the emergency shutdown of the system is working again.
8. Activate the locking of buttons and functions (Page 152).
Result
If you are conducting the test as described, you will uncover dangerous faults to a certain
degree that are not detected by runtime diagnostics:
● With two-point measurement ≥ 10% of the maximum measuring range: 83% of the faults
are uncovered.
● With two-point measurement ≥ 50% of the maximum measuring range: 99% of the faults
are uncovered.
Note
If you are operating or testing the pressure transmitter with a limited measuring range (10%
of the maximum measuring range), you will also uncover 99% of the faults.
If a measuring cell of 63 bar is only used in the range from 0 bar to 6.3 bar, for example, and
this range is tested completely, you will also uncover 99% of the faults.
If a larger measuring range than 10% is used but only 10% of the maximum measuring
range is tested, the error discovery is less than 99%.
Interval
● Check the pressure transmitter regularly for proper function to uncover influences which
could reduce the functionality of the pressure transmitter in time (proof test).
● Select the interval according to the process and ambient conditions of the installation
location of the pressure transmitter.
Note
For a safety-instrumented system, we recommend checking the device at regular intervals of
one year.
For safety-instrumented systems in multi-channel operation (SIL 3), the PFD value required
by the IEC 61508 standard will not be exceeded within the service life (15 years). This
means a proof test is not necessary as far as the standard is concerned.

Functional safety
8.5.2.1 Checking temperature sensors
Procedure
● Read the sensor temperature and the electronics temperature via HART communication.
● Check whether the measured temperature is within the range of -80 °C and 120 °C.
If the measured temperature is not within this range, the temperature sensor is defective.
8.5.2.2 Simulating fault current
Introduction
You simulate the fault current with the operator function with the "Current simulator" keys
(see Operation using buttons (Page 81)).
Alternatively, you can use the menu command Device>Measuring circuit test in SIMATIC
PDM.
Procedure
1. Enter a low fault current value (3.6 mA).
2. Check the fault current value at the output.
3. Enter a high fault current value (22.8 mA).
4. Check the fault current value at the output.
5. Exit the simulation.
Checking the fault current is successful when the deviation between the set and the
measured fault current is less than 0.2%.
8.5.2.3 Two-point measurement ≥ 10% of the maximum measuring range
General procedure
Requirement
The difference between the first input pressure and the second input pressure is ≥ 10% of
the maximum measuring range.
Checking the measuring range

1. Apply an initial input pressure.
2. Measure the output current.

Functional safety
3. Apply a second input pressure.

Figure 8-4 Example of two-point measurement 10%
See also
Procedure for monitoring a maximum pressure (Page 157)
Procedure for monitoring a minimum pressure
Checking monitoring of a minimum pressure

1. Check the monitoring of the minimum pressure with the threshold defined in the system.
2. Apply an input pressure value that is ≥ 1% below the threshold.
3. Apply an input pressure value that is ≥ 9% above the threshold.
① Threshold
Figure 8-5 Monitoring of a minimum pressure
See also

Functional safety
Procedure for monitoring a maximum pressure
Checking monitoring of the maximum pressure

1. Check the monitoring of the maximum pressure with the threshold defined in the system.
2. Apply an input pressure value that is 10% above the threshold.
3. Apply an input pressure value that is below the threshold.
Note
Step 3 can only be implemented if the maximum limit value is > 10% below the maximum
full scale value. Otherwise, check only up to full scale value.
However, the test range must be 10% of the maximum measuring range.
① Threshold
Figure 8-6 Monitoring of a maximum pressure
See also
Result
The two-point measurements are successful when the deviation between input pressure and
measured output current is ≤ 0.2%.
Negative measurement result

If the two-point measurements of the pressure transmitter were not successful, the SIL level
is no longer guaranteed.
● Replace the pressure transmitter.

Functional safety
8.5.2.4 Two-point measurement ≥ 50% of the maximum measuring range
General procedure
Requirement
The difference between the first input pressure and the second input pressure is ≥ 50% of
the maximum measuring range.
Checking monitoring of the maximum measuring range

1. Apply an initial input pressure.
3. Apply a second input pressure.
Figure 8-7 Example of two-point measurement 50%
See also
Procedure for monitoring a minimum pressure
Checking monitoring of a minimum pressure

2. Apply an input pressure value that is 1% below the threshold.
3. Apply an input pressure value that is ≥ 49% above the threshold when the maximum limit
value is > 10 % below the maximum full scale value.

Functional safety
① Threshold
Figure 8-8 Monitoring of a minimum pressure
See also
Procedure for monitoring a maximum pressure
Checking monitoring of the maximum pressure

2. Apply an input pressure value that is ≥ 10% above the threshold.
3. Apply an input pressure value that is ≥ 40% below the threshold.
Note
Step 3 can only be implemented if the maximum limit value is > 10% below the maximum
full scale value. Otherwise, check only up to full scale value.
However, the test range must be 50% of the maximum measuring range.
① Threshold
Figure 8-9 Monitoring of a maximum pressure
See also

Functional safety
8.6 Add-on parts
Result
The two-point measurements are successful when the deviation between input pressure and
measured output current is ≤ 0.2%.
Negative measurement result

If the two-point measurements of the pressure transmitter were not successful, the SIL level
is no longer guaranteed.
● Replace the pressure transmitter.
8.5.2.5 Checking pressure transmitter for external damage

● Make sure that the terminal compartment is dry.
● Make sure that the enclosure and the process connections do not have any leaks through
which the filling oil or the process medium could escape.
● Check the enclosure for critical damages.
● Make sure that the connecting cable is plugged in correctly and that it is not damaged.
8.6 Add-on parts

This chapter contains safety information for add-on parts.
WARNING
Add-on parts unsuitable for process medium
If the process medium is not suitable for the parts which come into contact with it, hot
and/or toxic or corrosive substances could be released.
• Refer to the information in the chapter "Technical data (Page 185)".
• Make sure that the add-on parts are suitable for the corresponding application with
regard to materials, temperature of process medium, and pressure.
8.6.1 Checking a device with add-on pneumatic block
Procedure
1. Check the connection between the pressure transmitter and pneumatic block and
between the pneumatic block and pipelines in the plant for leaks.
2. Observe the safety information and specifications in chapter Installing/mounting
(Page 37).

Functional safety
8.6 Add-on parts
3. Check the following valves for correct positioning and absence of leaks:
– Process valves
– Stabilizing valve
– Vent valves
– Blowout valves or plugs
4. Observe the safety information and specifications in chapter Commissioning (Page 163).
8.6.2 Checking a device with add-on remote seal
Procedure
1. Check the connection between the pressure transmitter and remote seal and between the
remote seal and the plant for leaks.
2. Observe the safety information and specifications in chapter Installing/mounting
(Page 37).

Functional safety
8.6 Add-on parts

Commissioning 9
DANGER
Toxic gases and liquids
Danger of poisoning when venting the device: if toxic process media are measured, toxic
gases and liquids can be released.
• Before venting ensure that there are no toxic gases or liquids in the device, or take the
appropriate safety measures.
WARNING
Improper commissioning in hazardous areas
Device failure or danger of explosion in hazardous areas.
• Do not commission the device until it has been mounted completely and connected in
accordance with the information in Chapter "Technical data (Page 185)".
• Before commissioning take the effect on other devices in the system into account.
WARNING
Opening device in energized state
• Only open the device in a de-energized state.
• Check prior to commissioning that the cover, cover locks, and cable inlets are
assembled in accordance with the directives.
Exception: Devices having the type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i" may also be opened
in energized state in hazardous areas.
9.2 Introduction to commissioning

Following commissioning, the pressure transmitter is immediately ready for use.
To obtain stable measured values, the pressure transmitter needs to be allowed to warm up
for around 5 minutes after the power supply is switched on. When it starts up, the pressure
transmitter goes through an initialization routine (display at the end: "Init done"). If the
pressure transmitter does not complete the initialization routine, check the auxiliary power.

Commissioning
9.3 gauge pressure, absolute pressure from the differential pressure series and absolute pressure from the
gauge pressure series
The operating data must correspond to the values specified on the nameplate. If you switch
on the auxiliary power, the pressure transmitter is in operation.
The following commissioning cases are typical examples. Configurations different from those
listed here may be meaningful depending on the system configuration.
9.3 gauge pressure, absolute pressure from the differential pressure

series and absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series
9.3.1 Commissioning for gases
Usual arrangement Special arrangement
Measuring gases above the pressure tapping Measuring gases below the pressure tapping
point point

Commissioning
9.3 gauge pressure, absolute pressure from the differential pressure series and absolute pressure from the gauge pressur
① Pressure transmitter ⑤ Pressure line

② Shut-off valve ⑥ Shut-off valve
③ Shut-off valve to process ⑦ Shut-off valve (optional)
④ Shut-off valve for test connection or for ⑧ Condensate vessel (optional)
bleed screw
⑨ Drain valve
Requirement
All valves are closed.
Procedure
To commission the pressure transmitter for gases, proceed as follows:
1. Open the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.
2. Via the test connection of the shut-off valve ②, apply the pressure corresponding to the
start of scale value to the pressure transmitter ①.
3. Check the start of scale value.
4. If the start of scale value differs from the value desired, correct it.
5. Close the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.
6. Open the shut-off valve ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.
7. Open the shut-off valve for the process ③.

Commissioning
9.3 gauge pressure, absolute pressure from the differential pressure series and absolute pressure from the
gauge pressure series
9.3.2 Commissioning with steam or liquid
① Pressure transmitter
② Shut-off valve
③ Shut-off valve to process
④ Shut-off valve for test connection or for bleed screw
⑤ Pressure line
⑥ Shut-off valve
⑦ Blow-out valve
⑧ Compensation vessel (steam only)
Figure 9-1 Measuring steam
Requirement
Procedure
To commission the pressure transmitter for steam or liquid, proceed as follows:
1. Open the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.
2. Via the test connection of the shut-off valve ②, apply the pressure corresponding to the
start of scale value to the pressure transmitter ①.
3. Check the start of scale value.
4. If the start of scale value differs from the value desired, correct it.
5. Close the shut-off valve for the test connection ④.

Commissioning
9.4 Differential pressure and flow rate
6. Open the shut-off valve ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.

7. Open the shut-off valve for the process ③.
9.4.1 Safety notes for commissioning with differential pressure and flow rate
WARNING
Incorrect or improper operation
If the lock screws are missing or are not sufficiently tight, and/or if the valves are operated
incorrectly or improperly, it could lead to serious physical injuries or considerable damage
to property.
Measure
• Make sure the locking screw and/or the vent valve are screwed in and tightened.
• Ensure that the valves are operated correctly and properly.

Commissioning
9.4.2 Commissioning in gaseous environments
① Pressure transmitter ⑥ Shut-off valves

② Stabilizing valve ⑦ Drain valves
③, ④ Differential pressure valves ⑧ Condensate vessels (optional)
⑤ Differential pressure lines ⑨ Differential pressure transducer
Pressure transmitter above the differ- Pressure transmitter below the
ential pressure transducer differential pressure transducer
Requirement
All shut-off valves are closed.

Commissioning
Procedure
To commission the pressure transmitter for gases, proceed as follows:
1. Open both the shut-off valves ⑥ at the pressure tapping point.
2. Open the stabilizing valve ②.
3. Open the differential pressure valve (③ or ④).
4. Check and, if necessary, correct the zero point when the start-of-scale value is 0 kPa
(4 mA).
5. Close the stabilizing valve ②.
6. Open the other differential pressure valve (③ or ④).

Commissioning
9.4.3 Commissioning for liquids
① Pressure transmitter ⑦ Drain valves

② Stabilizing valve ⑧ Gas collector vessels (optional)
③, ④ Differential pressure valves ⑨ Differential pressure transducer
⑤ Differential pressure lines ⑩ Vent valves
⑥ Shut-off valves
Pressure transmitter below the differential Pressure transmitter above the
pressure transducer differential pressure transducer
Requirement

Commissioning
Procedure
DANGER
Toxic liquids
Danger of poisoning when the device is vented.
If toxic process media are measured with this device, toxic liquids can escape when the
device is vented.
• Before venting, make sure there is no liquid in the device or take the necessary safety
precautions.
To commission the pressure transmitter for liquids, proceed as follows:

3. With a pressure transmitter below the differential pressure transducer, open both blowout
valves ⑦ one after the other until the air-free liquid escapes.
In the case of a pressure transmitter above the differential pressure transducer, open
both vent valves ⑩ one after the other until the air-free liquid escapes.
4. Close both drain valves ⑦ or vent valves ⑩.
5. Open the differential pressure valve ③ and the vent valve on the positive side of the
pressure transmitter ① slightly, until fluid escapes without bubbles.
6. Close the vent valve.
7. Open the vent valve on the negative side of the pressure transmitter ① slightly, until fluid
escapes without bubbles.
8. Close the differential pressure valve ③.
9. Open the differential pressure valve ④ until the liquid emerges and then close it.
10.Close the vent valve on the negative side of the pressure transmitter ①.
11.Open the differential pressure valve ③ by rotating it in ½ turn.
12.Check and, if necessary, correct the zero point (4 mA) when the start-of-scale value is
0 kPa.
13.Close the stabilizing valve ②.
14.Open the differential pressure valves (③ and ④) completely.

Commissioning
9.4.4 Commissioning with vapor
① Pressure transmitter ⑦ Drain valves

② Stabilizing valve ⑧ Condensate pots
③, Differential pressure valves ⑨ Differential pressure transducer/Orifice
④ plate
⑤ Differential pressure lines ⑩ Insulation
⑥ Shut-off valves
Figure 9-2 Measuring steam
Requirement
Procedure
WARNING
Hot vapor
If the shut-off valves ⑥ and the differential pressure valve ③ are both open and the
stabilizing valve ② is then opened, the pressure transmitter ① can be damaged by the
flow of vapor.
• Follow the specified procedure for commissioning.

Commissioning
WARNING
Hot vapor
Danger of injury.
You can briefly open the drain valves ⑦ to clean the line. Hot vapor can escape in the
process.
• Only open the drain valves ⑦ briefly, and close them again before vapor escapes.
To commission the pressure transmitter for vapor, proceed as follows:

3. Wait until the steam in the differential pressure lines ⑤ and in the equalizing vessels ⑧
has condensed.
4. Open the differential pressure valve ③ and the vent valve on the positive side of the
pressure transmitter ① slightly, until air-free condensate escapes.
5. Close the vent valve.
6. Open the vent valve on the negative side of the pressure transmitter ① slightly, until
condensate escapes without bubbles.
7. Close the differential pressure valve ③.
8. Open the differential pressure valve ④ slightly, until condensate escapes without
bubbles, then close it.
9. Close the vent valve on the negative side ①.
10.Open the differential pressure valve ③ by rotating it in ½ turn.
11.Check and correct, if necessary, the zero point (4 mA) when the start of scale value is
0 kPa.
The result is only error-free if the differential pressure lines ⑤ have equally high
condensate columns with the same temperature. The zero calibration must be repeated if
required if these conditions are fulfilled.
12.Close the stabilizing valve ②.
13.Fully open the differential pressure valves ③ and ④.
14.You can briefly open the drain valves ⑦ to clean the line.
15.Close the drain valve ⑦ before vapor escapes.

Commissioning

Service and maintenance 10
WARNING
Impermissible repair of explosion protected devices
• Repair must be carried out by Siemens authorized personnel only.
WARNING
Impermissible accessories and spare parts
• Only use original accessories or original spare parts.
• Observe all relevant installation and safety instructions described in the instructions for
the device or enclosed with the accessory or spare part.
WARNING
these parts.

Service and maintenance
WARNING
Maintenance during continued operation in a hazardous area
There is a danger of explosion when carrying out repairs and maintenance on the device in
a hazardous area.
• Isolate the device from power.
- or -
• Ensure that the atmosphere is explosion-free (hot work permit).
WARNING
Commissioning and operation with pending error
If an error message appears, correct operation in the process is no longer guaranteed.
• Check the gravity of the error.
• Correct the error.
• If the error still exists:
– Take the device out of operation.
– Prevent renewed commissioning.
See also
Display in case of a fault (Page 179)
WARNING
Hot, toxic or corrosive process media
Danger of injury during maintenance work.
When working on the process connection, hot, toxic or corrosive process media could be
released.
• As long as the device is under pressure, do not loosen process connections and do not
remove any parts that are pressurized.
• Before opening or removing the device ensure that process media cannot be released.
WARNING
Improper connection after maintenance
• Connect the device correctly after maintenance.
• Close the device after maintenance work.
Refer to Chapter "Connecting (Page 61)".

WARNING
Use of a computer in a hazardous area
If the interface to the computer is used in the hazardous area, there is a danger of
explosion.
CAUTION
Releasing key lock
Improper modification of parameters could influence process safety.
• Make sure that only authorized personnel may cancel the key locking of devices for
safety-related applications.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces
Danger of burns during maintenance work on parts having surface temperatures exceeding
70 °C (158 °F).
• Take corresponding protective measures, for example by wearing protective gloves.
• After carrying out maintenance, remount touch protection measures.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage with open device in versions with 4-conductor extension
Danger of electrocution when the enclosure is opened or enclosure parts are removed.
• Disconnect the device before you open the enclosure or remove enclosure parts.
• Observe the special precautionary measures if maintenance is required while the device
is live. Have maintenance work carried out by qualified personnel.

10.2 Maintenance and repair work
NOTICE
10.2.1 Defining the maintenance interval
WARNING
No maintenance interval has been defined
Device failure, device damage, and risk of injury.
• Define a maintenance interval for recurring tests depending on the use of the device and
your own experience.
• The maintenance interval will vary from site to site depending on corrosion resistance.

10.2.2 Checking the gaskets
Inspect the seals at regular intervals
Note
Incorrect seal changes
Incorrect measured values will be displayed. Changing the seals in a process flange of a
differential pressure measuring cell can alter the start-of-scale value.
• Changing seals in devices with differential pressure measuring cells may only be carried
out by personnel authorized by Siemens.
Note
Using the wrong seals
Using the wrong seals with flush-mounted process connections can cause measuring errors
and/or damage the diaphragm.
• Always use seals which comply with the process connection standards or are
recommended by Siemens.
1. Clean the enclosure and seals.

2. Check the enclosure and seals for cracks and damage.
3. Grease the seals if necessary.
- or -
4. Replace the seals.
10.2.3 Display in case of a fault

Check the start of scale value of the device from time to time.

Differentiate between the following in case of a fault:

● The internal self test has detected a fault, e.g. sensor break, hardware fault/Firmware
fault.
Displays:
– Display: "ERROR" display and ticker with an error text
– Analog output: Factory setting: Failure current 3.6 or 22.8 mA
Or depending on the parameterization
– HART: detailed error breakdown for display in the HART communicator or SIMATIC
PDM
● Grave hardware faults, the processor is not functioning.
Displays:
– Display: no defined display
– Analog output: failure current < 3.6 mA
In the event of a defect, you can replace the application electronics by following the warning
notes and the provided operating instructions.
See also
Error display (Page 75)
10.2.4 Changing the measuring cell and application electronics
Related
Each of the individual components "Measuring cell" and "Electronics" has a non-volatile
memory (EEPROM).
Measuring cell data (e.g.: measuring range, measuring cell material, oil filling) and user data
of the application electronics (e.g.: downscaling, additional electrical damping) are located in
the measuring cell EEPROM. User data is lost when the measuring cell is replaced.
Application-specific data are not lost when the application electronics are changed.
You can backup user data before changing the measuring cell and reload it afterwards. Use
an input device which supports the HART protocol. (e.g. HART communicator, PC with
HART modem and HART software or PC with HART modem and PDM software). Factory
settings will be used if user data is not backed up before the measuring cell is changed.
Technical developments enable advanced functions to be implemented in the firmware of the
measuring cell or application electronics. Further technical developments are indicated by
modified firmware statuses (FW). The firmware status does not affect whether the modules
can be replaced. However, the scope of functions is limited to the function of existing
components.

10.3 Cleaning
If a combination of certain firmware versions of measuring cell and application electronics is

not possible for technical reasons, the device will identify this problem and go into "Fault
current" mode. This information is provided via the HART interface.
10.3 Cleaning
WARNING
Dust layers above 5 mm
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas. Device may overheat due to dust build up.
• Remove dust layers in excess of 5 mm.
NOTICE
Penetration of moisture into the device
Device damage.
• Make sure when carrying out cleaning and maintenance work that no moisture
penetrates the inside of the device.
Cleaning the enclosure

● Clean the outside of the enclosure and the display window using a cloth moistened with
water or a mild detergent.
● Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or solvents. Plastic components or painted
surfaces could be damaged.
WARNING
Electrostatic charge
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas if electrostatic charges develop, for example, when
cleaning plastic surfaces with a dry cloth.
• Prevent electrostatic charging in hazardous areas.
10.3.1 Servicing the remote seal measuring system

The remote seal measuring system usually does not need servicing.
If the mediums are contaminated, viscous or crystallized, it could be necessary to clean the
diaphragm from time to time. Use only a suitable solvent to remove the deposits from the

10.3 Cleaning
diaphragm. Do not use corrosive cleaning agents. Prevent the diaphragm from getting
damaged due to sharp-edged tools.
NOTICE
Improper cleaning of diaphragm
Device damage. The diaphragm can be damaged.
• Do not use sharp or hard objects to clean the diaphragm.

10.4 Return procedure

Enclose the bill of lading, return document and decontamination certificate in a clear plastic
pouch and attach it firmly to the outside of the packaging.
Required forms
● Delivery note
● Return goods delivery note
(http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/returngoodsnote)
with the following information:
– Product (item description)
– Number of returned devices/replacement parts
– Reason for returning the item(s)
● Decontamination declaration (http://www.siemens.com/sc/declarationofdecontamination)
With this declaration you warrant "that the device/replacement part has been carefully
cleaned and is free of residues. The device/replacement part does not pose a hazard for
humans and the environment."
If the returned device/replacement part has come into contact with poisonous, corrosive,
flammable or water-contaminating substances, you must thoroughly clean and
decontaminate the device/replacement part before returning it in order to ensure that all
hollow areas are free from hazardous substances. Check the item after it has been
cleaned.
Any devices/replacement parts returned without a decontamination declaration will be
cleaned at your expense before further processing.
The forms can be found on the Internet as well as in the documentation which comes with
the device.

10.5 Disposal
10.5 Disposal
Devices identified by this symbol may not be disposed of in the

municipal waste disposal services under observance of the
Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electronic and electrical equip-
ment (WEEE).
They can be returned to the supplier within the EC or to a local-
ly approved disposal service. Observe the specific regulations
valid in your country.
Note
Special disposal required
The device includes components that require special disposal.
• Dispose of the device properly and environmentally through a local waste disposal
contractor.

Technical data 11
11.1 Overview of technical data
Introduction
The following overview of technical data provides you with a quick and easy access to
relevant data and characteristic numbers.
Remember that tables in part contain the data of the three communication types HART,
PROFIBUS and FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus. This data deviates in many cases. Therefore,
adhere to the communication type used by you when using the technical data.
Contents of the chapter

● SITRANS P DS III input (Page 186)
● SITRANS P410 input (Page 192)
● Output (Page 194)
● Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P DS III (Page 195)
● Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P410 (Page 203)
● Operating conditions (Page 205)
● Construction (Page 209)
● Display, keyboard and auxiliary power (Page 214)
● Certificates and approvals (Page 216)
● HART communication (Page 217)

Technical data
11.2 SITRANS P DS III input
Gauge pressure input

Span continuously adjustable) or measuring Span 1) Maximum operating Maximum test pressure
range, max. operating pressure (in accord- pressure MAWP (PS)
ance with 97/23/EC Pressure Equipment 8.3 … 250 mbar 4 bar 6 bar
Directive) and max. test pressure (in ac-
cordance with DIN 16086) (for oxygen 0.83 ... 25 kPa 400 kPa 0.6 MPa
measurement, max. 100 bar and 60 °C 0.12 … 3.6 psi 58 psi 87 psi
ambient temperature/process temperature 0.01 … 1 bar 4 bar 6 bar
)
1 ... 100 kPa 400 kPa 0.6 MPa
0.15 … 14.5 psi 58 psi 87 psi
0.04 … 4 bar 7 bar 10 bar
4 ... 400 kPa 0.7 MPa 1 MPa
0.58 … 58 psi 102 psi 145 psi
0.16 … 16 bar 21 bar 32 bar
16 ... 1600 kPa 2.1 MPa 3.2 MPa
2.3 … 232 psi 305 psi 464 psi
0.63 … 63 bar 67 bar 100 bar
63 ... 6300 kPa 6.7 MPa 10 MPa
9.1 … 914 psi 972 psi 1450 psi
1.6 … 160 bar 167 bar 250 bar
0.16 ... 16 MPa 16.7 MPa 2.5 MPa
23 … 2321 psi 2422 psi 3626 psi
4 … 400 bar 400 bar 600 bar
0.4 ... 40 MPa 40 MPa 60 MPa
58 … 5802 psi 5802 psi 8702 psi
7 … 700 bar 800 bar 800 bar
0.7 ... 70 MPa 80 MPa 80 MPa
102 ... 10153 psi 11603 psi 11603 psi
Low measuring limit2)
• Measuring cell with inert liquid 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
Upper measuring limit 100 % of max. span (for oxygen measurement: max.
100 bar/10 MPa/1450 psi and 60 °C ambient temperature/process tempera-
ture)
1) Order the nominal measuring range with the order option Y01 for PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
2) With 250mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi measuring cells, the lower measuring limit is 750 mbar a/75 kPa a/10.8 psi a. The measur-
ing cell is vacuum-tight down to 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a.

Technical data
gauge pressure input, with flush mounted diaphragm

Span (continuously adjustable) or measur- Span 1) Maximum operating Maximum test pressure
ing range, max. operating pressure and pressure MAWP (PS)
max. test pressure 0.01 … 1 bar 4 bar 6 bar
1 ... 100 kPa 400 kPa 0.6 MPa
0.15 … 14.5 psi 58 psi 87 psi
0.04 … 4 bar 7 bar 10 bar
4 ... 400 kPa 0.7 MPa 1 MPa
0.58 … 58 psi 102 psi 145 psi
0.16 … 16 bar 21 bar 32 bar
0.06 ... 1600 kPa 2.1 MPa 3.2 MPa
2.3 … 232 psi 305 psi 464 psi
0.6 … 63 bar 67 bar 100 bar
0.06 ... 6.3 MPa 6.7 MPa 10 MPa
9.1 … 914 psi 972 psi 1450 psi
• Measuring cell with inert liquid 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
• Measuring cell with neobee 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
Upper measuring limit 100% of maximum span

Absolute pressure input, with flush-mounted diaphragm

Measured variable Absolute pressure
max. test pressure 43 … 1300 mbar a 2.6 bar a 10 bar a
4.3 ... 130 kPa a 260 kPa a 1 MPa a
17 … 525 inH2O a 37.7 psi a 145 psi a
160 … 5000 mbar a 10 bar a 30 bar a
16 ... 500 kPa a 1 MPa a 3 MPa a
2.32 … 72.5 psi a 145 psi a 435 psi a
1 … 30 bar a 45 bar a 100 bar a
0.1 ... 3 MPa a 4.5 MPa 10 MPa a
14.5 … 435 psi a 653 psi a 1450 psi a
Depending on the process connection, the span may differ from these values
Lower measuring limit 0 mbar a/kPa a/psi a

Technical data
Input pressure transmitter with PMC connection

Span (continuously adjustable) or measur- Span1) 2) Maximum operating Maximum test pressure
max. test pressure 0.01 … 1 bar 4 bar 6 bar
1 ... 100 kPa 400 kPa 600 kPa
0.15 … 14.5 psi 58 psi 87 psi
0.04 … 4 bar 7 bar 10 bar
4 ... 400 kPa 700 kPa 1 MPa
0.58 … 58 psi 102 psi 145 psi
0.16 … 16 bar 21 bar 32 bar
0.016... 1.6 MPa 2.1 MPa 3.2 MPa
2.3 … 232 psi 305 psi 464 psi
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 2) 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
• Measuring cell with inert liquid 2) 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a
• Measuring cell with neobee 2) 100 mbar a/10 kPa a/1.45 psi a

2) For PMC-Style Minibolt, the span should not be less than 500 mbar
Absolute pressure input (from the gauge pressure series)

ing range, maximum operating pressure (as pressure MAWP (PS)
per 97/23/EC pressure device guideline) 8.3 … 250 mbar a 1.5 bar a 6 bar a
and maximum test pressure (as per
DIN 16086) 0.83 ... 25 kPa a 150 kPa a 600 kPa a
3 … 100 inH2O a 21.8 psi a 87 psi a
43 … 1300 mbar a 2.6 bar a 10 bar a
4.3 ... 130 kPa a 260 kPa a 1 MPa a
17 … 525 inH2O a 37.7 psi a 145 psi a
160 … 5000 mbar a 10 bar a 30 bar a
16 ... 500 kPa a 1 MPa a 3 MPa a
2.32 … 72.5 psi a 145 psi a 435 psi a
1 … 30 bar a 45 bar a 100 bar a
0.1 ... 3 MPa a 4.5 MPa a 10 MPa a
14.5 … 435 psi a 653 psi a 1450 psi a
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 0 mbar a/kPa a/psi a
• Measuring cell with inert liquid

Technical data
Absolute pressure input (from the gauge pressure series)

for process temperature -20°C < ϑ 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a
≤ 60°C (-4°F < ϑ ≤ +140°F)
for process temperature 60°C < ϑ 30 mbar a + 20 mbar a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
≤ 100°C (max. 85°C for measuring 3 kPa a + 2 kPa a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
cell 30 bar) (140°F < ϑ ≤ 212°F 0.44 psi a + 0.29 psi a • (ϑ - 108 °F)/°F
(max. 185°F for measuring cell
435 psi))
ture)
Absolute pressure input (from the differential pressure series)

Span (continuously adjustable) or measur- Span 1) Maximum
ing range and max. operating pressure (in operating pressure MAWP (PS)
accordance with 97/23/EC Pressure 8.3 … 250 mbar a 32 bar a
Equipment Directive)
0.83 ... 25 kPa a 3.2 MPa a
3 … 100 inH2O a 464 psi a
43 … 1300 mbar a 32 bar a
4.3 ... 130 kPa a 3.2 MPa a
17 … 525 inH2O a 464 psi a
160 … 5000 mbar a 32 bar a
16 ... 500 kPa a 3.2 MPa a
2.32 … 72.5 psi a 464 psi a
1 … 30 bar a 160 bar a
0.1 ... 3 MPa a 16 MPa a
14.5 … 435 psi a 2320 psi a
5.3 … 100 bar a 160 bar a
0.5 ... 10 MPa a 16 MPa a
76.9 … 1450 psi a 2320 psi a
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 0 mbar a /kPa a /psi a

for process temperature -20°C < ϑ 30 mbar a /3 kPa a /0.44 psi a
≤ 60°C (-4°F < ϑ ≤ +140°F)
for process temperature 60°C < ϑ 30 mbar a + 20 mbar a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
≤ 100°C (max. 85°C for measuring 3 kPa a + 2 kPa a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
cell 30 bar) (140°F < ϑ ≤ 212°F 0.44 psi a + 0.29 psi a • (ϑ - 108 °F)/°F
(max. 185°F for measuring cell
435 psi))

Technical data
Absolute pressure input (from the differential pressure series)

ture)
Differential pressure and flow rate input

Measured variable Differential pressure and flow rate
Span (continuously adjustable) or measur- Span 1) Maximum operating pressure MAWP
ing range and max. operating pressure (in (PS)
accordance with 97/23/EC Pressure 1 ... 20 mbar 32 bar
0.1 ... 2 kPa 3.2 MPa
0.4015 … 8.031 inH2O 464 psi
1 ... 60 mbar 160 bar
0.1 ... 6 kPa 16 MPa
0.4015 … 24.09 inH2O 2320 psi
2.5 … 250 mbar
0.2 ... 25 kPa
1.004 … 100.4 inH2O
6 … 600 mbar
0.6 ... 60 kPa
2.409 … 240.9 inH2O
16 … 1600 mbar
1.6 ... 160 kPa
6.424 … 642.4 inH2O
50 … 5000 mbar
5 ... 500 kPa
20.08 … 2008 inH2O
0.3 … 30 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa
4.35 … 435 psi
2.5 … 250 mbar 420 bar
0.25 ... 25 kPa 42 MPa
1.004 … 100.4 inH2O 6091 psi
6 … 600 mbar
0.6 ... 60 kPa
2.409 … 240.9 inH2O
16 … 1600 mbar
1.6 ... 160 kPa
6.424 … 642.4 inH2O

Technical data

50 … 5000 mbar
5 ... 500 kPa
20.08 … 2008 inH2O
0.3 … 30 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa
4.35 … 435 psi
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -100% of max. measuring range
(-33 % for 30 bar /3 MPa /435 psi measuring cell) or
30 mbar a /3 kPa a /0.44 psi a
for process temperature -20°C < ϑ -100 % of max. measuring range
≤ 60°C (-4°F < ϑ ≤ +140°F) (-33 % for 30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi measuring cell) or 30 mbar a/3 kPa
a/0.44 psi a
for process temperature 60°C < ϑ • -100% of max. measuring range (-33% for 30 bar/3 kPa/435 psi measur-
≤ 100°C (max. 85°C for measuring ing cell)
cell 30 bar) (140°F < ϑ ≤ 212°F
(max. 185°F for measuring cell • 30 mbar a + 20 mbar a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
435 psi)) 3 kPa a + 2 kPa a • (ϑ - 60 °C)/°C
0.44 psi a + 0.29 psi a • (ϑ - 108 °F)/°F
ture)
Level input
Measured variable Level
accordance with 97/23/EC Pressure 25 … 250 mbar see the mounting flange
2.5 ... 25 kPa
10 … 100 inH2O
25 … 600 mbar
2.5 ... 60 kPa
10 … 240 inH2O
53 … 1600 mbar
5.3 ... 160 kPa
021 … 640 inH2O
160 … 5000 mbar
16 ... 500 kPa
2.32 … 72.5 psi

Technical data
11.3 SITRANS P410 input
Level input
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -100% of max. measuring range or 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a depending
on the mounting flange
• Measuring cell with inert liquid -100% of max. measuring range or 30 mbar a/3 kPa a/0.44 psi a depending
on the mounting flange
Start of scale value between the measuring limits continuously adjustable
Gauge pressure input

ing range, max. operating pressure (in ac- pressure MAWP (PS)
cordance with 97/23/EC Pressure 0.01 … 1 bar 4 bar 6 bar
Equipment Directive) and max. test pres-
sure (in accordance with DIN 16086). 1 ... 100 kPa 400 kPa 0.6 MPa
0.15 … 14.5 psi 58 psi 87 psi
0.04 … 4 bar 7 bar 10 bar
4 ... 400 kPa 0.7 MPa 1 MPa
0.58 … 58 psi 102 psi 145 psi
0.16 … 16 bar 21 bar 32 bar
16 ... 1600 kPa 2.1 MPa 3.2 MPa
2.3 … 232 psi 305 psi 464 psi
0.63 … 63 bar 67 bar 100 bar
63 ... 6300 kPa 6.7 MPa 10 MPa
9.1 … 914 psi 972 psi 1450 psi
1.6 … 160 bar 167 bar 250 bar
0.16 ... 16 MPa 16.7 MPa 2.5 MPa
23 … 2321 psi 2422 psi 3626 psi


Technical data

Measured variable Differential pressure and flow rate
accordance with 97/23/EC Pressure 2.5 … 250 mbar 160 bar
0.2 ... 25 kPa 16 MPa
1.004 … 100.4 inH2O 2320 psi
6 … 600 mbar
0.6 ... 60 kPa
2.409 … 240.9 inH2O
16 … 1600 mbar
1.6 ... 160 kPa
6.424 … 642.4 inH2O
50 … 5000 mbar
5 ... 500 kPa
20.08 … 2008 inH2O
0.3 … 30 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa
4.35 … 435 psi
6 … 600 mbar 420 bar
0.6 ... 60 kPa 42 MPa
2.409 … 240.9 inH2O 6091 psi
16 … 1600 mbar
1.6 ... 160 kPa
6.424 … 642.4 inH2O
50 … 5000 mbar
5 ... 500 kPa
20.08 … 2008 inH2O
0.3 … 30 bar
0.03 ... 3 MPa
4.35 … 435 psi
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -100 % of max. measuring range
(-33 % for 30 bar/3 MPa/435 psi measuring cell) or 30 mbar a/3 kPa
a/0.44 psi a

Technical data
11.4 Output
11.4 Output
Output
HART PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION
Fieldbus
Output signal 4 … 20 mA Digital PROFIBUS PA or
FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus signal
• Low saturation limit (fully adjusta- 3.55 mA, set to 3.84 mA in the factory –
ble)
• High saturation limit (fully adjusta- 23 mA, set to 20.5 mA or optionally –

ble) 22.0 mA in the factory
• Ripple (without HART communica- ISS ≤ 0.5 % of the max. output current –
tion)
adjustable time constants damp- 0 … 100 s, continuously adjustable 0 … 100 s, continuously adjustable
ing coefficient
Adjustable time constants (T63) 0 … 100 s, in steps of 0.1 s 0 … 100 s, in steps of 0.1 s
with local operation Factory-set to 2 s Factory-set to 2 s
• Current transmitter 3.55 … 23 mA –
• Failure signal 3.55 … 23 mA –
Load Resistor R [Ω] –

• Without HART communication –
UH Power supply in V
• With HART communication –
HART communicator (Handheld) R =230 … 1100 Ω –

SIMATIC PDM R =230 … 500 Ω –
Characteristic curve • Linearly increasing or linearly decreasing
• Linear increase or decrease or root extraction increase (only for differential
pressure and flow rate)
Bus physics – IEC 61158-2
Polarity-independent – Yes

Technical data
11.5 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P DS III
Measuring accuracy (as per EN 60770-1) gauge pressure

Reference conditions • Rising characteristic curve
• Start of scale value 0 bar/kPa/psi
• Seal diaphragm stainless steel
• Measuring cell with silicone oil filling
Measuring span ratio r (spread, Turn- r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal measuring range
Down)
Conformity error at limit point setting,
including hysteresis and repeatability
• Linear characteristic curve r ≤ 1.25 1.25 < r ≤ 30
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.008 • r + 0.055) %

• Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045) %

160 bar/16 MPa/12321 psi
• Linear characteristic curve r≤3 3 < r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 100
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi ≤ 0.075% ≤ (0.0029 • r + 0.071) % ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05) %

700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi
Effect of ambient temperature In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.16 • r + 0.1) %
• 1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ (0.05 • r + 0.1) %
• 4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125) %

160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi
• 700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16) %
Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F)

• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi Per year ≤ (0.25 • r) %
• 1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r) %

• 16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r) %
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
400 bar/40 MPa/5802 psi

Technical data

• 700 bar/70 MPa/10152 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r) %
Step response time T63 (without elec- Approx. 0.15 s

trical damping)
Effect of mounting position ≤ 0.05 mbar/0.005 kPa/0.000725 psi per 10° incline
(zero-point correction is possible with position error compensation)
Effect of auxiliary power supply In percent per change in voltage
0.005 % per 1 V
Measured value resolution for 3 • 10-5 of the nominal measuring range
PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION
Fieldbus
Gauge pressure measuring accuracy, with flush mounted diaphragm

Down)
• Linear characteristic curve
r≤5 ≤ 0.075 %
5 < r ≤ 100 ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05) %
Effect of ambient temperature
In percent per 28 °C (50 °F) ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)
Effect of process temperature In pressure per temperature change
• Temperature difference between 3 mbar per 10 K
medium temperature and ambient 0.3 kPa per 10 K
temperature 0.04 psi per 10 K
Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r) %
Step response time T63 without electri- Approx. 0.2 s
cal damping
Effect of mounting position In pressure per change of angle
0.4 mbar/0.04 kPa/0.006 psi per 10° incline
0.005 % per 1 V
Fieldbus

Technical data
Absolute pressure measuring accuracy with flush diaphragm

Down)
r ≤ 10 ≤ 0.2%
10 < r ≤ 30 ≤ 0.4%
Step response time T63 without electri- Approx. 0.2 s
cal damping
0.04 kPa/0.4 mbar/0.006 psi per 10° incline
0.005 % per 1 V
Measured-value resolution for 3 • 10-5 of the nominal measuring range
PROFIBUS PA or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Measuring accuracy (according to EN 60770-1) of pressure transmitter with PMC connection

Down)

Technical data
Measuring accuracy (according to EN 60770-1) of pressure transmitter with PMC connection

r≤5 ≤ 0.075 %
5 < r ≤ 100 ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05) %
Step response time T63 without elec- Approx. 0.2 s
trical damping
≤ 0.1 mbar/0.01 kPa/0.00145 psi per 10° incline
0.005 % per 1 V
PROFIBUS PA or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Absolute pressure measuring accuracy (from gauge and differential pressure series)
Down)
r ≤ 10 ≤ 0.1%
10 < r ≤ 30 ≤ 0.2%
• Effect of ambient temperature In percent per 28 °C (50 °F)
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.6 psi ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1)

Technical data
Absolute pressure measuring accuracy (from gauge and differential pressure series)
• 1300 mbar a/130 kPa a/18.8 ≤ (0.08 • r + 0.16)
psi a
5 bar a/500 kPa a/72.5 psi a
30 bar a/3000 kPa a/435 psi a
100 bar a/10 MPa a/1450.3 psi a
160 bar a/16 MPa a/2321 psi a
400 bar a/40 MPa a/5802 psi a
700 bar a/70 MPa a/10152.6

psi a
Step response time T63 without electrical Approx. 0.2 s
damping
• for absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series): ≤
• for absolute pressure (from the differential pressure series):
0.005 % per 1 V
Fieldbus
Differential pressure and flow rate measuring accuracy

Measuring span ratio r (spread, r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal measuring range
Turn-Down)
Conformity error at limit point set-
ting, including hysteresis and re-
peatability
• Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 20
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.075 % ≤ (0.0029 • r + 0.071) % ≤ (0.0045 • r + 0.071) %

60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.075 % ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05) %


Technical data

250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
• Root extraction characteristic
Flow > 50 % r≤5 5 < r ≤ 10 10 < r ≤ 20
• 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.075 % ≤ (0.0029 • r + 0.071) % ≤ (0.0045 • r + 0.071) %

Flow > 50 % r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
• 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.15 % ≤ (0.005 • r + 0.05) %

Flow > 50 % r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.065% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 p
si
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Flow 25 ... 50% r≤5 5 < r ≤10 10 < r ≤ 20
• 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.15 % ≤ (0.0058 • r + 0.142) % ≤ (0.009 • r + 0.142) %

Flow 25 ... 50% r≤5 5 < r ≤ 60
• 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.075 % ≤ (0.01 • r + 0.1) %
• Root extraction characteristic r≤5 5 < r ≤ 100
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.13% ≤ (0.008 • r + 0.9) %

1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
• 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ (0.15 • r + 0.1) %
• 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ (0.075 • r + 0.1) %
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125) %

1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Technical data

Effect of static pressure
• At the start of scale value
20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ (0.15 • r) % per 32 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error com-
pensation)
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ (0.1 • r) % per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error compen-
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi sation)
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi ≤ (0.2 • r) % per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error compen-
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi sation)
• On the measuring span

20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi ≤ 0.2% per 32 bar
60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi ≤ 0.14 % per 70 bar
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Long-term stability at ±30 °C Static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/1015 psi
(±54 °F)
• 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi Per year ≤ (0.2 • r) %
• 60 mbar/6 kPa/0.87 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r) %

30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
Step response time T63 without
electrical damping
• 20 mbar/2 kPa/0.29 psi Approx. 0.3 s

1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
≤ 0.7 mbar/0.07 kPa/0.028 inH2O per 10° incline
0.005 % per 1 V
PROFIBUS PA or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Technical data
Level measuring accuracy

Down)
Conformity error at limit point setting, in-
cluding hysteresis and repeatability
• Linear characteristic curve r≤5 5 < r ≤ 10 5 < r ≤ 25 5 < r ≤ 30
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.125% ≤ (0.007 • r + 0.09)

%
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi ≤ 0.125% ≤ (0.007 • r +
0.09) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi ≤ 0.125% ≤ (0.007 • r +
0.09) %
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi ≤ 0.125% ≤ (0.007 • r +
0.09) %
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.4 • r + 0.16) %
• 600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi ≤ (0.24 • r + 0.16) %
• 1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi ≤ (0.2 • r + 0.16) %
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi

Measuring cell 250 ≤ (0.3 • r) % per nominal pressure
mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi
Measuring cell ≤ (0.15 • r) % per nominal pressure
Measuring cell ≤ (0.1 • r) % per nominal pressure
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
Measuring cell
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
• On the measuring span ≤ (0.1 • r) % per nominal pressure
Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F) in 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r) %

static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/1015 psi
Step response time T63 without electrical Approx. 0.2 s
damping
Effect of mounting position depending on the fill fluid in the mounting flange

Technical data
11.6 Measuring accuracy of SITRANS P410
Level measuring accuracy

0.005 % per 1 V
Measured value resolution for PROFIBUS 3 • 10-5 of the nominal measuring range
PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Down)
1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045) %

4 bar400 kPa/58 psi
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
• 1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi ≤ (0.05 • r + 0.1) %
• 4 bar/400 kPa/58 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125) %
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi

Long-term stability at ±30 °C (±54 °F)
• 1 bar/100 kPa/14.5 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r) %

• 16 bar/1.6 MPa/232 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.125 • r) %
160 bar/16 MPa/2321 psi
Step response time T63 (without elec- Approx. 0.15 s
trical damping)
Effect of mounting position ≤ 0.05 mbar/0.005 kPa/0.02 inH2O per 10° incline

Technical data

0.005 % per 1 V
Fieldbus

Measuring span ratio r (spread, r = max. measuring span/set measuring span and nominal measuring range
Turn-Down)
Conformity error at limit point set-
ting, including hysteresis and re-
peatability
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045) %

1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Flow > 50 % r≤5 5 < r ≤ 30
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.04% ≤ (0.004 • r + 0.045) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Flow 25 ... 50% r≤5 5 < r ≤ 30
250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.08% ≤ (0.008 • r + 0.09) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
• 250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.025 • r + 0.125) %
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi

Technical data
11.7 Operating conditions

250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ (0.1 • r) % per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error compen-
600 mbar/60 kPa/8.70 psi sation)
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi ≤ (0.2 • r) % per 70 bar (zero-point correction is possible with position error compen-
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi sation)
• On the measuring span

250 mbar/25 kPa/3.63 psi ≤ 0.14 % per 70 bar
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
Long-term stability at ±30 °C Static pressure max. 70 bar/7 MPa/1015 psi
(±54 °F)
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
• 30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi In 5 years ≤ (0.25 • r) %
Step response time T63 without

electrical damping
1600 mbar/160 kPa/23.21 psi
5 bar/500 kPa/72.52 psi
30 bar/3 MPa/435.11 psi
≤ 0.7 mbar/0.07 kPa/0.001015 psi per 10° incline
0.005 % per 1 V
Fieldbus
Rated conditions for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
Installation conditions
Ambient conditions

Technical data
Rated conditions for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
• Ambient temperature
Note Observe the temperature class in hazardous areas.
Measuring cell with silicone oil -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
filling
Measuring cell with inert liquid -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
Measuring cell with inert filling -40 ... +85°C (-40...+185°F)
liquid for relative pressure
measuring cells 1, 4, 16 and 63
bar
Display -30 … +85 °C (-22 … +185 °F)
Storage temperature -50 … +85 °C (-58 … +185 °F)
• Climate class
Condensation Permitted
• Degree of protection in accord- IP66, IP68
ance with EN 60529
• Degree of protection in accord- NEMA 4X

ance with NEMA 250
• Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference emission and inter- In accordance with EN 61326 and NAMUR NE 21
ference immunity
Process medium conditions
• Process temperature
filling
With extension to Zone 0 -20 … +60 °C (-4 … +140 °F)
Conditions of use for gauge pressure and absolute pressure with flush-mounted diaphragm
Ambient temperature
• Measuring cell with silicone oil -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
filling
• Measuring cell with inert liquid -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
• Measuring cell with Neobee -10 … +85 °C (14 … 185 °F)

(FDA-compliant)
• Display -30 … +85 °C (-22 … +185 °F)
• Storage temperature -50 … +85 °C (-58 … +185 °F)

(with Neobee: -20 ... + 85 °C (-4 ... +185 °F))
(with high-temperature oil: -10 ... + 85 °C (14 ... 185 °F))

Technical data
Conditions of use for gauge pressure and absolute pressure with flush-mounted diaphragm
Climate class
ance with EN 60 529

ance with NEMA 250
Electromagnetic compatibility
• Interference emission and inter- In accordance with EN 61326 and NAMUR NE 21
ference immunity
Process temperature1)
• Measuring cell with silicone oil -40 … +150°C (-40 … +302 °F)
filling -40 … +200°C (-40 … +392 °F) with cooling extension
• Measuring cell with inert liquid -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
-20 … +200°C (-4 … +392 °F) with cooling extension
• Measuring cell with Neobee -10 … +150°C (14 … 302 °F)
(FDA-compliant) -10 … +200°C (14 … 392 °F) with cooling extension
• Measuring cell with high- -10 ... +250 °C (14 ... 482 °F) with cooling extension
temperature oil filling
1) Observe the temperature limits in the process connection standards (e.g. DIN 32676 and DIN 11851) for the maximum
process temperature for flush-mounted process connections.
Conditions of use for pressure transmitter with PMC connection

Ambient temperature
• Measuring cell with silicone oil -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
filling
• Display -30 … +85 °C (-22 … +185 °F)
• Storage temperature -50 … +85 °C (-58 … +185 °F)
Climate class
ance with EN 60529

ance with NEMA 250
Electromagnetic compatibility
• Interference emission and inter- In accordance with EN 61326 and NAMUR NE 21
ference immunity

Technical data
Conditions of use for pressure transmitter with PMC connection

• Process temperature -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
Rated conditions for absolute pressure (from the differential pressure series), differential pressure and flow rate
• Installation instruction any
Ambient conditions
filling
• Measuring cell • -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
30 bar (435 psi) • For flow: -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
Display -30 … +85 °C (-22 … +185 °F)
• Climate class
ance with EN 60529

ance with NEMA 250
ference immunity
filling
• Measuring cell -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
30 bar (435 psi)
• Measuring cell -20 … +85 °C (-4 … +185 °F)
30 bar (435 psi)
In conjunction with dust explo- -20 … +60°C (-4 … +140°F)
sion protection

Technical data
11.8 Construction
Rated conditions for level

• Installation instruction specified through the flange
Ambient conditions
Note Observe the allocation of the max. permissible operating temperature to the max.
permissible operating pressure of the relevant flange connection.
filling
Display -30 … +85 °C (-22 … +185 °F)
• Climate class
• Degree of protection in accord- IP66
ance with EN 60529

ance with NEMA 250
ference immunity
Measuring cell with silicone oil • Plus side: See mounting flange
filling
• Low-pressure side: -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F)
11.8 Construction
Construction for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
Weight Approx. 1.5 kg (3.3 lb) for aluminum enclosure
Material
• Wetted parts materials
Process connection Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L or Hastelloy C4, mat. no. 2.4610
Oval flange Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, material no. 1.4404/316L or Hastelloy C276, material no. 2.4819
• Non-wetted parts materials

Technical data
11.8 Construction
Construction for gauge pressure and absolute pressure (from the gauge pressure series)
Electronics housing • Copper-free die cast aluminum GD-AlSi 12 or stainless steel precision casting,
mat. no. 1.4408
• Standard: Powder coating with polyurethane
Option: 2 coats: Coat 1: epoxy-based; coat 2: polyurethane
• Stainless steel nameplate
Mounting bracket Steel or stainless steel
Measuring cell filling • Silicone oil
• Neobee M20
• Inert liquid
(max. 120 bar g (2320 psi g) for oxygen measurement)
Process connection G1/2B connection pin in accordance with DIN EN 837-1; female thread 1/2-14 NPT
or oval flange (PN 160 (MAWP 2320 psi g)) with M10 fastening screw thread in
accordance with DIN 19213 or 7/16-20 UNF in accordance with EN 61518. Male
thread M20 x 1.5 and 1/2-14 NPT
Electrical connection Cable inlet using the following cable glands:
• Pg 13.5
• M20 x 1.5 and ½-14 NPT or Han 7D/Han 8D connector1)
– Cable diameter: 6 to 12 mm; types of protection "nA" and "ic" (Zone 2): 8 to
12 mm or a suitable cable gland for smaller diameters
• M12 connector
Torque for cable gland nut made of Plastic Metal Stainless steel
2.5 Nm (1.8 ft lb) 4.2 Nm (3.1 ft lb) 4.2 Nm (3.1 ft lb)
Degree of protection for Han and IP65
M12 connectors
1) Han 8D is identical to Han 8U.
Construction for gauge pressure, with flush mounted diaphragm

Weight Approx 1.5 … 13.5 kg (3.3 … 30 lb) with aluminum enclosure
Material
Process connection Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
Electronics housing • Non-copper aluminum die casting GD-AlSi 12 or stainless steel precision cast-
ing, mat. no. 1.4408

Technical data
11.8 Construction
Construction for gauge pressure, with flush mounted diaphragm

• Neobee M20
• Inert liquid
Process connection • Flanges as per EN and ASME
• F&B and Pharma flange, clamp and threaded connectors
• NEUMO BioConnect/BioControl
• PMC connections for the paper industry
• Pg 13.5
• M20x1.5
• ½-14 NPT
• Han 7D/Han 8D plug1)
• M12 connector
M12 connectors
Construction of pressure transmitter with PMC connection

Material
Gasket (standard) PTFE flat gasket
O-ring (minibolt) • FPM (Viton)
• FFPM or NBR (optional)
Seal diaphragm Hastelloy C276, mat. No. 2.4819
• Inert liquid
Process connection

Technical data
11.8 Construction
Construction of pressure transmitter with PMC connection

• Standard • Flush mounted
• 11/2''
• PMC Standard design
• Minibolt • Flush mounted

• 1''
• PMC Minibolt design
• Pg 13.5
• M20 x 1.5
• ½-14 NPT
• Han 7D/Han 8D plug1)
• M12 connector
M12 connectors
Design for absolute pressure (from the differential pressure series), differential pressure and flow rate
Material
Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L, Hastelloy C276, mat. no. 2.4819, Monel,
mat. no. 2.4360, tantalum or gold
Pressure caps and locking screw Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4408 to PN 160, mat. no. 1.4571/316Ti for PN 420,
Hastelloy C4, 2.4610 or Monel, mat. no. 2.4360
O-ring FPM (Viton) or optionally: PTFE, FEP, FEPM and NBR
Pressure cap screws Stainless steel
• Neobee M20
• Inert liquid
(max. 120 bar g (2320 psi g) for oxygen measurement)

Technical data
11.8 Construction
Design for absolute pressure (from the differential pressure series), differential pressure and flow rate
Process connection 1/4-18 NPT female thread and flat connection with 7/16-20 UNF fastening screw
thread in accordance with EN 61518 or M10 fastening screw thread in accordance

with DIN 19213 (M12 for PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi))
Electrical connection Screw terminals
Cable inlet using the following cable glands:
• Pg 13.5
• M20 x 1.5
• ½-14 NPT or Han 7D/Han 8D connector1)
• M12 connector
M12 connectors
Construction for level

Weight
• as per EN (pressure transmitter approx 11 … 13 kg (24.2 … 28.7 lb)
with mounting flange, without
tube)
• as per ASME (pressure transmit- approx 11 … 18 kg (24.2 … 39.7 lb)

ter with mounting flange, without
tube)
Material
Plus side
• Seal diaphragm on the Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L, Monel 400, mat. no. 2.4360, Hastelloy B2,
mounting flange mat. no. 2.4617, Hastelloy C276, mat. no. 2.4819, Hastelloy C4, mat. no. 2.4610,
tantalum, PTFE, ECTFE
• Sealing surface smooth as per EN 1092-1, form B1 or ASME B16.5 RF 125 … 250 AA for stainless
steel 316L, EN 2092-1 form B2 or ASME B16.5 RFSF for the remaining materials
Sealing material in the pressure
caps
• for standard applications Viton
• for underpressure applica- Copper

tions on the mounting flange
Minus side
• Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4404/316L
• Pressure caps and locking Stainless steel, mat. no. 1.4408

screws

Technical data
11.9 Display, keyboard and auxiliary power
Construction for level

• O-ring FPM (Viton)

Pressure cap screws Stainless steel
Measuring cell filling Silicone oil
• Mounting flange fill fluid Silicon oil or a different design
Process connection
• Plus side Flange as per EN and ASME
1/4-18NPT female thread and flat connection with M10 fastening screw thread in
• Minus side
accordance with DIN 19213 (M12 for PN 420 (MAWP 6092 psi)) or 7/16-20 UNF in
accordance with EN 61518
Electrical connection Screw terminals
Cable inlet using the following cable glands:
• Pg 13.5
• M20 x 1.5
• ½-14 NPT or Han 7D/Han 8D connector1)
• M12 connector
M12 connectors
Display and user interface

Keys 3 for on-site programming directly at the device
Display • With or without integrated display (optional)
• Cover with inspection window (optional)

Technical data
Auxiliary power UH
HART PROFIBUS PA or Foundation Fieldbus
Terminal voltage on pressure transmit- • DC 10.5 V … 45 V –
ter
• In the case of intrinsically safe
operation 10.5 V … 30 V DC
Ripple USS ≤ 0.2 V (47 … 125 Hz) –
Noise Ueff ≤ 1.2 mV (0.5 … 10 kHz) –
Auxiliary power – Bus-powered
Separate supply voltage – Not necessary
Bus voltage
• Not – 9 … 32 V
• For intrinsically safe operation – 9 … 24 V
Current consumption
• Max. basic current – 12.5 mA
• Starting current ≤ basic current – Yes
• Max. current in event of fault – 15.5 mA
Error shut-down electronics (FDE) – Yes

present

Technical data
11.10 Certificates and approvals
11.10 Certificates and approvals

Fieldbus
Classification according to Pressure • for gases of Fluid Group 1 and liquids of Fluid Group 1; meets requirements of
Equipment Directive (PED 97/23/EC) Article 3 Para. 3 (good engineering practice)
• only for flow rate:
for gases of Fluid Group 1 and liquids of Fluid Group 1; fulfills the basic safety
requirements as per article 3, Para 1 (appendix 1); classified as category III,
module H conformity evaluation by TÜV Nord
Drinking water Available soon (for SITRANS P DSIII)
• Intrinsic safety "i"
Designation II 1/2 G Ex ia/ib IIC T4/T5/T6 Ga/Gb
Permissible ambient temperature -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F) temperature class T4
-40 … +70 °C (-40 … +158 °F) temperature class T5
Connection To a certified intrinsically safe circuit FISCO supply unit
with the max. values: U0 = 17.5 V, I0 = 380 mA, P0 = 5.32 W
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Linear barrier
Pi = 750 mW, Ri = 300 Ω U0 = 24 V, I0 = 174 mA, P0 = 1 W
Effective inner capacitance Ci = 6 nF Ci = 1.1 nF
Effective inner inductance Li = 0.4 mH Li = 7 µH
• Flameproof enclosure encapsula-
tion "d"
Designation II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T4, T6 Ga/Gb
Permissible ambient temperature -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F) temperature class T4
Connection To a circuit with the operating values: To a circuit with the operating values:
UH = 10.5 … 45 V DC UH = 9 … 32 V DC
• Dust explosion protection for Zone
20 and 20/21
Designation II 1 D Ex ta IIIC T120°C Da
II 1/2 D Ex ta/tb IIIC T120°C Da/Db
Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
max. surface temperature 120°C (248°F)
Connection To a certified intrinsically safe circuit FISCO supply unit
with the max. values: U0 = 17.5 V, I0 = 380 mA, P0 = 5.32 W
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Linear barrier
Pi = 750 mW, Ri = 300 Ω U0 = 24 V, I0 = 250 mA, P0 = 1.2 W

Technical data
11.11 HART communication

Fieldbus
• Dust explosion protection for Zone
22
Designation II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T120°C Db
Connection To a circuit with the operating values: To a circuit with the operating values:
UH = 10.5 … 45 V DC; Pmax = 1.2 W UH = DC 9 … 32 V; Pmax = 1.2 W
• Type of protection "n" (Zone 2)
Designation II 2/3 G Ex nA IIC T4/T5/T6 Gc
II 2/3 G Ex ic IIC T4/T5/T6 Gc
Connection "nA" Un = 45 V Um = 32 V
Connection "ic" To a circuit with the operating values: FISCO supply unit
Ui = 45 V UO =17.5 V, IO = 570 mA
Linear barrier
U0 = 32 V, I0 = 132 mA, P0 = 1 W
• Explosion protection in accordance Certificate of Compliance 3008490
with FM
Designation (XP/DIP) or IS; NI; S CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; CL I, ZN 0/1 AEx ia
IIC T4 ... T6; CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
Permissible ambient temperature Tamb = T4: -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
Tamb = T5: -40 ... +70 °C (-40 ... +158 °F)
Tamb = T6: -40 ... +60 °C (-40 ... +140 °F)
• Explosion protection as per CSA Certificate of Compliance 1153651
Designation (XP/DIP) or (IS) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; Ex ia IIC T4 ... T6:
CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD T4 ... T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
Permissible ambient temperature Tamb = T4: -40 ... +85 °C (-40 ... +185 °F)
Tamb = T5: -40 ... +70 °C (-40 ... +158 °F)
Tamb = T6: -40 ... +60 °C (-40 ... +140 °F)
HART communication
Load for a
• HART communicator connection 230 … 1100 Ω
• HART modem 230 … 500 Ω
Cable 2-wire, shielded: ≤ 3.0 km (1.86 miles), multi-

wired, shielded: ≤ 1.5 km (0.93 miles)
Protocol HART Version 5.x

Technical data
HART communication
PC/laptop requirements IBM-compatible, user memory > 32 MB, hard disk
> 70 MB, depending on the type of modem:
RS 232 interface or USB connection, VGA graph-
ic
Software for computer SIMATIC PDM

Dimension drawings 12
12.1 SITRANS P, DS III/P410 for gauge pressure and absolute pressure
from the gauge pressure series
① Electronics side, display

(longer for cover with inspection window)1)
② Connection side1)
③ Electrical connection:
• Pg 13.5 gland (adapter)2)3)
• M20 x 1.5 gland3)
• ½-14 NPT gland
• Han 7D/Han 8D plug2) 3)
④ Harting adapter
⑤ Protective cap of the operating buttons
⑥ Blanking plug
⑦ Safety catch
(only for flameproof encapsulation, not shown in the drawing)
⑧ Process connection: G½B connection pin or oval flange
⑨ Mounting bracket (optional)
1) Take an additional 20 mm (0.79 inches) thread length into account
2) Not with "flameproof enclosure" type of protection

Dimension drawings
12.1 SITRANS P, DS III/P410 for gauge pressure and absolute pressure from the gauge pressure series
3) Not for "FM + CSA [is + XP]" type of protection

4) For Pg 13.5 with adapter, approx 45 mm (1.77 inches)
5) Minimum distance for rotating
6) SITRANS P410 is only available as gauge pressure and differential pressure version.
Figure 12-1 Pressure transmitter SITRANS P DS III/P410 for absolute pressure, from the gauge pressure series,
dimensions in mm (inches)

Dimension drawings
12.2 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for differential pressure, flow rate and absolute pressure from the differential pressure series
12.2 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for differential pressure, flow rate and

absolute pressure from the differential pressure series

• M20 x 1.5 gland
• ½-14 NPT gland
• Han 7D/Han 8D plug2)3
④ Harting adapter
⑥ Blanking plug
⑦ Safety catch
(only for "flameproof enclosure" type of protection, not shown in the drawing)
⑧ Lateral ventilation for liquid measurement (standard)
⑨ Lateral ventilation for gas measurement (addition H02)
⑩ Mounting bracket (optional)
⑪ Sealing plug, with valve (optional)
⑫ Process connection: 1/4-18 NPT (EN 61518)

Dimension drawings
12.2 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for differential pressure, flow rate and absolute pressure from the differential
pressure series

3) Not for "FM + CSA [IS + XP]" type of protection
5) 92 mm (3.62 inch) minimum distance for rotating the pointer
Figure 12-2 Pressure transmitter SITRANS P DS III/P410 for differential pressure and flow rate, dimensions in mm
(inches)

Dimension drawings
12.2 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for differential pressure, flow rate and absolute pressure from the differential pressure series

② Connection end
• M20 x 1.5 gland
• ½-14 NPT gland
• Han 7D/Han 8D plug2)3
④ Harting adapter
⑥ Blanking plug
⑦ Safety catch
⑧ Sealing plug, with valve (optional)
⑨ Process connection: ¼-18 NPT (IEC 61518)
⑩ Clearance for rotating the enclosure
4) 92 mm (3.6 inch) minimum distance for rotating the pointer
5) 74 mm (2.9 inch) for PN ≥ 420 (MAWP ≥ 6092 psi)
8) For Pg 13.5 with adapter approx. 45 mm (1.77 inches)
Figure 12-3 Pressure transmitter SITRANS P DS III/P410 for differential pressure and flow rate with caps for vertical
differential pressure lines, dimensions in mm (inches)

Dimension drawings
12.3 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for level
12.3 SITRANS P DS III/P410 for level
① Electrical connection:
• M20 x 1.5 gland
• ½-14 NPT gland
• Han 7D/Han 8D plug2) 3)
② Protective cap of the operating buttons
③ Blanking plug
④ Safety catch
⑤ Connection side1)
⑥ Electronics side, display

Dimension drawings
12.4 SITRANS P DS III/P410 (flush mounted)
⑦ Locking screw with valve (option)

⑧ Harting adapter
⑨ Process connection: Minus side ¼-18 NPT (IEC 61518)
4) 92 mm (3.62 inches) minimum distance for rotating the enclosure with pointer
Figure 12-4 Pressure transmitter SITRANS P DS III/P410 for level, including mounting flange, dimensions in mm (inches)

• M20 x 1.5 gland
• ½-14 NPT gland
• M12 connector
④ Protective cap of the operating buttons
⑤ Blanking plug
⑥ Safety catch
⑦ Process connection: see Flange table
1) In addition, allow approx. 20 mm (0.79 inch) for the thread length
2) 92 mm (3.6 inches) minimum distance for rotating the enclosure with display
Figure 12-5 SITRANS P DS III/P410 (flush mounted)

Dimension drawings
12.4.1 Note 3A and EHDG
Note
Approvals
The references to the approvals for "EHEDG" and "3A" refer to the respective process
connections and are not device-specific. Please refer to the technical specifications of the
respective pressure transmitter to see whether the desired certificate is available for your
device/flange combination.

Dimension drawings
12.4.2 Connections as per EN and ASME
Flange as per EN
EN 1092-1
DN PN ⊘D H2
25 40 115 mm (4.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
25 100 140 mm (5.5'')
40 40 150 mm (5.9'')
40 100 170 mm (6.7'')
50 16 165 mm (6.5'')
50 40 165 mm (6.5'')
80 16 200 mm (7.9'')
80 40 200 mm (7.9'')
Threaded connections
G3/4", G1" and G2" In accordance with DIN 3852

DN PN ⊘D H2
¾" 63 37 mm (1.5'') Approx. 45 mm (1.8'')
1" 63 48 mm (1.9'') Approx. 47 mm (1.9'')
2'' 63 78 mm (3.1'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
Flanges as per ASME
ASME B 16.5
DN CLASS ⊘D H2
1'' 150 110 mm (4.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
1'' 300 125 mm (4.9'')
1½'' 150 130 mm (5.1'')
1½'' 300 155 mm (6.1'')
2'' 150 150 mm (5.9'')
2'' 300 165 mm (6.5'')
3'' 150 190 mm (7.5'')
3'' 300 210 mm (8.1'')
4'' 150 230 mm (9.1'')
4'' 300 255 mm (10.0'')

Dimension drawings
12.4.3 F&B and pharma flange
Connections as per DIN
DIN 11851
DN PN ⊘D H2
50 25 92 mm (3.6'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
80 25 127 mm (5.0'')
DIN 11864-1 Form A - sterile threaded sockets

DN PN ⊘D H2
25 40 52 mm (2'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
40 40 65 mm (2.6'')
50 40 78 mm (3.1'')
100 40 130 mm (5.1'')
Approvals EHEDG
DIN 11864-2 Form A - sterile collar flange

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 94 mm (3.7'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 113 mm (4.4'')
80 16 133 mm (5.2'')
100 16 159 mm (6.3'')
Approvals EHEDG

Dimension drawings
DIN 11864-2 Form A - sterile groove flange

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 94 mm (3.7'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 113 mm (4.4'')
80 16 133 mm (5.2'')
100 16 159 mm (6.3'')
Approvals EHEDG
DIN 11864-3 Form A - sterile collar sockets

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 25 77.5 mm (3.1'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 25 91 mm (3.6'')
80 16 106 mm (4.2'')
100 16 130 mm (5.1'')
Approvals EHEDG

Dimension drawings
Tri-Clamp as per DIN 32676

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 64 mm (2.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 91 mm (3.6'')
Other connections
Varivent® connector
DN PN ⊘D H2
40-125 40 84 mm (3.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
Approvals EHEDG
Connection in accordance with DRD

DN PN ⊘D H2
65 40 105 mm (4.1'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')

Dimension drawings
BioConnectTM connectors
BioConnectTM screwed joint

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 82 mm (3.2'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 105 mm (4.1'')
80 16 115 mm (4.5'')
100 16 145 mm (5.7'')
2" 16 82 mm (3.2'')
2½" 16 105 mm (4.1'')
3" 16 105 mm (4.1'')
4" 16 145 mm (5.7'')
Approvals EHEDG
BioConnectTM flange connector

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 110 mm (4.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 140 mm (5.5'')
80 16 150 mm (5.9'')
100 16 175 mm (6.9'')
2" 16 100 mm (3.9'')
2½" 16 110 mm (4.3'')
3" 16 140 mm (5.5'')
4" 16 175 mm (6.9'')
Approvals EHEDG
BioConnectTM clamp connector

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 77.4 mm (3.0") Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 10 90.9 mm (3.6'')
80 10 106 mm (4.2'')
100 10 119 mm (4.7'')
2" 16 64 mm (2.5")
2½" 16 77.4 mm (3.0'')
3" 10 90.9 mm (3.6'')
4" 10 119 mm (4.7'')
Approvals EHEDG

Dimension drawings
Connect STM flanged joint

DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 125 mm (4.9'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 10 145 mm (5.7'')
80 10 155 mm (6.1'')
100 10 180 mm (7.1'')
2" 16 125 mm (4.9'')
2½" 10 135 mm (5.3'')
3" 10 145 mm (5.7'')
4" 10 180 mm (7.1'')
Approvals EHEDG
Other connections
BioControlTM connector
DN PN ⊘D H2
50 16 90 mm (3.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2'')
65 16 120 mm (4.7'')
Approvals EHEDG
12.4.4 PMC Style
Connections for the paper industry
PMC Style Standard

DN PN ⊘D H2
– – 40.9 mm (1.6'') Approx. 36.8 mm (1.4'')
M44x1.25 cap nut

Dimension drawings
PMC-Style Minibolt
DN PN ⊘D H2
– – 26.3 mm (1.0'') Approx. 33.1 mm (1.3'')
12.4.5 Special connections
Tank connection
TG52/50 and TG52/150

DN PN ⊘D H2
TG52/50
43.5 mm 10 63 mm (2.5'') Approx. 63 mm (2.5'')
TG52/150
43.5 mm 10 63 mm (2.5'') Approx. 170 mm (6.7'')
SMS connectors
SMS sockets with union nut

DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 84 mm (3.3'') Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 100 mm (3.9'')
3" 25 114 mm (4.5'')

Dimension drawings
SMS threaded sockets

DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 70 x 1/6 mm (2.8") Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 85 x 1/6 mm (3.3")
3" 25 98 x 1/6 mm (3.9")
IDF connectors
IDF sockets with union nut

DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 77 mm (3.0'') Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 91 mm (3.6'')
3" 25 106 mm (4.2'')
IDF threaded sockets

DN PN ⊘D H2
2" 25 64 mm (2.5'') Approx. 52 mm (2.1'')
2½" 25 77.5 mm (3.1'')
3" 25 91 mm (3.6'')

Spare parts/accessories 13
13.1 Order data
In order to ensure that the ordering data you are using is not outdated, the latest ordering
data is always available on the Internet:
Selection and order data Order no.

CD "sitrans p - pressure transmitters" with documentation in Ger- A5E00090345
man/English/French/Spanish/Italian, etc.
HART modem
• With USB interface 7MF4997-1DB1) D)
Weld-in support for PMC connection

For Series SITRANS P DS III and SITRANS P300
• PMC Style Standard: Thread 1½" 7MF4997-2HA
• PMC-Style Minibolt: flush mounted 1" 7MF4997-2HB
Gaskets for PMC connection, (1 set = 5 pieces)

• PTFE gasket for PMC Style Standard: Thread 1½" 7MF4997-2HC
• Viton gasket for PMC Style Minibolt: flush mounted 1" 7MF4997-2HD
Weld-in adapter for PMC connection

For connection of weld-in support delay during welding for:
• PMC Style Standard: Thread 1½" 7MF4997-2HE
• PMC-Style Minibolt: flush mounted 1" 7MF4997-2HF
1) Available from stock

D) Subject to export regulations AL: N, ECCN, EAR99H

Mounting bracket and fastening parts
For SITRANS P DS III, DS III PA and DS III FF
For gauge pressure transmitter (7MF403.-.....-..C.)
For absolute pressure transmitter (7MF423.-.....-..C.)
• Made of steel 7MF4997-1AB
• Made of stainless steel 7MF4997-1AH

For gauge pressure transmitter (7MF403.-.....-..A., -..B. and -..D.)

Spare parts/accessories
13.1 Order data

For absolute pressure transmitter (7MF423.-.....-..A., -..B. and -..D.)
• Made of steel 7MF4997-1AC
• Made of stainless steel 7MF4997-1AJ

Differential pressure transmitter with flange thread
• Made of steel
For thread M10 (7MF433.-... and 7MF443.-...) 7MF4997-1AD
For thread M12 (7MF453.-...) 7MF4997-1AE
• Made of stainless steel
For thread M10 (7MF433.-... and 7MF443.-...) 7MF4997-1AK
For thread M12 (7MF453.-...) 7MF4997-1AL
Differential and absolute pressure transmitter with
flange thread 7/16-20 UNF
(7MF433.-..., 7MF443.-... and 7MF453.-...)
• Made of steel 7MF4997-1AF
• Made of stainless steel 7MF4997-1AM
Cover
• Made of aluminum die casting, including gasket
Without inspection window 7MF4997-1BB
With inspection window 7MF4997-1BE
• Made of stainless steel, including gasket
Without inspection window 7MF4997-1BC
With inspection window 7MF4997-1BF
Digital display
Including the fastening material 7MF4997-1BR
Measuring point label
• not labeled (five pieces) 7MF4997-1CA
• labeled (1 unit) 7MF4997-1CB-Z

Specifications as per Y01 or Y02, Y15 and Y16 Y..: ................
(refer to SITRANS P pressure transmitter)
Fastening screws, 50 pieces for: 7MF4997-1CD
• Measuring point label
• Earthing and connecting terminals
• Digital display
Locking screws, (1 set = 2 pieces) for pressure cap

13.2 Order data for SIMATIC PDM

• Made of stainless steel 7MF4997-1CG
• Made of Hastelloy 7MF4997-1CH
Vent valves, complete (1 set = 2 pieces)

• Made of stainless steel 7MF4997-1CP
• Made of Hastelloy 7MF4997-1CQ
Electronics
• For SITRANS P DS III 7MF4997-1DK
• For SITRANS P DS III PA 7MF4997-1DL
• For SITRANS P DS III FF 7MF4997-1DM
Network card
• For SITRANS P DS III 7MF4997-1DN
• For SITRANS P DS III PA and DS III FF 7MF4997-1DP
Sealing rings for pressure caps made of

• FPM (Viton) 7MF4997-2DA
• PTFE (Teflon) 7MF4997-2DB
• FEP (with silicon core, suitable for food) 7MF4997-2DC
• FFPM (Kalrez, Compound 4079) 7MF4997-2DD
• NBR (Buna N) 7MF4997-2DE

You can find ordering data in the Catalog FI 01 "Field devices for process automation in the
Chapter "Communication and software > Software > SIMATIC PDM - Process Device
Manager".


Appendix A
A.1 Certificate
The certificates can be found on the enclosed CD and on the Internet under:
Certificates (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/certificates)
A.2 Literature and standards
No. Standard Description

/1/ IEC 61508 Functional safety of following systems:
Section 1-7 • Safety-instrumented
• Electrical
• Electronic
• Programmable
Target group:
Manufacturers and suppliers of equipment
/2/ IEC 61511 Functional safety - Safety systems for the process industry
Section 1-3 Target group:
Planners, constructors and users
A.3 Literature and catalogs
Table A- 1
No. Title Publisher Order no.

/1/ Catalog ST 70 Siemens AG E86060-K4670-A111
Components for Totally
Integrated Automation
/2/ Catalog ST 80 Siemens AG E86060-K4680-A101
SIMATIC Human Machine
Interface Systems
/3/ FIELDBUS ONLINE Fieldbus Foundation www.fieldbus.org
Information about
FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus
See also
IK PI Catalog (http://www.automation.siemens.com/net/html_76/support/printkatalog.htm)

Appendix
A.4 Overview of HART operating structure

The following overview applies to the HART communicator operating structure.

Appendix

Appendix

Appendix
A.5 Technical support
Technical Support
If this documentation does not provide complete answers to any technical questions you may
have, contact Technical Support at:
● Support request (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)
● More information about our Technical Support is available at
Technical support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/service)
Internet Service & Support

In addition to our documentation, Siemens provides a comprehensive support solution at:
● Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) where you will
find support news, support documents including EDDs and software, and also support
from experts.
Additional Support
If you have additional questions about the device, please contact your local Siemens
representative.
Find your local contact partner at:
● Partner (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner)
Documentation for various products and systems is available at:
● Instructions and manuals
(http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/documentation)
See also
E-mail (mailto:support.automation@siemens.com)

Appendix

List of abbreviations B
List of abbreviations
Table B- 1 Units
Abbreviation In full Meaning

bar a bar absolute Pressure unit for absolute pressure
bar g bar gauge Pressure unit for gauge pressure
inH20 a inches of water absolute Pressure unit for absolute pressure
inH20 g inches of water gauge Pressure unit for gauge pressure
lb Pound Unit of weight
psi a psi absolute Pressure unit for absolute pressure
psi g psi gauge Pressure unit for gauge pressure
Pa a Pascal absolute Pressure unit for absolute pressure
Pa g Pascal gauge Pressure unit for gauge pressure
Table B- 2 Other abbreviations
Abbreviation In full Meaning

PED Pressure Equipment Directive
HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer Standardized protocol for transmission of information between field
device and automation system.
LRL Engl.: Lower Range Limit Lower end of the measuring range
LRV Engl.: Lower Range Value Lower end of the set measuring span
MA Start of scale value Lower end of the set measuring span
ME Full scale value Upper end of the set measuring span
MAWP Engl.: Maximum Allowable Working Pressure Maximum permissible operating pressure
(PS)
NFPA National Fire Protection Association US - American Fire Protection Organization
F&B Food and beverage industry
PDM Engl.: Process Device Manager Tool for communication with HART devices (manufacturer: Sie-
mens)
URL Engl.: Upper Range Limit Upper end of the measuring range
URV Engl.: Upper Range Value Upper end of the set measuring span

List of abbreviations
Abbreviation Full term in English Meaning

FIT Failure in Time Frequency of failure
Number of faults within 109 hours
HFT Hardware Fault Tolerance Hardware fault tolerance:
Capability of a function unit to continue executing a required
function in the presence of faults or deviations.
MooN "M out of N" voting Classification and description of the safety-instrumented system
in terms of redundancy and the selection procedures used.
A safety-instrumented system or part that consists of "N" inde-
pendent channels. The channels are connected to each other in
such a way that "M" channels are in each case sufficient for the
device to perform the safety instrumented function.
Example:
Pressure measurement: 1oo2 architecture. A safety-
instrumented system decides that a specified pressure limit has
been exceeded if one out of two pressure sensors reaches this
limit. In a 1oo1 architecture, there is only one pressure sensor.
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures Average period between two failures
MTTR Mean Time To Restoration Average period between the occurrence of a fault in a device or
system and restoration of functionality
PFD Probability of Dangerous Failure on Probability of dangerous failures of a safety function on demand
Demand
PFDAVG Average Probability of Dangerous Average probability of dangerous failures of a safety function on
Failure on Demand demand
SFF Safe Failure Fraction Proportion of safe failures:
Proportion of failures without the potential to bring the safety-
instrumented system into a dangerous or non-permissible func-
tional status.
SIL Safety Integrity Level The international standard IEC 61508 defines four discrete
Safety Integrity Levels (SIL 1 to SIL 4). Each level corresponds
to a range of probability for failure of a safety function. The
higher the Safety Integrity Level of the safety-instrumented
system, the lower the probability that it will not execute the
required safety functions.
SIS Safety Instrumented System A safety-instrumented system (SIS) executes the safety func-
tions that are required to achieve or maintain a safe status in a
system. It consists of sensors, logic unit/control system and final
controlling elements.

Glossary
ATEX
ATEX is an abbreviation of the French term "Atmosphère explosible" (potentially explosive
atmosphere). ATEX stands for both EC directives in the area of explosion protection: ATEX
product directive 94/9/EC and ATEX operating directive 1999/92/EC.
Auxiliary power supply

Auxiliary power supply refers to an electrical supply or reference voltage which some
electrical circuits require apart from the standard supply. The auxiliary power supply can, for
example, be specially stabilized, have a particular level or polarity and/or other properties
which are important for the correct functioning of switch components.
Auxiliary voltage
→ Auxiliary power supply
Dangerous failure
Failure with the potential to switch a safety-instrumented system to a hazardous or non-
functioning safety state.
EEPROM
EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory): a non-volatile,
electronic memory module.
EEPROMs are often used where individual bytes of data (e.g. configuration data or runtime
meters) change over time and must be stored safely in the event of a mains power failure.
Failure/Fault/Error
Failure:
A resource is no longer capable of executing a required function.
Fault/Error:
Undesired state of a resource indicated by its incapability of executing a required function.
Fault/Error
→ Failure/Fault/Error

Glossary
Final controlling element

Converter that converts electrical signals into mechanical or other non-electric variables.
Firmware
Firmware (FW) is software that is embedded on a chip in electronic devices – in contrast to
software which is saved on hard disks, CD-ROMs or other media. These days, firmware is
mostly stored in a flash memory or EEPROM.
Firmware usually contains the elementary functions for controlling the device, as well as
input and output routines.
Frequency shift keying

Frequency shift keying is a simple form of modulation, where the digital values 0 and 1
modulate the actual current signal by means of two different frequencies.
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)

→ Frequency shift keying
HART
HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) is a standardized, widely used
communications system used to structure industrial fieldbusses. The communications
system provides digital communications for multiple participants (field devices) via a
common databus. HART is based especially on the equally widely used 4/20 mA standard
for the transfer of analog sensor signals. The cabling from existing older systems can be
used directly and both systems operated in parallel.
HART specifies several protocol levels in the OSI model. It facilitates the transfer of process
and diagnostics data and control signals between field devices and high-level control
systems. Standardized parameter sets can be used for the manufacture-independent
operation of all HART devices.
Typical applications include transmitters for measuring mechanical and electrical
dimensions.
MAWP (PS)
Maximum Allowable Working Preassure (PS)
Non-volatile memory
→ EEPROM
Risk
Combination of the probability of damage occurring and the extent of the damage.

Glossary
Safety function
Defined function executed by a safety-instrumented system with the objective of attaining or
maintaining a safe system state by taking a defined hazardous incident into account.
Example:
Limit pressure monitoring
Safety Integrity Level

→ SIL
Safety-instrumented system
A safety-instrumented system (SIS) executes the safety functions that are required to
achieve or maintain a safe state in a system. It consists of a sensor, logic unit/control system
and final controlling element.
Example:
A safety-instrumented system is made up of a pressure transmitter, a limit signal sensor and
a control valve.
Sensor
Converter that converts mechanical or other non-electric variables into electrical signals.
SIL
The international standard IEC 61508 defines four discrete safety integrity levels (SIL) from
SIL 1 to SIL 4. Each level corresponds to a probability range for the failure of a safety
function. The higher the SIL of the safety-instrumented system, the higher the probability that
the required safety function will work.
The SIL which can be achieved is determined by the following safety-instrumented
characteristics:
● Average probability of failure on demand (PFDAVG)
● Hardware fault tolerance (HFT)
● Safe failure fraction (SFF)
srli2
→ srlin2
srlin2
"srli2" or "srlin2" is a type of square root extracting characteristic curve for the output current.
This characteristic curve type is proportional to the flow rate, linear in two levels up to the
application point and has a pre-defined application point of 10%.

Glossary
"srli2" or "srlin2" are synonymous and technically there is no difference between them. The
abbreviation "srli2" is used in sections that refer to the on-site operation of the pressure
transmitter. The reason for the abbreviation is that the pressure transmitter display is
restricted to five characters. The abbreviation "srlin2" is used for HART operation.

Index
Configuration data, 134, 134

Connector
3 M12, 67
Constant current operation, 94, 126
3A, 226
Correct usage, (See improper device modifications)
Current limit, 127
Current simulator, 94
A
Current transmitter, 126
Acknowledgement, 138 Customer Support Hotline, 243
Additional Support, 243
Ambient temperature, 206, 206, 207, 208, 209
Effect, 195, 196, 197, 198, 198, 200, 202, 203, 204 D
Analog output, 122
Device
Analog output block, 122
Electrostatic-sensitive, 18, 178
Analog output stage, 109
Device variable, 77, 118
Appendix, 239
DV, 110
Approval
Diagnostic interrupt, 126, 137
3A, 226
Diagnostic warning, 137
EHEDG, 226
Differential pressure, 20, 21, 98, 136
Approval plate, (Layout of nameplate with approval
Direct sunlight, 41
information)
Display of unit, 74
Arrow display, 76
Downscaling, 82, 82
DV
Device variable, 110
B
Dynamic variable (DV), 109
Bar graph, 131
Blind adjustment, 125
Bridge output voltage, 29, 30, 31 E
button and function lock
EHEDG, 226
Activate, 153
Electrical damping, 126
Electromagnetic compatibility, 206, 207, 207, 208, 209
Electronics, 153
C
Electrostatic-sensitive device (ESD), 18, 178
Calibration EMC, 206, 207, 207, 208, 209
Current simulator, 132 Error display, 75
Calibration interval, 138
Calibration timer, 137
Certificate, 239 F
Certificates, 15
Factory calibration, 134
Certification, 239
Failure current, 126
Characteristic curve
Fast recording of measured values, 126
lin, 98
Fast Response Mode, 126
srlin, 98
Filling liquid, 29, 31, 32
srlin2, 98
Firmware, 12
sroff, 98
Flange, 31, 47
Characteristics
Full scale value
Safety, 152
Set, 81, 81

Index
Function chart, 33 Differential pressure and flow rate, 30

Gauge pressure, 29
Level, 31
H Measuring mode, 81, 81, 108, 110, 114
Measuring mode selector, 109, 110
Han plug, 66
Message
HART
OVER, 77
Modem, 19
UNDER, 77
HART communicator, 107
Mounting bracket, 44
Hazardous area
Mounting flange, 31
Laws and directives, 15
MTTR, 152
History, 11
multi-channel operation, 148
Hotline, 243
MWP, (See MAWP)
I N
Improper device modifications, 16
Nameplate, 23
Input scaling, 112, 114, 117
Install
Remote seal, 51
O
Installation, 43, 43, 44
Internet, 243 Operating structure, 240
Operation
Local, 81
K Output scaling, 112, 115, 118
Output scaling, 112, 115, 118
Keyboard lock, 96
P
L
Pairs of min/max pointer, 138
L (level), 113
Pairs of values, 115, 117
Layout of nameplate with general information, 23
Plug
LCD scaling, 123
Han, 66
Level, 21
Position correction, 93, 93
Limit monitor, 143
Pressure simulation, 142
lin, 98, 136
Pressure unit, 130
Load, 194
Primary variable, 77, 101
Process connection, 22
Proof test, 152
M
PV
M12 connector, 67 Primary variable, 101, 110
MA PV
Start of scale value, 110 Primary variable, 101, 110
Mapper, 109, (See also:Variable mapper)
Mass, 111, 113
MAWP, 245 Q
ME
Qualified personnel, 17
Full scale value, 110
QV
Measured value display, 81, 102
Quarternary variable, 110
Measured value status, 119
Measuring cell
Absolute pressure, 33

Index
R V
Ramp function, 141, 143 Variable mapper, 109, 109
Remote seal Vent valve, 135, 171, 173
Description, 35 Volume, 113
Install, 51
Maintenance, 181
Response time, 139 W
Root application point, 99, 114
Write protection, 96, 153
S Z
Safety
Zero point calibration, 93, 93
Checking, 152
Zero-point calibration, 125
Safety function, 147
safety-relevant
Parameter, 151
Saturation limit, 127
Scope of delivery, 13
Sensor trim, 131
Service, 243
Service timer, 137
Shut-off valve, 166, 168, 171, 172, 173
Signal range, 77
SIL 3, 148
Simulation, 138, 141
Span, 82, 82
srlin, 98, 136
srlin2, 98, 136
sroff, 98, 136
Stabilizing valve, 169, 169, 171, 173
Start of scale value
Set, 81, 81
Stop time, 139
Structure, 21
Support, 243
SV
Secondary variable, 110
T
Tank connection, 233
Test certificates, 15
Trim
Sensor, 131
Trimming
lower trim point, 132
upper trim point, 132
Turning range, 58
TV
Tertiary variable, 110

SITRANS P DS III Introduction 1
___________________
2
___________________
Safety notes
3
___________________
Description
SITRANS
___________________
Connecting 4
Pressure transmitter
SITRANS P DS III ___________________
Maintenance and servicing 5
___________________
Technical specifications 6
Service Manual
Ordering data for spare
___________________
parts/accessories 7
___________________
Appendix A
7MF4.33.. 7MF4.34.. 7MF4.35..
06/2014
A5E34219855-01
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Order number: A5E34219855 Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 06/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 Purpose of this documentation ...................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Product information ........................................................................................................................ 7
1.3 History ............................................................................................................................................ 7
1.4 Checking the consignment ............................................................................................................. 8
1.5 Purpose .......................................................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Checking the compatibility of the application electronics .............................................................. 9
1.7 Transportation and storage ..........................................................................................................11
1.8 Notes on warranty ........................................................................................................................12
2 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................................... 15
2.1 Precondition for use .....................................................................................................................15
2.1.1 Laws and directives .....................................................................................................................15
2.1.2 Conformity with European directives ...........................................................................................15
2.2 Improper device modifications .....................................................................................................15
2.3 Use in hazardous areas ...............................................................................................................16
3 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 19
3.1 Structure .......................................................................................................................................19
3.2 Nameplate layout .........................................................................................................................20
3.3 Measuring point label layout ........................................................................................................21
4 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 23
4.1 Basic safety instructions ..............................................................................................................23
4.2 Connecting the device .................................................................................................................26
5 Maintenance and servicing .................................................................................................................... 29
5.1 Basic safety instructions ..............................................................................................................29
5.2 Defining the maintenance interval................................................................................................32
5.3 Checking the gaskets ...................................................................................................................33
5.4 Display in case of a fault ..............................................................................................................34
5.5 Changing the measuring cell and application electronics ............................................................34
5.6 User data following replacement..................................................................................................35
5.7 Replacing parts ............................................................................................................................40
5.7.1 Guarantee information .................................................................................................................40
5.7.2 Exploded view of the device ........................................................................................................40
5.7.3 Replacing the connection board ..................................................................................................41
SITRANS P DS III
Service Manual, 06/2014, A5E34219855-01 5
Table of contents
5.7.4 Replacing the pushbutton module .............................................................................................. 43

5.7.5 Replacing the display .................................................................................................................. 45
5.7.6 Replacing the application electronics .......................................................................................... 47
5.7.7 Replacing the measuring cell ...................................................................................................... 49
5.8 Cleaning ...................................................................................................................................... 51
5.8.1 Servicing the remote seal measuring system ............................................................................. 52
5.9 Return procedure ........................................................................................................................ 53
5.10 Disposal....................................................................................................................................... 54
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 55
7 Ordering data for spare parts/accessories ............................................................................................. 57
A Appendix .............................................................................................................................................. 65
A.1 Certificate .................................................................................................................................... 65
A.2 Technical support ........................................................................................................................ 65
A.3 Repair report for installation of spare parts ................................................................................. 67
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 69
Index .................................................................................................................................................... 73
SITRANS P DS III
6 Service Manual, 06/2014, A5E34219855-01
Introduction 1
1.1 Purpose of this documentation
These instructions contain all information that you will require to replace the application
electronics, measuring cell, and connection board of the device.
For information about the safe usage of the device, refer to the detailed version of these
instructions and corresponding safety instructions on the electronic data medium.
Read these instructions carefully before you start any service and maintenance work. In
order to use the device correctly, first make yourself acquainted with its principle of
operation.
Readership of these instructions are service and maintenance technicians.
1.2 Product information

The programming manual is an integral part of the CD, which is either supplied or can be
ordered. The programming manual is also available on the Siemens homepage.
On the CD, you will also find the catalog extract with the ordering data, the Software Device
Install for SIMATIC PDM for additional installation, and the required software.
See also
Catalog process instrumentation (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/catalogs)
1.3 History
This history establishes the correlation between the current documentation and the valid
firmware of the device.
The documentation of this edition applies to the following firmware:
Edition Firmware identifier nameplate System integration Installation path for PDM
06/2014 HART: SIMATIC PDM 8.x and SITRANS P DSIII.2
FW: 11.03.03, FW: 11.03.04, previous versions
FW: 11.03.05, FW: 11.03.06
PA: FW: 301.01.10
FF: FW: 11.01.01
SITRANS P DS III
Introduction

1. Check the packaging and the spare parts for visible damage caused by inappropriate
handling during shipping.
2. Report any claims for damages immediately to the shipping company.
3. Retain the damaged parts for clarification.
4. Check the scope of delivery by comparing your order with the shipping documents for
correctness and completeness.
WARNING
Using damaged or incomplete spare parts
• Do not use damaged or incomplete spare parts.
1.5 Purpose
Overview
Depending on the version, a transmitter measures corrosive, non-corrosive and hazardous
gases, vapors and liquids.
You can use the transmitter for the following types of measurement:
● Gauge pressure
● Differential pressure
With appropriate parameter settings and the necessary add-on parts (e.g. flow orifices and
remote seals), the pressure transmitter can also be used for the following measurements:
● Level
● Volume
● Mass
● Volume of flow
● Mass flow rate
The output signal is always a load-independent direct current between 4 and 20 mA.
You can install the "intrinsically-safe" or "explosion-proof" version of the transmitter in
hazardous areas. The devices have an EC type examination certificate and comply with the
appropriate harmonized European CENELEC directives.
Transmitters with remote seals of different shapes can be delivered for special applications.
For example, measuring high-viscosity substances is a special application.
SITRANS P DS III
Introduction
1.6 Checking the compatibility of the application electronics
Operate the device in accordance with the "Technical specifications" chapter in the operating
instructions.
For additional information, refer to the operating instructions for the device.

1. The table shown below indicates whether the new application electronics matches the
device.
2. Check the product version on the application electronics sticker.
3. Check the compatibility mark on the nameplate of the device.
Table 1- 1 The following table is valid for: SITRANS P DS III with HART (7MF4.33..)
Product version (ES) Compatibility mark Remark

007 to 025 K = 01 Replacement not possible
030 to 035 K = 01 Replacement possible
Table 1- 2 The following table is valid for:

SITRANS P DS III with PA (7MF4.34..) and SITRANS P DS III with FF (7MF4.35..)
Product version (ES) Compatibility mark Remark

001 to 015 K = 01 Replacement possible
SITRANS P DS III
Introduction
Example of application electronics for Example of application electronics for

SITRANS P DS III with PA and SITRANS P DS III with HART
FF
① Product version (ES)
① Compatibility mark
Figure 1-1 Compatibility mark on the nameplate
SITRANS P DS III
Introduction
Figure 1-2 Example of incrementing of product version and compatibility mark and their possible
combinations for future developments
See also
Nameplate layout (Page 20)

To guarantee sufficient protection during transport and storage, observe the following:
● Keep the original packaging for subsequent transportation.
● Devices/replacement parts should be returned in their original packaging.
● If the original packaging is no longer available, please ensure that all shipments are
sufficiently protected during transport by the replacement packaging. Siemens accepts no
liability for additional costs resulting from damage in transit.
CAUTION
Insufficient protection during storage
The packaging only provides limited protection against moisture and infiltration.
• Provide additional packaging as necessary.
Information on special conditions for storage and transportation of the device and spare
parts can be found in the "Technical specifications" chapter in the operating instructions.
SITRANS P DS III
Introduction

The contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing
agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The sales contract contains all obligations on
the part of Siemens as well as the complete and solely applicable warranty conditions. Any
statements regarding device versions described in the manual do not create new warranties
or modify the existing warranty.
The content reflects the technical status at the time of publishing. Siemens reserves the right
to make technical changes in the course of further development.
SITRANS P DS III
Introduction
SITRANS P DS III
Safety notes 2
2.1.1 Laws and directives

Observe the test certification, provisions and laws applicable in your country during
connection, assembly and operation. These include, for example:
● National Electrical Code (NEC - NFPA 70) (USA)
● Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) (Canada)
Further provisions for hazardous area applications are for example:
● IEC 60079-14 (international)
● EN 60079-14 (EC)
2.1.2 Conformity with European directives

The device complies with the European directives even following the use of replacement
parts.
2.2 Improper device modifications
WARNING
Improper device modifications
Danger to personnel, system and environment can result from modifications to the device,
particularly in hazardous areas.
• Only carry out modifications that are described in the instructions for the device. Failure
to observe this requirement cancels the manufacturer's warranty and the product
approvals.
SITRANS P DS III
Safety notes

Qualified personnel for hazardous area applications
Persons who install, connect, commission, operate, and service the device in a hazardous
area must have the following specific qualifications:
● They are authorized, trained or instructed in operating and maintaining devices and
systems according to the safety regulations for electrical circuits, high pressures,
aggressive, and hazardous media.
● They are authorized, trained, or instructed in carrying out work on electrical circuits for
hazardous systems.
● They are trained or instructed in maintenance and use of appropriate safety equipment
according to the pertinent safety regulations.
WARNING
Loss of the safety of the device with type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i"
If the device has already been operated in non-intrinsically safe circuits or the information
on the electrical specifications have been ignored, the safety of the device is no longer
ensured for use in hazardous areas. There is a danger of explosion.
• Connect the device in Intrinsic Safety type of protection solely to an intrinsically safe
circuit.
• Observe the information on the electrical specifications in the certificate and in the
"Technical specifications" chapter in the operating instructions.
WARNING
these parts.
SITRANS P DS III
Safety notes
WARNING
Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge
To prevent the build-up of an electrostatic charge in a hazardous area, the key cover must
be closed during operation and the screws tightened.
The key cover may be opened temporarily at any time for the purposes of operating the
pressure transmitter, even during plant operation; the screws should then be tightened
again.
SITRANS P DS III
Safety notes
SITRANS P DS III
Description 3
3.1 Structure
Depending on a customer-specific order, the device comprises different parts.
① Key cover ⑧ Cable inlet, optionally with cable gland

② Cover (front), optionally with inspection window ⑨ Cover (rear) for electrical terminal compartment
③ Display (optional) ⑩ Electrical terminal compartment
④ Measuring point label ⑪ Protective conductor connector/equipotential
bonding terminal
⑤ Retaining screw; twist proofing of the measuring cell ⑫ Nameplate (approval information)
in relation to the electronics enclosure
⑥ Process connection ⑬ Blanking plug
⑦ Nameplate (general information)
Figure 3-1 View of the transmitter: Left: Front right: Rear view
● The electronics enclosure is made of die cast aluminum or precision cast stainless steel.
● The housing has a removable circular cover at the front and the back.
● Depending on the device version, the front cover ② may be designed as an inspection
window. You can read the measured values straight off the digital display through this
inspection window.
● The cable inlet ⑧ to the electrical terminal compartment is at the side; either the left or
right-hand one can be used. The unused opening is closed with a blanking plug ⑬.
● The protective conductor terminal/equipotential bonding terminal ⑪ is located at the back
of the enclosure.
SITRANS P DS III
Description
● The electrical terminal compartment ⑩ for the auxiliary power and shield is accessible
when you remove the back cover ⑨.
● The measuring cell with a process connection ⑥ is located in the lower section of the
enclosure. This measuring cell is secured against twisting by a retaining screw ⑤.
Thanks to the modular design of the transmitter, the measuring cell and application
electronics or connection board can be replaced if required.
● On the upper face of the enclosure you can see crosshead screws which secure the key
cover ①, under which there are 3 keys for local operation.
Nameplate with general information

The nameplate bearing the Order No. and other important information, such as design
details and technical data, is on the side of the enclosure.
① Order number (machine-readable product ② Serial number

code)
Figure 3-2 Example of a nameplate
SITRANS P DS III
Description
Nameplate with approval information

On the opposite side is the nameplate with approval information. This nameplate shows e.g.
the hardware and firmware versions. You must also observe the information in the relevant
certificate for a transmitter version for use in hazardous areas.
Characteristics for hazardous area ⑤ Maximum surface temperature

① (temperature class)
② Category for operating area ⑥ Device protection level
③ Type of protection ⑦ Firmware identifier
④ Group (gas, dust) ⑧ Hardware identifier
Figure 3-3 Example of a nameplate
Figure 3-4 Example of measuring point label
SITRANS P DS III
Description
SITRANS P DS III
Connecting 4
WARNING
Unsuitable cables and/or cable glands
• Only use appropriate cables and cable glands complying with the requirements
specified in the "Technical specifications" chapter in the operating instructions.
• Tighten the cable glands in accordance with the torques specified in the "Technical
specifications" chapter in the operating instructions.
• When replacing cable glands, only use ones of the same type.
• After installation check that the cables are seated firmly.
WARNING
Hazardous contact voltage in versions with 4-conductor extension
Danger of electrocution in case of incorrect connection.
• Observe the instructions in the 4-conductor extension operating manual for the electrical
connection.
WARNING
Improper power supply
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas as result of incorrect power supply, e.g. using
direct current instead of alternating current.
• Connect the device in accordance with the specified power supply and signal circuits.
The relevant specifications can be found in the certificates, in the "Technical
specifications" chapter in the operating instructions, or on the nameplate.
WARNING
Unsafe extra-low voltage
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas due to voltage flashover.
• Connect the device to an extra-low voltage with safe isolation (SELV).
SITRANS P DS III
Connecting
WARNING
Lack of equipotential bonding
Danger of explosion through compensating currents or ignition currents through lack of
equipotential bonding.
• Ensure that the device is potentially equalized.
Exception: It may be permissible to omit connection of the equipotential bonding for devices
with type of protection "Intrinsic safety Ex i".
WARNING
Unprotected cable ends
Danger of explosion through unprotected cable ends in hazardous areas.
• Protect unused cable ends in accordance with IEC/EN 60079-14.
WARNING
Improper laying of shielded cables
Danger of explosion through compensating currents between hazardous area and the non-
hazardous area.
• Only ground shielded cables that run into the hazardous area at one end.
• If grounding is required at both ends, use an equipotential bonding conductor.
WARNING
Connecting device in energized state
• Connect devices in hazardous areas only in a de-energized state.
Exceptions:
• Circuits of limited energy may also be connected in the energized state in hazardous
areas.
• Exceptions for type of protection "Non-sparking nA" (Zone 2) are regulated in the
relevant certificate
SITRANS P DS III
Connecting
WARNING
Incorrect selection of type of protection
This device is approved for several types of protection.
1. Decide in favor of one type of protection.
2. Connect the device in accordance with the selected type of protection.
3. In order to avoid incorrect use at a later point, make the types of protection that are not
used permanently unrecognizable on the nameplate.
NOTICE
Ambient temperature too high
Damage to cable sheath.
• At an ambient temperature ≥ 60 °C (140 °F), use heat-resistant cables suitable for an
ambient temperature at least 20 °C (68 °F) higher.
NOTICE
Incorrect measured values with incorrect grounding
The device must not be grounded via the "+" connection. It may otherwise malfunction and
be permanently damaged.
• If necessary, ground the device using the "-" connection.
Note
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
You can use this device in industrial environments, households and small businesses.
For metal housings there is an increased electromagnetic compatibility compared to high-
frequency radiation. This protection can be increased by grounding the housing, see Chapter
"Connecting the device (Page 26)".
SITRANS P DS III
Connecting
Note
Improvement of interference immunity
• Lay signal cables separate from cables with voltages > 60 V.
• Use cables with twisted wires.
• Keep the device and the cables at a distance from strong electromagnetic fields.
• Use shielded cables to guarantee the full specification according to HART.
• Refer to the information on HART communication in the "Technical specifications"
chapter in the operating instructions.
Opening the device

1. Unscrew the cover of the electrical cable compartment. An identification text "FIELD
TERMINALS" is provided at the side of the housing.
Connecting the device

1. Lead the connecting cable through the cable gland ③.
2. Connect the device to the plant with the protective conductor connection ⑦.
3. Connect the wires to the connecting terminals ④ "+" and "-".
Ensure the correct polarity! If necessary, ground the device using the "-" connection by
connecting the "-" connection to the ground terminal ⑨.
4. If necessary, connect the shield to the screw of the ground terminal ⑨. This is electrically
connected with the external protective conductor connection.
SITRANS P DS III
Connecting
HART PROFIBUS PA / Foundation™ Fieldbus FF
① Feed separator with integrated load ⑥ Safety catch

② Auxiliary power ⑦ Protective conductor connection/
equipotential bonding terminal
③ Cable entry for auxiliary power/analog ⑧ Process connection
output
④ Connecting terminals ⑨ Ground terminal
⑤ Test connector for direct current ⑩ PROFIBUS PA / Foundation™ Fieldbus
measuring device or connection for FF
external display
Electrical connection, power supply
SITRANS P DS III
Connecting
Closing the device

1. Screw the covers ④⑦ back on as far as they will go.
2. Secure each cover with the cover catch ③⑥.
3. Close the key cover ①.
4. Tighten the screws in the key cover.
5. Check the tightness of the blanking plugs ⑤ and cable gland ② in accordance with the
degree of protection.
① Key cover ⑤ Blanking plug

② Cable gland ⑥ Safety catch (front)
③ Safety catch (back) ⑦ Cover (front), optionally with inspection window
④ Cover (rear) for electrical terminal compartment ⑧ Safety catch for stainless steel enclosure
Figure 4-1 View of the transmitter: Left: Back right: Front view
SITRANS P DS III
Maintenance and servicing 5
WARNING
Impermissible repair of explosion protected devices
• Repair must be carried out by Siemens authorized personnel only.
WARNING
Impermissible accessories and spare parts
• Only use original accessories or original spare parts.
• Observe all relevant installation and safety instructions described in the instructions for
the device or enclosed with the accessory or spare part.
WARNING
these parts.
SITRANS P DS III
Maintenance and servicing
WARNING
Maintenance during continued operation in a hazardous area
There is a danger of explosion when carrying out repairs and maintenance on the device in
a hazardous area.
• Isolate the device from power.
- or -
WARNING
Commissioning and operation with pending error
If an error message appears, correct operation in the process is no longer guaranteed.
• Check the gravity of the error.
• Correct the error.
• If the error still exists:
– Take the device out of operation.
– Prevent renewed commissioning.
WARNING
Hot, toxic or corrosive process media
Danger of injury during maintenance work.
When working on the process connection, hot, toxic or corrosive process media could be
released.
• As long as the device is under pressure, do not loosen process connections and do not
remove any parts that are pressurized.
• Before opening or removing the device ensure that process media cannot be released.
WARNING
Improper connection after maintenance
• Connect the device correctly after maintenance.
• Close the device after maintenance work.
Refer to Chapter "Connecting the device (Page 26)".
SITRANS P DS III
WARNING
Use of a computer in a hazardous area
If the interface to the computer is used in the hazardous area, there is a danger of
explosion.
CAUTION
Releasing key lock
Improper modification of parameters could influence process safety.
• Make sure that only authorized personnel may cancel the key locking of devices for
safety-related applications.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces
Danger of burns during maintenance work on parts having surface temperatures exceeding
70 °C (158 °F).
• Take corresponding protective measures, for example by wearing protective gloves.
• After carrying out maintenance, remount touch protection measures.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage with open device in versions with 4-conductor extension
Danger of electrocution when the enclosure is opened or enclosure parts are removed.
• Disconnect the device before you open the enclosure or remove enclosure parts.
• Observe the special precautionary measures if maintenance is required while the device
is live. Have maintenance work carried out by qualified personnel.
SITRANS P DS III
5.2 Defining the maintenance interval
NOTICE
5.2 Defining the maintenance interval
WARNING
No maintenance interval has been defined
Device failure, device damage, and risk of injury.
• Define a maintenance interval for regular tests in line with device use and empirical
values.
• The maintenance interval will vary from site to site depending on corrosion resistance.
SITRANS P DS III
5.3 Checking the gaskets
5.3 Checking the gaskets
Inspect the seals at regular intervals
Note
Incorrect seal changes
Incorrect measured values will be displayed. Changing the seals in a process flange of a
differential pressure measuring cell can alter the start-of-scale value.
• Changing seals in devices with differential pressure measuring cells may only be carried
out by personnel authorized by Siemens.
Note
Using the wrong seals
Using the wrong seals with flush-mounted process connections can cause measuring errors
and/or damage the diaphragm.
• Always use seals which comply with the process connection standards or are
recommended by Siemens.
1. Clean the enclosure and seals.

2. Check the enclosure and seals for cracks and damage.
3. Grease the seals if necessary.
- or -
4. Replace the seals.
SITRANS P DS III
5.4 Display in case of a fault
5.4 Display in case of a fault

Check the start of scale value of the device from time to time.
Differentiate between the following in case of a fault:
● The internal self test has detected a fault, e.g. sensor break, hardware fault/Firmware
fault.
Displays:
– Display: "ERROR" display and ticker with an error text
– Analog output: Factory setting: Failure current 3.6 or 22.8 mA
Or depending on the parameterization
– HART: detailed error breakdown for display in the HART communicator or SIMATIC
PDM
● Grave hardware faults, the processor is not functioning.
Displays:
– Display: no defined display
– Analog output: failure current < 3.6 mA
In the event of a defect, you can replace the application electronics by following the warning
notes and the provided operating instructions.
5.5 Changing the measuring cell and application electronics
Related
Each of the individual components "Measuring cell" and "Electronics" has a non-volatile
memory (EEPROM).
Measuring cell data (e.g.: measuring range, measuring cell material, oil filling) and user data
of the application electronics (e.g.: downscaling, additional electrical damping) are located in
the measuring cell EEPROM. User data is lost when the measuring cell is replaced.
Application-specific data are not lost when the application electronics are changed.
You can backup user data before changing the measuring cell and reload it afterwards. Use
an input device which supports the HART protocol. (e.g. HART communicator, PC with
HART modem and HART software or PC with HART modem and PDM software). Factory
settings will be used if user data is not backed up before the measuring cell is changed.
Technical developments enable advanced functions to be implemented in the firmware of the
measuring cell or application electronics. Further technical developments are indicated by
modified firmware statuses (FW). The firmware status does not affect whether the modules
can be replaced. However, the scope of functions is limited to the function of existing
components.
If a combination of certain firmware versions of measuring cell and application electronics is
not possible for technical reasons, the device will identify this problem and go into "Fault
current" mode. This information is provided via the HART interface.
SITRANS P DS III
5.6 User data following replacement

This chapter describes which user data is reset to the factory setting following replacement
of the application electronics or measuring cell.
The following tables are identified as follows:
*: The parameter names identified by * can be found in SIMATIC PDM under the menu items
"Device" or "View".
①: The user data identified by ① is reset to the factory setting following replacement of the
measuring cell.
②: The user data identified by ② is reset to the factory setting following replacement of the
application electronics.
Table 5- 1 SITRANS P DS III with HART
Parameter name in SIMATIC PDM Status of user data following Value following resetting to factory
replacement of application setting
electronics or measuring cell
Operating unit / TAG ① -
Device / sensor serial number ① -
Unit and cycle time / unit ① bar
Unit and cycle time / cycle time ① 90 ms
Measuring limits / min. measuring range ① -
Measuring limits / min. start-of-scale value, ① -

max. full-scale value
Measured-value scaling, start-of-scale value ① 0.0
Measured-value scaling, full-scale value ① Upper sensor limit
Analog output limits / lower/upper limit ① 3.8 / 20.5 mA
Alarm status / analog output alarm type ① Lower
Alarm status / lower/upper alarm value ① 3.6 / 22.8 mA
Damping ① 0.1 s
Characteristic / transfer function ① Linear
Characteristic / start of root extraction ① 5%
Display and user interface / tracking unit ① mA
Design (all material data) ① -
Sensor calibration / upper/lower calibration ① Like factory-set sensor limits, without

point transformation
Sensor calibration / lower calibration point ① 0.0
Sensor calibration / upper calibration point ① Upper sensor limit
Service interval for sensor (all settings) ① -
SITRANS P DS III
Parameter name in SIMATIC PDM Status of user data following Value following resetting to factory
replacement of application setting
electronics or measuring cell
Certificates and approvals / explosion ① -
protection
* Polling address ① -
* Min/max pointers for pressure / sensor ① -

temperature
* Sensor calibration / zero calibration ① -
* Sensor calibration / upper/lower calibration ① -
* Position error calibration ① 0.0
* Operating hours counter, sensor ① -
Operating unit / message ② -
Operating unit / description ② -
Device / software revision ② -
Device / hardware revision ② -
Device / field device revision ② -
Device / date ② -
Device / factory number ② -
Display and user interface / local display unit ② -
Display and user interface / bargraph ② -
Display and user interface / local operation ② -
Calibration interval for application electronics ② -

(all settings)
Current saturation monitoring / alarm activation ② -
Current saturation monitoring / saturation ② -

alarm, alarm duration
* Operating hours counter, application ② -
electronics
* Analog output D/A calibration (customer- ② Like factory-set D/A calibration
specific)
* Min/max pointers for application electronics ② -
temperature
Table 5- 2 SITRANS P DS III with PA
Parameter name in SIMATIC PDM Status of user data following replacement of application electronics or
measuring cell
Identification / device / sensor type ①
Identification / device / sensor serial number ①
SITRANS P DS III
measuring cell
Input / transducer block 1 / measuring limits / ①
min. start-of-scale value
Input / transducer block 1 / measuring limits / ①
max. full-scale value
Conditions of use / process conditions / max. ①
media pressure limit
Diagnostics settings / service interval for ①
sensor (all settings)
Design / type / measuring cell / measuring cell ①
filling
Design / type / measuring cell / seal diaphragm ①
material
Design / type / measuring cell / O-ring material ①
Design / type / remote seal / number of remote ①
seal flanges
Design / type / remote seal / remote seal type ①
Design / type / remote seal / diaphragm ①
material
Design / type / remote seal / remote seal filling ①
Design / type / remote seal / tube length ①
Design / type / process connection / process ①
connection type
Design / type / process connection / venting ①
valve material
Design / type / process connection / venting ①
valve position
Design / type / process connection / process ①
flange screws
Design / type / process connection / flange ①
type
Design / type / process connection / flange ①
material
Design / electrical connection / electronics ①
housing material
Design / electrical connection / electrical ①
connection
Certificates and approvals / explosion ①
protection
* Operating hours counter, sensor ①
* Min/max pointers for pressure / sensor ①
temperature
Identification / operating unit / TAG ②
Identification / operating unit / description ②
SITRANS P DS III
measuring cell
Identification / operating unit / message ②
Identification / device / device serial number ②
Identification / device / software revision ②
Identification / device / hardware revision ②
Identification / device / PROFIBUS Ident ②
Number
Identification / device / installation date ②
Identification / device / Order No. ②
Input / transducer block 1 / transducer type ②
Input / transducer block 1 / measuring limits / ②
pressure unit, raw value
Input / transducer block 1 / measuring range / ②
unit (secondary variable 1)
start-of-scale value
full-scale value
Input / transducer block 1 / working range / ②
unit
start-of-scale value
full-scale value
Input / transducer block 1 / characteristic / ②
low-flow cut-off
Input / transducer block 1 / characteristic / ②
start of root function
Input / transducer block 1 / interpolation points ②
(all settings)
Input / transducer block 1 / sensor ②
temperature / temperature unit
Output / Function Block 1 - analog input (all ②
settings)
Output / Function Block 2 - totalizer (all ②
settings)
Display and user interface / local operation ②
Display and user interface / source for display ②
Display and user interface / decimal places in ②
display
Diagnostics settings / enabling of diagnostics ②
Diagnostics settings / calibration interval for ②
application electronics (all settings)
SITRANS P DS III
measuring cell
* Sensor calibration ②
* Position error calibration ②
* Write block ②
* Operating hours counter, application ②
electronics
* Min/max pointers for electronics temperature ②
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
5.7 Replacing parts
5.7.1 Guarantee information

Following replacement of a part, a guarantee is only valid for the individual components and
not for the complete device.
5.7.2 Exploded view of the device

Depending on a customer-specific order, the device comprises different parts. The next
chapters show you how to replace the components.
1 Cover (front), optionally with inspection 8 Cover (rear) for electronic terminal
window compartment
2 O-ring between the cover and housing 9 Connection for digital display
3 Display (optional) 10 Measuring cell
4 Threaded bolts 11 Connection board
5 Application electronics 12 Keyboard PCB
6 Measuring cell PCB 13 Mounting screws
7 Housing
Figure 5-1 Exploded view of the transmitter
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
5.7.3 Replacing the connection board
Procedure for replacing the connection board

1. Isolate the device from power.
2. Use a 3 mm Allen key to loosen the cover.
3. Open the cover (rear) of the electronic connection compartment.
4. Disconnect the cables from the connection board.

5. On the left and right side, remove the recessed-head screws that hold the connection
board to the enclosure.
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
6. Make sure when loosening the recessed-head screws that the washers (serrated
washers) are not lost.
7. Remove the connection board.
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
To install the connection board, proceed as follows

1. Insert the new connection board so that its contact pins on rear side mate the contacts in
the housing.
2. Work in the reverse order as described in "Procedure for replacing the connection board".
3. Close the device as described in Chapter Closing the device (Page 26).
5.7.4 Replacing the pushbutton module

2. In order to open the pushbutton flap, loosen the two recessed-head screws on the
outside.
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
3. Remove the two splints on the pushbutton flap using flat-nose pliers.
4. Remove the pushbutton flap.

5. Use a TX10 Torx screwdriver or Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two screws of the
pushbutton insert you can now see.
6. Remove the pushbutton insert from the housing.
7. Remove the three keys with springs from the pushbutton insert.
Procedure for installing the pushbutton module

1. Work in the reverse order as described in "Procedure for replacing the pushbutton
module".
2. When inserting the new pushbutton module, make sure that the magnets of the keys
point to the front in the direction of the display.
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
5.7.5 Replacing the display
Procedure for replacing the display

1. Open the front cover (optional with inspection window).
2. Remove the recessed-head screws on the left and right on the display.
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
3. Pull the display out of the housing.
4. Remove the connector of the ribbon cable from the application electronics.
Procedure for installing the display

1. You can also turn the mounting position of the display by 90 ° or 180 °.
2. Work in the reverse order as described in "Procedure for replacing the display".
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
5.7.6 Replacing the application electronics
Procedure for replacing the application electronics

2. Remove the display. Compare section Replacing the display (Page 45).
3. Use a 7 mm socket wrench to remove the hexagon stud bolts on the left and right.
4. Remove the application electronics.
5. Remove the measuring cell PCB from the application electronics. To do this, carefully
release the clip using a screwdriver as shown in the following picture.
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
6. Use a TX9 Torx screwdriver or Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two screws of the
keyboard PCB you can now see from the base of the housing.
7. Remove the keyboard PCB.
Procedure for installing the application electronics
NOTICE
Frequent insertion of the measuring cell PCB
Device damage.
• Avoid frequent insertion of the measuring cell PCB.
1. Work in the reverse order as described in "Procedure for replacing the application
electronics".
2. When inserting the new application electronics, make sure that the contact pins fit in the
rear of the application electronics.
The ribbon cable of the measuring cell should be positioned between the contact pins,
and that of the keyboard PCB on the left of the pins.
3. Do not kink, pinch, tension or twist the ribbon cable when plugging it onto the application
electronics.
5. Following a replacement, permanently obliterate the firmware ID on the nameplate if
applicable.
6. Write the new firmware ID on the nameplate.
7. Calibrate the zero point of the device, and also the span if necessary. Calibration of the
span is necessary if the device was matched e.g. to a control system prior to replacement
of the application electronics. Compare section Technical specifications (Page 55).
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
5.7.7 Replacing the measuring cell
Procedure for replacing the measuring cell
Note
When using the differential pressure cell, replace the complete measuring cell with process
flanges.

2. Remove the display. Compare section Replacing the display (Page 45).
3. Remove the application electronics. Compare section Replacing the application
electronics (Page 47).
SITRANS P DS III
5.7 Replacing parts
4. Use a 2.5 mm Allen key to loosen the locking screw for fixing the measuring cell.
NOTICE
Damage to the ribbon cable
To avoid damage to the ribbon cable when installing or removing the measuring cell, do
not kink, pinch, tension or twist it.
• Do not kink, pinch, tension or twist the ribbon cable.
5. Turn the measuring cell counter-clockwise to remove it from the housing. To do this, use
a matching open-end wrench (relative pressure transmitter) or rotate the measuring cell
by hand.
SITRANS P DS III
5.8 Cleaning
Procedure for installing the measuring cell

1. Clean residues off the thread of the housing.
2. Push the measuring cell PCB through the threaded hole.
3. Turn the measuring cell into the housing until an overhang of 2.6 mm ± 0.75 remains.
The ribbon cable must be present as a loop between the two feed-through pins, and must
follow every rotation of the cell.
Make sure that the mounting flange is correctly orientated on the differential pressure cell.
The arrow ② must remain visible within the marked area ①.
4. Work from here on in the reverse order as described in "Procedure for replacing the
measuring cell".
6. Following a replacement, permanently obliterate the hardware ID on the nameplate if
applicable.
7. Write the new hardware ID on the nameplate.
8. Following replacement of the measuring cell, carry out an insulation test between the
short-circuited input terminals and the protective earth connection. The insulation
resistance should have a value greater than 10 MOhm.
5.8 Cleaning
WARNING
Dust layers above 5 mm
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas. Device may overheat due to dust build up.
• Remove dust layers in excess of 5 mm.
SITRANS P DS III
5.8 Cleaning
NOTICE
Penetration of moisture into the device
Device damage.
• Make sure when carrying out cleaning and maintenance work that no moisture
penetrates the inside of the device.
Cleaning the enclosure

● Clean the outside of the enclosure and the display window using a cloth moistened with
water or a mild detergent.
● Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or solvents. Plastic components or painted
surfaces could be damaged.
WARNING
Electrostatic charge
Danger of explosion in hazardous areas if electrostatic charges develop, for example, when
cleaning plastic enclosures with a dry cloth.
• Prevent electrostatic charging in hazardous areas.
5.8.1 Servicing the remote seal measuring system

The remote seal measuring system usually does not need servicing.
If the mediums are contaminated, viscous or crystallized, it could be necessary to clean the
diaphragm from time to time. Use only a suitable solvent to remove the deposits from the
diaphragm. Do not use corrosive cleaning agents. Prevent the diaphragm from getting
damaged due to sharp-edged tools.
NOTICE
Improper cleaning of diaphragm
Device damage. The diaphragm can be damaged.
• Do not use sharp or hard objects to clean the diaphragm.
SITRANS P DS III

Enclose the bill of lading, return document and decontamination certificate in a clear plastic
pouch and attach it firmly to the outside of the packaging.
Required forms
● Delivery note
● Return goods delivery note
(http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/returngoodsnote)
with the following information:
– Product (item description)
– Number of returned devices/replacement parts
– Reason for returning the item(s)
● Decontamination declaration (http://www.siemens.com/sc/declarationofdecontamination)
With this declaration you warrant "that the device/replacement part has been carefully
cleaned and is free of residues. The device/replacement part does not pose a hazard for
humans and the environment."
If the returned device/replacement part has come into contact with poisonous, corrosive,
flammable or water-contaminating substances, you must thoroughly clean and
decontaminate the device/replacement part before returning it in order to ensure that all
hollow areas are free from hazardous substances. Check the item after it has been
cleaned.
Any devices/replacement parts returned without a decontamination declaration will be
cleaned at your expense before further processing.
The forms can be found on the Internet as well as in the documentation which comes with
the device.
SITRANS P DS III
5.10 Disposal
5.10 Disposal
Devices identified by this symbol may not be disposed of in the

municipal waste disposal services under observance of the
Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electronic and electrical
equipment (WEEE).
They can be returned to the supplier within the EC or to a
locally approved disposal service. Observe the specific
regulations valid in your country.
Note
Special disposal required
The device includes components that require special disposal.
• Dispose of the device properly and environmentally through a local waste disposal
contractor.
SITRANS P DS III
Technical specifications 6
This chapter describes the deviations from the technical specifications in the operating
instructions.
Deviations exist as follows in the measuring accuracy following replacement of the
application electronics or measuring cell:
Table 6- 1 Technical specifications > measuring accuracy
SITRANS P DS III with HART No calibration of zero and span Calibration of zero and span
Measurement deviation with
limit setting, including hysteresis
and repeatability
Linear characteristic curve
• r ≤ 10 Value doubled Value remains unchanged

• At -10 … +60 °C (14 … 140 Value doubled Value doubled
°F)
r = maximum measuring span/set measuring span
SITRANS P DS III
Technical specifications
SITRANS P DS III
Ordering data for spare parts/accessories 7
SITRANS P DS III
Ordering data for spare parts/accessories
SITRANS P DS III
SITRANS P DS III
SITRANS P DS III
SITRANS P DS III
See also
SITRANS P DS III
SITRANS P DS III
Appendix A
A.1 Certificate
The certificates can be found on the enclosed CD and on the Internet under:
Certificates (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/certificates)
Technical Support
You can contact Technical Support for all IA and DT products:
● Via the Internet using the Support Request:
Support request (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)
● E-mail (mailto:support.automation@siemens.com)
● Phone: +49 (0) 911 895 7 222
● Fax: +49 (0) 911 895 7 223
Further information about our technical support is available on the Internet at
Technical Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/service)
Industry Online Support

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base on the Internet
at:
Services & Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
There you will find:
● The latest product information, FAQs, downloads, tips and tricks.
● Our newsletter with the latest information about our products.
● A Knowledge Manager to find the right documents for you.
● Our bulletin board, where users and specialists share their knowledge worldwide.
● Your local contact partner for Industry Automation and Drives Technologies in our partner
database.
● Information about field service, repairs, spare parts and lots more under "Services."
SITRANS P DS III
Appendix
Additional Support
Please contact your local Siemens representative and offices if you have any questions
about the products described in this manual and do not find the right answers.
Find your contact partner at:
Partner (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner)
Documentation for various products and systems is available at:
Instructions and manuals (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/documentation)
See also
SITRANS P DS III
Appendix
A.3 Repair report for installation of spare parts
For your local documentation

Check mark the relevant items and fill out the fields
1. Customer information:
Company:
Address:
Department:
Tel / Fax:
E-mail:
System part:
2. Information on the original device: first replacement of a component ⃞
Electronic serial number:
Sensor serial number:
F-no.: (rating plate)
HW: Approval plate)
FW: (approval plate)
Device order no.: 7MF4 _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ - Z _ _ _
Additional components -Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___
3a. Device information Spare Part(1): Measuring cell
Sensor serial number:
Spare part order no.: 7MF499 _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ - Z _ _ _
Additional components -Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___-Z___
3b. Device information Spare Part(2): Application electronics
Electronic serial number:
ES: (electronic cup)
FW: (electronic cup)
Spare part order no.: 7MF4999 - _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
3c. Device information Spare Part(3): Connection board
HW: (connection board)
3d. Device information Spare Part(4): Pushbutton module
3e. Device information Spare Part(5): Display
3f. Device information Spare Part(6): Additional spare parts
4. Additional information
Installation location (precise
definition)
SITRANS P DS III
Appendix
For your local documentation
Repair period: From:

To:
Safety measures:
Work completed:
5. Approval
Check mark the relevant
items and fill out the fields
Replacement documentation
was read and observed: ⃞
ESD guidelines were
observed: ⃞
Inspected by Ex expert: ⃞
Function test completed: ⃞
Name of Ex expert: Date:
Signature of Ex expert:
Author name: Date:
Author signature:
SITRANS P DS III
Glossary
ATEX
ATEX is an abbreviation of the French term "Atmosphère explosible" (potentially explosive
atmosphere). ATEX stands for both EC directives in the area of explosion protection: ATEX
product directive 94/9/EC and ATEX operating directive 1999/92/EC.
Auxiliary power supply

Auxiliary power supply refers to an electrical supply or reference voltage which some
electrical circuits require apart from the standard supply. The auxiliary power supply can, for
example, be specially stabilized, have a particular level or polarity and/or other properties
which are important for the correct functioning of switch components.
Auxiliary voltage
→ Auxiliary power supply
Dangerous failure
Failure with the potential to switch a safety-instrumented system to a hazardous or non-
functioning safety state.
EEPROM
EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory): a non-volatile,
electronic memory module.
EEPROMs are often used where individual bytes of data (e.g. configuration data or runtime
meters) change over time and must be stored safely in the event of a mains power failure.
Failure/Fault/Error
Failure:
A resource is no longer capable of executing a required function.
Fault/Error:
Undesired state of a resource indicated by its incapability of executing a required function.
Fault/Error
→ Failure/Fault/Error
SITRANS P DS III
Glossary
Final controlling element

Converter that converts electrical signals into mechanical or other non-electric variables.
Firmware
Firmware (FW) is software that is embedded on a chip in electronic devices – in contrast to
software which is saved on hard disks, CD-ROMs or other media. These days, firmware is
mostly stored in a flash memory or EEPROM.
Firmware usually contains the elementary functions for controlling the device, as well as
input and output routines.
Frequency shift keying

Frequency shift keying is a simple form of modulation, where the digital values 0 and 1
modulate the actual current signal by means of two different frequencies.
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)

→ Frequency shift keying
HART
HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) is a standardized, widely used
communications system used to structure industrial fieldbusses. The communications
system provides digital communications for multiple participants (field devices) via a
common databus. HART is based especially on the equally widely used 4/20 mA standard
for the transfer of analog sensor signals. The cabling from existing older systems can be
used directly and both systems operated in parallel.
HART specifies several protocol levels in the OSI model. It facilitates the transfer of process
and diagnostics data and control signals between field devices and high-level control
systems. Standardized parameter sets can be used for the manufacture-independent
operation of all HART devices.
Typical applications include transmitters for measuring mechanical and electrical
dimensions.
MAWP (PS)
Maximum Allowable Working Preassure (PS)
Non-volatile memory
→ EEPROM
Risk
Combination of the probability of damage occurring and the extent of the damage.
SITRANS P DS III
Glossary
Safety function
Defined function executed by a safety-instrumented system with the objective of attaining or
maintaining a safe system state by taking a defined hazardous incident into account.
Example:
Limit pressure monitoring
Safety Integrity Level

→ SIL
Safety-instrumented system
A safety-instrumented system (SIS) executes the safety functions that are required to
achieve or maintain a safe state in a system. It consists of a sensor, logic unit/control system
and final controlling element.
Example:
A safety-instrumented system is made up of a pressure transmitter, a limit signal sensor and
a control valve.
Sensor
Converter that converts mechanical or other non-electric variables into electrical signals.
SIL
The international standard IEC 61508 defines four discrete safety integrity levels (SIL) from
SIL 1 to SIL 4. Each level corresponds to a probability range for the failure of a safety
function. The higher the SIL of the safety-instrumented system, the higher the probability that
the required safety function will work.
The SIL which can be achieved is determined by the following safety-instrumented
characteristics:
● Average probability of failure on demand (PFDAVG)
● Hardware fault tolerance (HFT)
● Safe failure fraction (SFF)
srli2
→ srlin2
SITRANS P DS III
Glossary
srlin2
"srli2" or "srlin2" is a type of square root extracting characteristic curve for the output current.
This characteristic curve type is proportional to the flow rate, linear in two levels up to the
application point and has a pre-defined application point of 10%.
"srli2" or "srlin2" are synonymous and technically there is no difference between them. The
abbreviation "srli2" is used in sections that refer to the on-site operation of the pressure
transmitter. The reason for the abbreviation is that the pressure transmitter display is
restricted to five characters. The abbreviation "srlin2" is used for HART operation.
SITRANS P DS III
Index
A P
Additional Support, 66 Process connection, 20
Approval plate,
Q
C Qualified personnel, 16
Certificate, 65
Certificates, 15
Certification, 65 R
Correct usage,
Remote seal
Customer Support Hotline, 65
Maintenance, 52
D S
Device
Scope of delivery, 8
Electrostatic-sensitive, 32
Service, 65
Structure, 19
Support, 65
E
Electrostatic-sensitive device (ESD), 32
T
Test certificates, 15
F
Firmware, 7
H
Hazardous area
Laws and directives, 15
History, 7
Hotline, 65
I
Improper device modifications, 15
Internet, 65
N
Nameplate, 20
Nameplate with general information, 20
SITRANS P DS III
&RQQHFWLRQER[ .H\ERDUG 'LVSOD\ /HJHQG 2SHUDWLRQ 2SHUDWLRQ 6HWWLQJORZHUUDQJHYDOXH (VSDFLRGHFRQH[LµQ 7HFODGR 3DQWDOODGLJLWDO /H\HQGD 0DQHMR 0DQHMR (VWDEOHFHULQLFLR\

VHWWLQJZLWKRXWGLVSOD\ 6FUHHQFRQQHFWLRQ /59 /RZHUUDQJHYDOXH DQGXSSHUUDQJHYDOXH 0DQHMRVLQYLVXDOL]DFLµQ 6RSRUWHGHDSDQWDOODPLHQWR ,0 ,QLFLRGHPHGLFLµQ ILQGHPHGLFLµQ
/HSRUHOOR SRZHUVXSSO\ 859 8SSHUUDQJHYDOXH /HSRUHOOR (QHUJ¯DDX[LOLDU )0 )LQGHPHGLFLµQ
SRZHUVXSSO\ EDU (QHUJ¯DDX[LOLDU
06HQVRUGHFRUULHQWH൹\ൻV EDU
7HVWSOXJIRUH[WHUQDO 'LVSOD\PRGHLQP$SUHVVXUH 0&XUUHQWWUDQVP൹DQGൻIRUV $,QLWLDO
P$ %ORTXHRGHWHFODV &RQHFWRUGHSUXHEDSDUDPHGLGRUGH 0RGRGHYLVXDOL]DFLµQ 0&RUULHQWHGHGHIHFWR
$6LWXDFLµQ
P$
VLWXDWLRQ HQP$SUHVLµQ LQLFLDO
0 V.H\ORFN '&DPPHWHU
06HWDQGDGMXVW/59
0)DXOWFXUUHQWXSSHUORZHU 0 V SURWHFFLµQFRQWUD FRUULHQWHFRQWLQXDH[WHUQR
DUULEDDEDMR
0RGHNH\ 7HFODPRGR
6,75$163 5HDGRQO\2)) 6,75$163 HVFULWXUD2))
0 0RGR

0 0RGH
,QFUHPHQWNH\ %6HWWLQJORZHU EDU 7HFODLQFUHPHQWR 0(VWDEOHFHU\DMXVWDU,0 0%ORTXHRGHWHFODV %,QLFLRGH EDU
06HWDQGDGMXVW859 0.H\ORFNUHDGRQO\ UDQJHYDOXH PHGLFLµQ
3'6,,,3
'HFUHPHQWNH\
0HDVXUHGYDOXH HJEDU P$ 3'6,,,3
7HFODGHFUHPHQWR
9DORUPHGLGR &6HUYLFLRGHFRUULHQWH 0(VWDEOHFHU\DMXVWDU)0 SURWHFFLµQFRQWUDHVFULWXUD HVWDEOHFHU P$
0$GMXVWGDPSLQJ 06TXDUHURRW˂3 SHMEDU

ZLWK+$57 'LPHQVLRQ
EDUJUDSK
&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWPRGH
/5HDGRQO\ &6HWWLQJXSSHU EDU
FRQ+$57 8QLGDG
GLDJUDPDGH
FRQVWDQWH
/3URWHFFLµQFRQWUDOD 0$MXVWDUDWHQXDFLµQ
0([WUDHUUD¯]SGLI
&)LQGH EDU
63$1 )ORZ /$.H\ERDUGGLVDEOHG 0$GMXVW/59ZLWKRXWSUHVVXUH 06WDUWRIVTXDUHURRWLQJ˂3 UDQJHYDOXH 63$1 EDUUDV HVFULWXUD
03XQWRGHLQLFLRGHODUD¯]SGLI PHGLFLµQ
4XLFN6WDUW*XLGH/HSRUHOOR PHDVXUHPHQW /22QO\/59FDQEHVHW HJEDU P$
,QVWUXFFLRQHVEUHYHV/HSRUHOOR 0HGLFLµQ
/$7HFODGREORTXHDGR
0$MXVWDU,0VLQDSOLFDUSUHVLµQ HVWDEOHFHU P$
/26µOR,0DMXVWDEOH
/6/59859FDQEHVHW 0$GMXVW859ZLWKRXWSUHVVXUH 0P$PHDVXULQJPRGH
GHFDXGDO /6,0\)0DMXVWDEOHV 0P$LQGLFDGRUWLSRGH SHMEDU
$( //.H\ERDUGGLVDEOH '&DOFXODWLQJRXWSXWFXUUHQWHJEDU $( 0$MXVWDU)0VLQDSOLFDUSUHVLµQ
0RGH HQDEOHRQO\YLD+$57 //%ORTXHRGHOWHFODGR PHGLFLµQ '&RUULHQWHGHVDOLGDFDOFXODUSHMEDU
0=HURDGMXVWPHQW 0P$GLPHQVLRQ EDUEDU &RQVXOWDUODVLQVWUXFFLRQHV 0RGR GHVEORTXHRVµORD EDUEDU
3OHDVHUHIHUWRWKH /RZHUFXUUHQWOLPLW , P$P$ P$ WUDY«VGH+$57 0&RPSHQVDFLµQGHOFHUR 0P$8QLGDG , P$P$ P$
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQVSULRU
0
6LJQIRUPHDVXUHGYDOXH
EDUEDU
GHVHUYLFLRDQWHVGHOD 0
/¯PLWHGHFRUULHQWHLQIHULRUDOFDQ]DGR
EDUEDU
6\PEROV 8SSHUFXUUHQWOLPLW
0 6DYHYDOXH
ൻ
൹ RUFKDQJHYDOXH 3UHUHTXLVLWHVHH2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV LQVWDODFLµQ\SXHVWDHQ 6¯PERORV 6LJQRSUHFHGHQWHDOYDORUGHPHGLFLµQ 5HTXLVLWRY«DVH,QVWUXFFLRQHVGH
WRLQVWDOODWLRQDQGVWDUWXS
&RPPXQLFDWLRQGLVSOD\ ൻ
൹ DQG6HWYDOXH 0 H[LWZLWKRXWVDYLQJ 6HFWLRQ /¯PLWHGHFRUULHQWHVXSHULRUDOFDQ]DGR
0 0HPRUL]DUYDORU
ൻ
൹ RPRGLILFDUYDORU VHUYLFLRFDS¯WXOR
=(52 VHUYLFLR =(52 ൻ
,QGLFDFLµQGHFRPXQLFDFLµQ
൹ \HVWDEOHFHUYDORU 0 6DOLUVLQJXDUGDU

6HWWLQJORZHUUDQJHYDOXH $GMXVWLQJORZHUUDQJHYDOXH $GMXVWLQJXSSHUUDQJHYDOXH 6HWWLQJORZHUUDQJHYDOXH $GMXVWLQJORZHUUDQJHYDOXH =HURDGMXVWPHQW $SSOLFDWLRQ ):+:UHOHDVHV (VWDEOHFHULQLFLRGHPHGLFLµQ $MXVWDULQLFLRGHPHGLFLµQ $MXVWDUILQGHPHGLFLµQ (VWDEOHFHULQLFLRGHPHGLFLµQ $MXVWDULQLFLRGHPHGLFLµQ &RPSHQVDFLµQGHOFHUR 3XQWRGHLQLFLR 'LVWLQWLYR):+:
6HOHFWPRGH 6HOHFWPRGH 6HOHFWPRGH ZLWKRXWDSSOLFDWLRQRISUHVVXUH ZLWKRXWDSSOLFDWLRQRISUHVVXUH 6HOHFWPRGH SRLQWRIWKHVTXDUH FDQEHUHDGIURPWKHDSSURYDOODEHO VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR VLQDSOLFDUSUHVLµQ VLQDSOLFDUSUHVLµQ VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR GHODFXUYDFDUDFWHU¯VWLFD VHSXHGHQYHUHQODSODFDGH
6HOHFWPRGH 6HOHFWPRGH 9HQWWUDQVPLWWHURUDGMXVWNQRZQUHIHUHQFH URRWLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLF $SOLTXHODSUHVLµQFRUUHVSRQGLHQWHDO $SOLFDUSUHVLµQGHUHIHUHQFLD $SOLFDUSUHVLµQGHUHIHUHQFLD
VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR GHODTXHVHYDDH[WUDHUODUD¯] KRPRORJDFLµQ
$SSO\SUHVVXUHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ $SSO\UHIHUHQFHSUHVVXUH $SSO\UHIHUHQFHSUHVVXUH $LUHDUWUDQVPLVRURHVWDEOHFHUXQD
WR/59WRWKHWUDQVPLWWHU &RQQHFW'&DPPHWHU &RQQHFW'&DPPHWHU 6HWORZHUUDQJHYDOXHWRWKHORZHU $GMXVWSUHVVXUHZKLFKLVWRFRUUHVSRQG SUHVVXUH )ORZ>@ ):DDEEFF ,0HQHOWUDQVPLVRU &RQHFWDUPHGLGRUGHFRUULHQWH &RQHFWDUPHGLGRUGHFRUULHQWH ൹ ൻ
&RQ\VHVWDEOHFHU ൹ ൻ
&RQRDMXVWDUODSUHVLµQ SUHVLµQGHUHIHUHQFLDFRQRFLGD &DXGDO>@ ):DDEEFF
൹ ൻ
DQG.HHSSUHVVHGIRUV UHFRPPHQGHG UHFRPPHQGHG ൹ ൻ
VHQVRUOLPLWXVLQJDQGV ൹ ൻ
WR/59XVLQJRUYDULDEOHVSHHG >(YDFXDWHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHUIRU VTXDUHURRWLQJ +:[[\\]] ൹ ൻ
0DQWHQHUSXOVDGR\V FRQWLQXDUHFRPHQGDGR FRQWLQXDUHFRPHQGDGR LQLFLRGHPHGLFLµQHQO¯PLWHLQIHULRU FRUUHVSRQGLHQWHSDUD,0
>(YDFXDUHOWUDQVPLVRUGHSUHVLµQDEVROXWD ([WUDFFLµQGHUD¯] +:[[\\]]
GHOVHQVRU DMXVWHGLQ£PLFR
WRVHW/59WRP$ ൹ ൻ
$GMXVW/59XVLQJRU ൹
$GMXVW859XVLQJRU ൻ 0
3UHVVYDOXHZLOOEHVDYHG 0
3UHVVYDOXHZLOOEHVDYHG DEVROXWHSUHVVXUH

\HVWDEOHFHU,0HQP$ ൹ ൻ
$MXVWDU,0FRQR ൹ ൻ
$MXVWDU)0FRQR
0 0
ಽGHODOFDQFHGHPHGLGD@

YDULDEOHVSHHG YDULDEOHVSHHG ಽRIPHDVXULQJVSDQ@ DMXVWHGLQ£PLFR DMXVWHGLQ£PLFR 3XOVDUSDUDPHPRUL]DUYDORU 3XOVDUSDUDPHPRUL]DUYDORU
3DUDPHWHUUDQJH 5DQJRDMXVWDGR
6HWWLQJXSSHUUDQJHYDOXH DQGVDYH/59XVLQJ 0 DQGVDYH859XVLQJ 0 6HWWLQJXSSHUUDQJHYDOXH $GMXVWLQJXSSHUUDQJHYDOXH ൹
6HW=HURXVLQJDQG ൻ IRUDSSOLFDWLRQ
SRLQW
(VWDEOHFHUILQGHPHGLFLµQ 0
3XOVDUSDUDPHPRUL]DU,0 0
3XOVDUSDUDPHPRUL]DU)0 ൹ ൻ
&RQ\HVWDEOHFHUHOSXQWR SDUDSXQWRGH
LQLFLR
6HOHFWPRGH ZLWKRXWDSSOLFDWLRQRISUHVVXUH ZLWKRXWDSSOLFDWLRQRISUHVVXUH VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR (VWDEOHFHUILQGHPHGLFLµQ $MXVWDUILQGHPHGLFLµQ FHUR
൹ ൻ
$GMXVW=HURXVLQJRU /LQHDUXSWR DSSOLFDWLRQSRLQW
VLQDSOLFDUSUHVLµQ VLQDSOLFDUSUHVLµQ /LQHDUKDVWD 3XQWRGHLQLFLR
$SSO\SUHVVXUHFRUUHVSRQGLQJ 6HOHFWPRGH 6HOHFWPRGH 0

3UHVVYDOXHZLOOEHVDYHG DSSOLFDWLRQ
IRUIL[HGDSSOL
FDWLRQSRLQW $SOLTXHODSUHVLµQFRUUHVSRQGLHQWHDO ൹ ൻ
&RQRDMXVWDUHOSXQWRFHUR SXQWRGHLQLFLR
SDUDSXQWRGH
LQLFLRILMR
$GMXVWFXUUHQWDFFRUGLQJWR
6HWXSSHUUDQJHYDOXHWRWKHXSSHU $GMXVWSUHVVXUHZKLFKLVWRFRUUHVSRQG
SRLQW
)0HQHOWUDQVPLVRU &RUULHQWHDDMXVWDUVHJ¼QIµUPXOD VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR VHOHFFLRQDUPRGR 0
3XOVDUSDUDPHPRUL]DUYDORU &HURKDVWD
WR859WRWKHWUDQVPLWWHU FDOFXODWLRQIRUPXODVHH SXQWRGHLQLFLR
൹ ൻ
DQG.HHSSUHVVHGIRUV 2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV6HFWLRQ ൹ ൻ
VHQVRUOLPLWXVLQJDQGV ൹ ൻ
WR859XVLQJRUYDULDEOHVSHHG
=HURXSWR
DSSOLFDWLRQSRLQW
SUHVVXUH
OLQHDU ൹ ൻ
0DQWHQHUSXOVDGR\V GHF£OFXORY«DVH,QVWUXFFLRQHV ൹ ൻ
&RQ\VHVWDEOHFHU ൹ ൻ
&RQRDMXVWDUODSUHVLµQ
/LJHUDPHQWH
/LQHDO
SUHVLµQ
(['DWD
GHVHUYLFLRFDS¯WXOR ILQGHPHGLFLµQHQO¯PLWHVXSHULRU FRUUHVSRQGLHQWHSDUD)0 'DWRV([ DVFHQGHQWH

WRVHW859WRP$ 0
3UHVVYDOXHZLOOEHVDYHG 0
3UHVVYDOXHZLOOEHVDYHG 6ORZO\LQFUHDVLQJ \HVWDEOHFHU)0HQP$
XSWR GHOVHQVRU DMXVWHGLQ£PLFR 9«DVH,QVWUXFFLRQHVGHVHUYLFLR\
KDVWD

6HH2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQVDQG WKHQOLQHDUXSWR GHVSX«VOLQHDO
1RWHWKHNH\VPD\EHGLVDEOHG FRQIRUPLW\FHUWLILFDWHV DSSOLFDWLRQSRLQW 1RWD/DVWHFODVGHPDQGRSXHGHQ 0
3XOVDUSDUDPHPRUL]DUYDORU 0
3XOVDUSDUDPHPRUL]DUYDORU FHUWLILFDGRVGHFRQIRUPLGDG KDVWDSXQWRGH
LQLFLR
5HPRYHNH\ORFNGLVDEOLQJ KWWSZZZVLHPHQVFRPVLWUDQVS 3UHVVXUH>@ HVWDUEORTXHDGDV3DUDGHVEORTXHDU KWWSZZZVLHPHQVFRPVLWUDQVS 3UHVLµQ>@
6HHSDJH HOWHFODGRY«DVHS£JLQD

$QVFKOXVVUDXP 7DVWDWXU 'LVSOD\ /HJHQGH %HGLHQXQJ %HGLHQXQJ 0HVVDQIDQJXQG 6SD]LRGLFROOHJDPHQWR 7DVWLHUD 9LVXDOL]]DWRUHGLJLWDOH /HJHQGD 8VR 8VR ,PSRVWDUHLQL]LR

%HGLHQXQJRKQH'LVSOD\ 6FKLUPDXIODJH 0HVVHQGHVHW]HQ XVRVHQ]DGLVSOD\ 6XSSRUWRVFKHUPR ,0 ,QL]LR0LVXUD]LRQH 07UDVPHWWLWRUHGLFRUUHQWH HILQHPLVXUD]LRQH
/HSRUHOOR +LOIVHQHUJLH 0$ 0HVVDQIDQJ0( 0HVVHQGH /HSRUHOOR $OLPHQWDWRUH )0 )LQH0LVXUD]LRQH
+LOIVHQHUJLH EDU $OLPHQWDWRUH ൹HൻV EDU

7HVWVWHFNHUI¾UH[WHUQHV $Q]HLJHPRGXVLQP$'UXFN 06WURPJHEHU൹XൻV $$XVJDQJV
P$ %ORFFRWDVWL &RQQHWWRUHGLSURYDSHUPLVXUDWRUHGL 0RGRGLYLVXDOL]]D]LRQHLQ 0&RUUHQWHGLDYDULD
$6LWXD]LRQHGL
P$
VLWXDWLRQ P$SUHVVLRQH SDUWHQ]D
0 V7DVWHQVSHUUH *OHLFKVWURPPHVVJHU¦W
00$VHW]HQXHLQVWHOOHQ 0)HKOHUVWURPREHQXQWHQ 6,75$163 0 V SURWH]LRQH FRUUHQWHFRQWLQXDHVWHUQR
VRSUDVRWWR
7DVWH0RGH 7DVWR0RGH
6,75$163 6FKUHLEVFKXW]$86 DQWLVFULWWXUD2))
0 0RGR

0 0RGXV
7DVWH,QFUHPHQW %0HVVDQIDQJ EDU 7DVWR,QFUHPHQW 0,PSRVWDUHHPRGLILFDUH,0 0%ORFFRWDVWLSURWH]LRQH %,PSRVWDUH EDU
00(VHW]HQXHLQVWHOOHQ
07DVWHQVSHUUH6FKUHLEVFKXW] VHW]HQ 3'6,,,3 LQL]LR
3'6,,,3
7DVWH'HFUHPHQW
0HVVZHUW ]%EDU P$

7DVWR'HFUHPHQW
9DORUHGLPLVXUD 0,PSRVWDUHHPRGLILFDUH)0 GDVFULWWXUD PLVXUD]LRQH P$
0'¦PSIXQJHLQVWHOOHQ 05DGL]LHUHQ ˂3 DGHVEDU

PLW+$57 (LQKHLW%DUJUDI &.RQVWDQWVWURPEHWULHE XQLW¢LQGLFDWRUH &6HUYL]LRDFRUUHQWH
'XUFKIOXVV
/6FKUHLEVFKXW]
/$7DVWDWXUJHVSHUUW

&0HVVHQGH EDU FRQ+$57 DEDUUH FRVWDQWH 0,PSRVWDUHVPRU]DPHQWR 0(VWUDUUHUDGLFHSGLII &,PSRVWDUH EDU
63$1 PHVVXQJ /2QXU0$VHW]EDU 00$EOLQGHLQVWHOOHQ
0:XU]HOHLQVDW]SXQNW
˂3 VHW]HQ 63$1 0LVXUD]LRQH
/3URWH]LRQHGDVFULWWXUD
/$7DVWLHUDEORFFDWD 03XQWRGಬDSSOLFD]LRQHUDGLFHSGLII ILQH
.XU]DQOHLWXQJ/HSRUHOOR /60$0(VHW]EDU ]%EDU P$
,VWUX]LRQLLQEUHYH/HSRUHOOR GHOODSRUWDWD /2VROR,0LPSRVWDELOH 05HJROD]LRQHFLHFD,0 PLVXUD]LRQH P$
0RGXV //7DVWDWXUVSHUUH)UHL 00(EOLQGHLQVWHOOHQ 0P$0HVVDUWDQ]HLJH /6,0H)0LPSRVWDELOL 0P$LQGLFD]LRQHWLSRGL DGHVEDU

$( JDEHQXU¾EHU+$57 '$XVJDQJVVWURPEHUHFKQHQ]%EDU $( 05HJROD]LRQHFLHFD)0
//%ORFFRWDVWLHUD PLVXUD]LRQH '&DOFRODUHFRUUHQWHG
XVFLWDDGHVEDU
9RUGHU,QVWDOODWLRQXQG 8QWHUH6WURPJUHQ]HHUUHLFKW 01XOOSXQNWDEJOHLFK 0P$(LQKHLW EDUEDU 3ULPDGHOO
LQVWDOOD]LRQH 0RGR DELOLWD]LRQHVROR EDUEDU
, P$P$ P$ WUDPLWH+$57
0P$XQLW¢ , P$P$ P$
GHU,QEHWULHEQDKPHLVW 0 9RU]HLFKHQI¾U0HVVZHUW EDUEDU 0 0&RUUH]LRQHSXQWRGL]HUR EDUEDU
2EHUH6WURPJUHQ]HHUUHLFKW HGHOODPHVVDLQVHUYL]LR /LPLWHLQIHULRUHGLFRUUHQWHUDJJLXQWR
GLH%HWULHEVDQOHLWXQJ 6\PEROH .RPPXQLNDWLRQVDQ]HLJH
0 :HUWVSHLFKHUQ
ൻ
൹ RGHU:HUW¦QGHUQ 9RUDXVVHW]XQJVLHKH%HWULHEVDQOHLWXQJ OHJJHUHOHLVWUX]LRQL 6LPEROL 6HJQRLQL]LDOHSHUYDORUHGLPLVXUD 3UHVXSSRVWRYHGLFDSLWRORGHOOH
ൻ
൹ XQG:HUWVHW]HQ 0 %HHQGHQRKQH6SHLFKHUQ .DSLWHO /LPLWHVXSHULRUHGLFRUUHQWHUDJJLXQWR
0 PHPRUL]]DUHYDORUH
ൻ
൹ RPRGLILFDUHYDORUH LVWUX]LRQLRSHUDWLYH
]XEHDFKWHQ =(52 RSHUDWLYH =(52 ,QGLFD]LRQHGLFRPXQLFD]LRQH ൻ
൹ HLPSRVWDUHYDORUH 0 8VFLUHVHQ]DVDOYDUH

0HVVDQIDQJVHW]HQ 0HVVDQIDQJHLQVWHOOHQ 0HVVHQGHHLQVWHOOHQ 0HVVDQIDQJಱEOLQGಯVHW]HQ 0HVVDQIDQJಱEOLQGಯHLQVWHOOHQ 1XOOSXQNWDEJOHLFK (LQVDW]SXQNWGHU ):+:.HQQ]HLFKHQ ,PSRVWDUHLQL]LRPLVXUD]LRQH 5HJROD]LRQHLQL]LRPLVXUD]LRQH 5HJROD]LRQHILQHPLVXUD]LRQH ,PSRVWD]LRQHFLHFD 5HJROD]LRQHFLHFD 7DUDWXUDSXQWRG
RULJLQH 3XQWRGLDSSOLFD]LRQH &RQWUDVVHJQR):+:
0RGXVZ¦KOHQ 0RGXVZ¦KOHQ 0RGXVZ¦KOHQ 0RGXVZ¦KOHQ 0RGXVZ¦KOHQ 0RGXVZ¦KOHQ UDGL]LHUHQGHQ.HQQOLQLH VLQGDXIGHP=XODVVXQJVVFKLOG VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR LQL]LRPLVXUD]LRQH LQL]LRPLVXUD]LRQH VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR FXUYDFDUDWWHULVWLFDGDFXL VRQROHJJLELOLVXOODWDUJKHWWDGL
DE]XOHVHQ VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR HVWUDUUHODUDGLFH RPRORJD]LRQH
'UXFNGHUGHP0$HQWVSULFKW 5HIHUHQ]GUXFNDQOHJHQ 5HIHUHQ]GUXFNDQOHJHQ ൹ ൻ
PLWXQGVGHQ0HVVDQIDQJ ൹ ൻ
PLWRGHUGHQ'UXFNHLQVWHOOHQ 0HVVXPIRUPHUEHO¾IWHQRGHUEHNDQQWHQ $SSOLFDUHODSUHVVLRQHSHU,0VXO ,PSRVWDUHODSUHVVLRQHGL ,PSRVWDUHODSUHVVLRQHGLULIHULPHQWR 9HQWLODUHLOWUDVPHWWLWRUHRLPSRVWDUH
DP0HVVXPIRUPHUDQOHJHQ *OHLFKVWURPPHVVJHU¦WDQVFKOLH¡HQ *OHLFKVWURPPHVVJHU¦WDQVFKOLH¡HQ DXIGDVXQWHUH6HQVRUOLPLWVHW]HQ GHU0$HQWVSUHFKHQVROO9HUVWHOOG\QDPLN 5HIHUHQ]GUXFNHLQVWHOOHQ 'XUFKIOXVV>@ ):DDEEFF WUDVPHWWLWRUH ULIHULPHQWR &ROOHJDUHLOPLVXUDWRUHGLFRUUHQWH ൹ ൻ
&RQHVLPSRVWDUHO
LQL]LR ൹ ൻ
&RQRLPSRVWDUHOD ODSUHVVLRQHGLULIHULPHQWRQRWD )OXVVR>@ ):DDEEFF
&ROOHJDUHLOPLVXUDWRUHGLFRUUHQWH FRQWLQXDYLHQHFRQVLJOLDWR GLPLVXUD]LRQHVXOOLPLWHLQIHULRUHGHO SUHVVLRQHFRUULVSRQGHQWHDOO
,0
൹ ൻ
XQGVJHGU¾FNWKDOWHQ ZLUGHPSIRKOHQ ZLUGHPSIRKOHQ 0
GU¾FNHQ:HUWZLUGJHVSHLFKHUW 0
GU¾FNHQ:HUWZLUGJHVSHLFKHUW >0HVVXPIRUPHUI¾U$EVROXWGUXFNHYDNXLHUHQ UDGL]LHUHQG
+:[[\\]] ൹ ൻ
HWHQHUOLSUHPXWLSHUV
FRQWLQXDYLHQHFRQVLJOLDWR VHQVRUH GLQDPLFDUHJROD]LRQH
>YXRWRQHLWUDVPHWWLWRULSHUSUHVVLRQH $GHVWUD]LRQHGL
UDGLFH +:[[\\]]
XQGGDPLW0$DXIP$VHW]HQ ൹ ൻ
PLWRGHU0$HLQVWHOOHQ ൹ ൻ
PLWRGHU0(HLQVWHOOHQ ಽGHU0HVVVSDQQH@ SHULPSRVWDUHO
,0VXP$ ൹ ൻ
&RQRLPSRVWDUHO
)0
0
DVVROXWDbಽGHOPDUJLQHGLPLVXUD@ &DPSR
9HUVWHOOG\QDPLN 9HUVWHOOG\QDPLN

൹ ൻ
&RQRLPSRVWDUHO
,0 GLQDPLFDUHJROD]LRQH SUHPHUHSHUPHPRUL]]DUHYDORUH 0
SUHPHUHSHUPHPRUL]]DUHYDORUH GಬLPSRVWD]LRQH

(LQVWHOOEHUHLFK
0HVVHQGHVHW]HQ 0
XQGPLW0$VSHLFKHUQ 0
XQGPLW0(VSHLFKHUQ 0HVVHQGHಱEOLQGಯVHW]HQ 0HVVHQGHಱEOLQGಯHLQVWHOOHQ ൹ ൻ
PLWXQGGHQ1XOOSXQNWVHW]HQ
I¾U(LQVDW]SXQNW ,PSRVWDUHILQHPLVXUD]LRQH GLQDPLFDUHJROD]LRQH 0
SUHPHUHSHUPHPRUL]]DUH)0 ൹ ൻ
&RQHLPSRVWDUHLOSXQWR]HUR SHUSXQWRGL
DSSOLFD]LRQH
0RGXVZ¦KOHQ 0RGXVZ¦KOHQ 0RGXVZ¦KOHQ /LQHDUELV]XP
VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR 0
SUHPHUHSHUPHPRUL]]DUH,0 ,PSRVWD]LRQHFLHFD 5HJROD]LRQHFLHFD ൹ ൻ
&RQRUHJRODUHLOSXQWR]HUR
൹ ൻ
PLWRGHUGHQ1XOOSXQNWHLQVWHOOHQ (LQVDW]SXQNW (LQVDW]SXQNW
I¾U(LQVDW] ILQHPLVXUD]LRQH ILQHPLVXUD]LRQH
/LQHDUHILQR
DSXQWRGL
3XQWRGLDSSOLFD
]LRQHSHUSXQWR
0
SUHPHUHSHUPHPRUL]]DUHYDORUH
'UXFNGHUGHP0(HQWVSULFKW HLQ]XVWHOOHQGHU6WURPJHP¦¡ ൹ ൻ
PLWXQGVGDV0HVVHQGH ൹ ൻ
PLWRGHUGHQ'UXFNHLQVWHOOHQ 0
GU¾FNHQ:HUWZLUGJHVSHLFKHUW 1XOOELV]XP
(LQVDW]SXQN
SXQNWIHVW $SSOLFDUHODSUHVVLRQHSHU)0
3HUODFRUUHQWHGDLPSRVWDUH VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR VHOH]LRQDUHLOPRGR DSSOLFD]LRQH

GLDSSOLFD]LRQH
ILVVR
DP0HVVXPIRUPHUDQOHJHQ %HUHFKQXQJVIRUPHOVLHKH DXIGDVREHUH6HQVRUOLPLWVHW]HQ GHU0(HQWVSUHFKHQVROO9HUVWHOOG\QDPLN VXOWUDVPHWWLWRUH =HURILQRD
൹ ൻ
XQGVJHGU¾FNWKDOWHQ %HWULHEVDQOHLWXQJ.DSLWHO 0 0
/HLFKWVWHLJHQG GUXFN
OLQHDU ൹ ൻ
HWHQHUOLSUHPXWLSHUV VHFRQGRODIRUPXODGLFDOFROR ൹ ൻ
&RQHVLPSRVWDUHODILQH ൹ ൻ
&RQRLPSRVWDUHOD SXQWRGL SUHVVLRQH
OLQHDUH
GU¾FNHQ:HUWZLUGJHVSHLFKHUW GU¾FNHQ:HUWZLUGJHVSHLFKHUW (['DWHQ ELVGDQQ

YHGLLOFDSLWRORGHOOHLVWUX]LRQL GLPLVXUD]LRQHVXOOLPLWHVXSHULRUHGHO SUHVVLRQHFRUULVSRQGHQWHDOO
)0 'DWLVXOODSURWH]LRQH DSSOLFD]LRQH

XQGGDPLW0(DXIP$VHW]HQ OLQHDUELV]XP SHULPSRVWDUHO
)0VXP$ /HJJHUPHQWH
(LQVDW]SXQNW RSHUDWLYH VHQVRUH GLQDPLFDUHJROD]LRQH DQWLGHIODJUDQWH DVFHQGHQWH
VLHKH%HWULHEVDQOHLWXQJXQG
1RWDLWDVWLSRWUHEEHURHVVHUHEORFFDWL 0
SUHPHUHSHUPHPRUL]]DUHYDORUH 0
SUHPHUHSHUPHPRUL]]DUHYDORUH 9HGLLVWUX]LRQLRSHUDWLYHHFHUWLILFDWL ILQRD
+LQZHLV'LH%HGLHQWDVWHQN¸QQHQ .RQIRUPLW¦WVEHVFKHLQLJXQJHQ SRLOLQHDUHILQR
JHVSHUUWVHLQ7DVWDWXUVSHUUHDXIKHEHQ 'UXFN>@ 'LVDWWLYDUHLOEORFFRWDVWLHUD GLFRQIRUPLW¢ DOSXQWRGL 3UHVVLRQH>@
KWWSZZZVLHPHQVGHVLWUDQVS
VLHKH6HLWH YHGLSDJLQD KWWSZZZVLHPHQVFRPVLWUDQVS DSSOLFD]LRQH

&RPSDUWLPHQW &ODYLHU $IILFKDJHQXP«ULTXH /«JHQGH &RPPDQGH &RPPDQGH '«ILQLUG«EXWGHSODJHGHPHVXUH (VSD©RGHFRQH[¥R %RW·HV 0RVWUDGRUGLJLWDO /HJHQGD 2SHUD©¥R 2SHUD©¥R &RQILJXUDURLQ¯FLR

GHUDFFRUGHPHQW XWLOLVDWLRQVDQV«FUDQ &RQQH[LRQGHVEOLQGDJHV '0 G«EXWGHSODJHGHPHVXUH HWILQGHSODJHGHPHVXUH RSHUD©¥RVHPGLVSOD\ %OLQGDJHP 0$ ,Q¯FLRGDPHGL©¥R HRILPGDPHGL©¥R
'«SOLDQW «QHUJLHDX[LOLDLUH )0 ILQGHSODJHGHPHVXUH 0*«Q«UDWHXUGHFRXUDQW /HSRUHOOR (QHUJLDDX[LOLDU
൹HWൻV EDU (QHUJLDDX[LOLDU
0( )LPGDPHGL©¥R EDU
«QHUJLHDX[LOLDLUH
)LFKHWHVWSRXULQVWUXPHQWGHPHVXUH 0RGHG
DIILFKDJHHQP$bSUHVVLRQ $6LWXDWLRQGH )LFKDGHWHVWHSDUDDSDUHOKRGH 0RGRGHLQGLFD©¥RHPP$SUHVV¥R
03URGXWRUGHFRUUHQWH൹HൻV $6LWXD©¥R
P$
0 V9HUURXLOODJHGHVWRXFKHV GHFRXUDQWFRQWLQXH[WHUQH
0&RXUDQWGHG«IDXW G«SDUW P$
0 V PHGL©¥RH[WHUQRSDUDFRUUHQWH GHSDUWLGD
0'«ILQLUHWU«JOHU'0 HQKDXWHQEDV FRQW¯QXD 0&RUUHQWHGHDYDULDFLPDEDL[R
6,75$163 SURWHFWLRQG
«FULWXUH2)) 7DVWH0RGH 6,TRANS P %ORTXHLRGRVERW·HV 0FRQILJXUDUHDMXVWDU0$
0 0RGR

0 0RGH
7DVWH,QFUHPHQW %'«ILQLUG«EXW EDU %RW¥R0RGH &2SHUD©¥RFRQVWDQWH %&RQILJXUDU EDU

0'«ILQLUHWU«JOHU)0 09HUURXLOODJHGXFODYLHU GHSODJHGH SURWHF©¥RFRQWUDHVFULWD'(6 0%ORTXHLRERW·HVSURWHF©¥RHVFULWD LQ¯FLRGD
3'6,,,3
7DVWH'HFUHPHQW
9DOHXUGHPHVXUH SURWHFWLRQG
«FULWXUH PHVXUH P$ P310/DS III/P410
%RW¥RSDUDDXPHQWDU GHFRUUHQWH
%RW¥RSDUDGLPLQXLU /3URWHF©¥RFRQWUDHVFULWD
0FRQILJXUDUHDMXVWDU0( PHGL©¥R P$
05«JOHUDWW«QXDWLRQ SbH[bbEDUV /$%RW·HVEORTXHDGRV 0([WUDF©¥RUDL] ˂3 SH[EDU

DYHF+$57 8QLW«
%DUJUDSK
&0RGHFRXUDQWFRQVWDQW
0([WUDFWLRQGHVUDFLQHVSGLII &'«ILQLUILQ EDU
FRPHART 9DORUGHPHGL©¥R
/26µ0$SRGHVHU
8QLGDGHJU£ILFREDU FRQILJXUDGR
0DMXVWDUDPRUWHFLPHQWR
&&RQILJXUDU EDU
/3URWHFWLRQG
«FULWXUH
63$1 0HVXUH 05«JOHU¢O
DYHXJOH'0 GHSODJHGH 63$1 0HGL©¥RGHG«ELWR 03RQWRGHXWLOL]D©¥RGDUDL]˂3 LQ¯FLRGD

/$&ODYLHUYHUURXLOO«
03RLQWGHG«SDUWGHODUDFLQH SGLII
PHVXUH P$
/60$0(SRGHPVHU 0DMXVWDU0$EOLQG PHGL©¥R P$
1RWLFHG
XWLOLVDWLRQ/HSRUHOOR GHG«ELW /2VHXO'0G«ILQLVVDEOH

operação breve e resumida 0RGR FRQILJXUDGRV
/6'0HW)0G«ILQLVVDEOHV 05«JOHU¢O
DYHXJOH)0 SbH[bbEDUV //%ORTXHLRGRVERW·HV 0P$LQGLFD©¥RWLSRGHPHGL©¥R SH[EDU
$( //9HUURXLOODJHGXFODYLHU 0P$bDIILFKDJHGX $( DXWRUL]D©¥RDSHQDV 0DMXVWDU0(EOLQG
0RGH '&DOFXOHUFRXUDQWGHVRUWLHSbH[bbEDUV '&DOFXODUDFRUUHQWHGHVD¯GDSH[EDU
G«FOHQFKHPHQW 05«JODJHGX]«UR W\SHGHPHVXUH EDUEDU
DWUDY«VGH+$57 0P$XQLGDGH EDUEDU
9HXLOOH]UHVSHFWHUOHV XQLTXHPYLD+$57
, P$P$ P$ $QWHVGDLQVWDOD©¥RH 0HTXDOL]D©¥RGR]HUR , P$P$ P$
0 0P$bXQLW« EDUEDU 0 /LPLWHGHFRUUHQWHLQIHULRUDOFDQ©DGR EDUEDU
LQVWUXFWLRQVGHVHUYLFH /LPLWHGHFRXUDQWLQI«ULHXUHDWWHLQWH FRORFD©¥RHPIXQFLRQDPHQWR 6LQDOSDUDRYDORUGHPHGL©¥R
6\PEROHV 6LJQHSRXUODYDOHXUGHPHVXUH &RQGLWLRQbYRLULQVWUXFWLRQVGHVHUYLFH «QHFHVV£ULRUHVSHLWDUR 6¯PERORV /LPLWHGHFRUUHQWHVXSHULRUDOFDQ©DGR 0 0HPRUL]DUYDORU

ൻ
൹ RXDOWHUDUYDORU &RQGL©¥RYHUPDQXDOGHLQVWUX©·HV
DYDQWO
LQVWDOODWLRQHW
/LPLWHGHFRXUDQWVXS«ULHXUHDWWHLQWH
0 (QUHJLVWUHUYDOHXU
ൻ
൹ RXPRGLILHUYDOHXU FKDSLWUH PDQXDOGHLQVWUX©·HV ,QGLFD©¥RGDFRPXQLFD©¥R 0 )LQDOL]DUVHPPHPRUL]DU FDS¯WXOR
ODPLVHHQVHUYLFH =(52 ൻ =(52
൹ ൻ
HFRQILJXUDUYDORU
$IILFKDJHGHODFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
൹ HWG«ILQLUYDOHXU 0 7HUPLQHUVDQVHQUHJLVWUHU

ಯ
'«ILQLUG«EXWGHSODJH 5«JOHUG«EXWGHSODJH 5«JOHUILQGHSODJH '«ILQLUm¢O
DYHXJOH} 5«JOHUm¢O
DYHXJOH} 5«JODJHGX]«UR 3RLQWGHG«SDUW 0DUTXH):+: &RQILJXUDULQ¯FLRGDPHGL©¥R $MXVWDURLQ¯FLRGDPHGL©¥R $MXVWDURILPGDPHGL©¥R &RQILJXUDURLQ¯FLRGDPHGL©¥R $MXVWDURLQ¯FLRGDPHGL©¥R (TXDOL]D©¥RGR]HUR 3RQWRGHXWLOL]D©¥RGDFXUYD ,GHQWLILFD©¥R):+:
GHPHVXUH GHPHVXUH GHPHVXUH G«EXWGHSODJHGHPHVXUH G«EXWGHSODJHGHPHVXUH 6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH GHODFRXUEHFDUDFW«ULVWLTXH ¢OLUHVXUODSODTXHVLJQDO«WLTXH 6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR 6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR 6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR ಯEOLQGರ6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR ಯEOLQGರ6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR 6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR FDUDFWHU¯VWLFDDVHUH[WUD¯GD SRGHPVHUFRQVXOWDGRVQDSODFDGH
6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH 6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH 6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH 6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH 6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH GHO
H[WUDFWLRQGHUDFLQH KRPRORJD©¥R
$SSOLTXHUSUHVVLRQTXLFRUUHVSRQGDX $SSOLTXHUODSUHVVLRQGHU«I«UHQFH $SSOLTXHUODSUHVVLRQGHU«I«UHQFH '«ILQLUOHG«EXWGHSODJHGHPHVXUH ൹ ൻ
5«JOHUDYHFRXODSUHVVLRQ
$«UHUWUDQVPHWWHXURXU«JOHUODSUHVVLRQ ):DDEEFF ,QGLFDUDSUHVV¥RTXHFRUUHVSRQGH &ULDUDSUHVV¥RGHUHIHU¬QFLD &ULDUDSUHVV¥RGHUHIHU¬QFLD ൹ ൻ
FRPHVHJXQGRV ൹ ൻ
FRPRXDMXVWDUDSUHVV¥RTXH 9HQWLODURWUDQVPLVVRUGHSUHVV¥RRX
GHU«I«UHQFHFRQQXH>(YDFXHUOH '«ELW>@ DR0$QRWUDQVPLVVRUGHSUHVV¥R &RQHFWDURDSDUHOKRGHPHGL©¥RGD &RQHFWDURDSDUHOKRGHPHGL©¥RGD FRQILJXUDURLQ¯FLRGDPHGL©¥RSDUDR GHYHFRUUHVSRQGHUDR0$GLQ¤PLFDGH DMXVWDUDSUHVV¥RGHUHIHU¬QFLDFRQKHFLGD '«ELWR>@ ):DDEEFF
'0VXUOHWUDQVPHWWHXU 5DFFRUGHUO
LQVWUXPHQWGHPHVXUH 5DFFRUGHUO
LQVWUXPHQWGHPHVXUH ൻ TXLGRLWFRUUHVSRQGUHDX'0 +:[[\\]]
൹
DYHFHWV WUDQVPHWWHXUSRXUSUHVVLRQDEVROXHbಽ DYHFH[WUDFWLRQ
൹ ൻ
HPDQWHUSUHPLGRGXUDQWH FRUUHQWHFRQW¯QXDUHFRPHQGDGR FRUUHQWHFRQW¯QUHFRPHQGDGR >(YDFXDUWUDQVPLVVRUSDUDSUHVV¥R H[WUDF©¥RGDUDL]
+:[[\\]]
൹ ൻ
HWPDLQWHQLUDSSX\«V GHFRXUDQWFRQWLQXUHFRPPDQG« GHFRXUDQWFRQWLQXUHFRPPDQG« VXUODOLPLWHLQI«ULHXUHGXFDSWHXU G\QDPLTXHGHU«JODJH
GHODJDPPHGHPHVXUH@
GHUDFLQH
VHJXQGRVHDVVLPFRQILJXUDU0$ ൹ ൻ
FRPRXDMXVWDU0$ ൹ ൻ
FRPRXDMXVWDU0(
OLPLWHLQIHULRUGRVHQVRU DMXVWH
DEVROXWDಽGRLQWHUYDORGH
HWDLQVLG«ILQLU'0VXUbP$ ൹ ൻ
5«JOHU'0DYHFRX ൹ ൻ
5«JOHU)0DYHFRX 0
DSSX\HUVXU0HQUHJLVWUHUYDOHXU 0
DSSX\HUVXU0HQUHJLVWUHUYDOHXU
3ODJHGH

SDUDP$ GLQ¤PLFDGHDMXVWH GLQ¤PLFDGHDMXVWH SUHVVLRQDUPHPRUL]DUYDORU
0 SUHVVLRQDUPHPRUL]DUYDORU
0 PHGL©¥R@ UHDGHDMXVWH

G\QDPLTXHGHU«JODJH G\QDPLTXHGHU«JODJH U«JODJHSRXU SDUDSRQWRGH
'«ILQLUILQGHSODJH ൹ ൻ
'«ILQLUOHSRLQW]«URDYHFHW SRLQWGHG«SDUW
&RQILJXUDURILPGDPHGL©¥R 0
HFRPPHPRUL]DU0$ 0
HFRPPHPRUL]DU0( &RQILJXUDURILPGDPHGL©¥R $MXVWDURILPGDPHGL©¥RಯEOLQGರ FRPHFRQILJXUDURSRQWR]HUR
൹ ൻ XWLOL]D©¥R
0
DSSX\HUVXU0HQUHJLVWUHU'0 0
DSSX\HUVXU0HQUHJLVWUHU)0 '«ILQLUm¢O
DYHXJOH} 5«JOHUm¢O
DYHXJOH}
GHPHVXUH ൹ ൻ
5«JOHUOHSRLQW]«URDYHFRX OLQ«DLUH 3RLQWGHG«SDUW 6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR ಯEOLQGರ6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR 6HOHFFLRQDURPRGR ൹ ൻ
PLWRXDMXVWDURSRQWR]HUR /LQHDUDW«DR 3RQWRGHXWLOL]D©¥R
6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH ILQGHSODJHGHPHVXUHb ILQGHSODJHGHPHVXUH MXVTX
DXSRLQW
SRXUSRLQWGH SRQWRGH
SDUD3RQWR
$SSOLTXHUSUHVVLRQTXLFRUUHVSRQGDX 6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH 6«OHFWLRQQHUPRGH 0

DSSX\HUVXU0HQUHJLVWUHUYDOHXU GHG«SDUW
G«SDUWIL[H ,QGLFDUDSUHVV¥RTXHFRUUHVSRQGH &RUUHQWHDVHUDMXVWDGDGH ൹ ൻ
FRPHVHJXQGRV ൹ ൻ
FRPRXDMXVWDUDSUHVV¥RTXH 0
SUHVVLRQDUPHPRUL]DUYDORU XWLOL]D©¥R
GHXWLOL]D©¥RIL[R
FRXUDQW¢U«JOHUVHORQODIRUPXOH DR0(QRWUDQVPLVVRUGHSUHVV¥R DFRUGRFRPDIµUPXODGHF£OFXOR RQILJXUDURILPGDPHGL©¥RSDUDROLPLWH
)0VXUOHWUDQVPHWWHXU GHFDOFXOYRLULQVWUXFWLRQVGH '«ILQLUODILQGHSODJHGHPHVXUH ൹ ൻ
5«JOHUDYHFRXODSUHVVLRQ QXOMXVTX
DX
SRLQWGHG«SDUW
OLQ«DLUH
SUHVVLRQ
൹ ൻ
HPDQWHUSUHPLGRGXUDQWH YHUPDQXDOGHLQVWUX©·HV VXSHULRUGRVHQVRU
GHYHFRUUHVSRQGHUDR0(GLQ¤PLFDGH =HURDW«DR
SRQWRGH
SUHVV¥R
OLQHDU
൹ ൻ
HWPDLQWHQLUDSSX\«V VHUYLFHFKDSLWUH ൹ ൻ
DYHFHWV TXLGRLWFRUUHVSRQGUHDX)0 'RQQ«HVSRXUOHV]RQHV
DMXVWH 'DGRV([ XWLOL]D©¥R

$XJPHQWDQW VHJXQGRVHDVVLPFRQILJXUDU0( FDS¯WXOR 0
SUHVVLRQDUPHPRUL]DUYDORU /LJHLUDPHQWH
HWDLQVLG«ILQLU)0VXUbP$ VXUODOLPLWHVXS«ULHXUHGXFDSWHXU G\QDPLTXHGHU«JODJH ¢DWPRVSKªUHH[SORVLEOH O«JªUHPHQW SDUDP$ 0
SUHVVLRQDUPHPRUL]DUYDORU DVFHQGHQWHDW«
MXVTX
¢b YHUPDQXDOGHLQVWUX©·HVH
5HPDUTXH/HVWRXFKHVGHFRPPDQGH 0
DSSX\HUVXU0HQUHJLVWUHUYDOHXU 0
DSSX\HUVXU0HQUHJLVWUHUYDOHXU 9RLULQVWUXFWLRQVGHVHUYLFHHW SXLVOLQ«DLUHPHQW 1RWDRVERW·HVGHFRPDQGRSRGHPVHU GHFODUD©¥RGHFRQIRUPLGDGH
GHSRLV
OLQHDUDW«DR
FHUWLILFDWVGHFRQIRUPLW«b MXVTX
DXSRLQW 3UHVVLRQ>@ 3UHVV¥R>@
SHXYHQW¬WUHYHUURXLOO«HV$QQXOHU GHG«SDUW EORTXHDGRV6XVSHQGHUREORTXHLR KWWSZZZVLHPHQVFRPVLWUDQVS SRQWRGHXWLOL]D©¥R
YHUURXLOODJHGXFODYLHUYRLUSDJH KWWSZZZVLHPHQVFRPVLWUDQVS GRVERW·HVYHUS£JLQD
䘎᧕ⴂ 䭞ⴈ ᱮ⽪ቿ മֻ ᫽֌ ᫽֌ 䇮㖞л䲀٬

˄н֯⭘ᱮ⽪ቿ䇮㖞˅ ቿ㭭䘎᧕ /59 л䲀٬ ઼к䲀٬
/HSRUHOOR ⭥Ⓚ 859 к䲀٬
⭥Ⓚ EDU
⭘Ҿཆ䜘ⴤ⍱⭥⍱㺘 ᱮ⽪⁑ᔿ˄অսP$ˈ঻࣋Ⲯ࠶∄˅ 0⭥⍱ਈ䘱ಘˈ֯⭘Ė઼Ę䈳ᮤᒦ᤹տV $ࡍ࿻
P$
0 V䭞ⴈ䬱ᇊ Ⲵ⍻䈅ᨂཤ ⣦ߥ
⁑ᔿ䭞 0䇮㖞ᒦ䈳ᮤ/59 0᭵䳌⭥⍱к䲀л䲀
᭟ᤱ+$57Ⲵ6,75$163 ߉‫؍‬ᣔĀ‫ޣ‬䰝ā
0 ⁑ᔿ
໎䟿䭞 %䇮㖞л EDU

3'6,,,3 ߿䟿䭞 0䇮㖞ᒦ䈳ᮤ859 0䭞ⴈ⾱⭘ˈਚ䈫䲀٬
˄ֻྲˈEDU˅ P$
⍻䟿٬
㔤ᓖ 0䈳ᮤ䱫ቬ 0ᒣᯩṩ3
&ᚂᇊ⭥⍱⁑ᔿ
ἂമ &䇮㖞 EDU
ᘛ䙏੟ࣘᤷই 䟿䐍 ⍱䟿
/ਚ䈫
/$䭞ⴈᐢ⾱⭘ 0൘ᰐ঻࣋Ⲵᛵߥлˈ䈳ᮤ/59 0≲ᒣᯩṩ䎧⛩3 к䲀٬
/HSRUHOOR ⍻䟿 /2ӵਟ䇮㖞/59 ˄ֻྲˈEDU˅ P$
/6ਟ䇮㖞/59઼859 0൘ᰐ঻࣋Ⲵᛵߥлˈ䈳ᮤ859 0P$⍻䟿⁑ᔿ
$(ˈ ⁑ᔿ
//⾱⭘䭞ⴈ '䇑㇇䗃ࠪ⭥⍱˄ֻྲˈEDU˅
˄ӵ䙊䗷+$57੟⭘˅
0䴦⛩䈳ᮤ 0P$ቪረ EDUEDU
ᆹ㻵઼੟ࣘ ⭥⍱л䲀
, P$P$ P$
ࡽ䈧৲㿱
0 EDUEDU
ㅖਧ
⍻䟿٬ㅖਧ
⭥⍱к䲀
0 ‫؍‬ᆈ٬ ൻ
൹ ᡆᴤ᭩٬ ࡽᨀᶑԦ˖䈧৲㿱ㅜ㢲Ā᫽֌䈤᰾ā
Ā᫽֌䈤᰾āʽ
䴦⛩ 䙊ؑᱮ⽪
൹ ൻ
઼䇮㖞٬ 0 䘰ࠪ㘼н‫؍‬ᆈ

䇮㖞л䲀٬˖ 䈳ᮤл䲀٬˖ 䈳ᮤк䲀٬˖ ൘нᯭ࣐঻࣋Ⲵᛵߥлˈ ൘нᯭ࣐঻࣋Ⲵᛵߥлˈ 䴦⛩䈳ᮤ˖ ≲ പԦ⺜Ԧ⡸ᵜ

䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ 䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ 䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ 䇮㖞л䲀٬˖ 䈳ᮤл䲀٬˖ 䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ ᒣᯩṩ⢩ᙗ ਟӾᢩ߶ḷㆮѝ䈫ਆ˖
䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ 䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ ᧂオਈ䘱ಘᡆ䈳ᮤᐢ⸕৲㘳঻࣋ Ⲵᓄ⭘⛩
ሶ/59ሩᓄⲴ঻࣋ ᯭ࣐৲㘳঻࣋ ᯭ࣐৲㘳঻࣋
ᯭ࣐ࡠਈ䘱ಘ 䘎᧕ⴤ⍱⭥⍱㺘䘎᧕ⴤ⍱⭥⍱㺘 ൹ ൻ
֯⭘઼ሶ ൹ ൻ
֯⭘ᡆ䈳ᮤ >ሩ㔍ሩ঻࣋⍻䟿Րᝏಘ䘋㹼߿঻ ⍱䟿>@ പԦ˖DDEEFF
൹ ൻ
઼᤹տV ˄᧘㦀˅ ˄᧘㦀˅ л䲀٬䇮㖞ѪՐᝏಘл䲀V /59ሩᓄⲴ঻࣋˄ਟਈ䙏ᓖ˅ ˄ሿҾ⍻䟿㤳തⲴă˅@ ≲ᒣᯩṩ ⺜Ԧ˖[[\\]]
൹ ൻ
֯⭘ᡆ䈳ᮤ/59 ൹ ൻ
֯⭘ᡆ䈳ᮤ859 0
᤹ˈ‫؍‬ᆈ٬ 0
᤹ˈ‫؍‬ᆈ٬ ൹ ൻ
֯⭘઼䇮㖞䴦⛩

ሶ/59䇮㖞ѪP$ ˄ਟਈ䙏ᓖ˅ ˄ਟਈ䙏ᓖ˅ ൹ ൻ
֯⭘ᡆ䈳ᮤ䴦⛩ ᓄ⭘⛩Ⲵ
0
ᒦ֯⭘‫؍‬ᆈ/59 0
ᒦ֯⭘‫؍‬ᆈ859 ᤹ˈ‫؍‬ᆈ٬
0 ৲ᮠ
䇮㖞к䲀٬˖ ൘нᯭ࣐঻࣋Ⲵᛵߥлˈ ൘нᯭ࣐঻࣋Ⲵᛵߥлˈ 㤳ത
䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ 䇮㖞к䲀٬˖ 䈳ᮤк䲀٬˖ പᇊ
㓯ᙗкॷ ᓄ⭘⛩Ⲵ
ሶ859ሩᓄⲴ঻࣋ 䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ 䘹ᤙ⁑ᔿ ࡠᓄ⭘
ᓄ⭘⛩
ṩᦞ䇑㇇‫ޜ‬ᔿ ൹ ൻ
ᯭ࣐ࡠਈ䘱ಘ 䈳ᮤ⭥⍱ˈ䈧৲㿱
֯⭘઼ሶ ൹ ൻ
֯⭘ᡆ䈳ᮤ ⛩
঻࣋
൹ ൻ
઼᤹տV ㅜ㢲Ā᫽֌䈤᰾ā к䲀٬䇮㖞ѪՐᝏಘк䲀V 859ሩᓄⲴ঻࣋˄ਟਈ䙏ᓖ˅
䱴࣐ᮠᦞ Ӿ䴦кॷࡠ
ᓄ⭘⛩

㓯ᙗ
0
᤹ˈ‫؍‬ᆈ٬ 0
᤹ˈ‫؍‬ᆈ٬
ሶ859䇮㖞ѪP$ 䈧৲㿱Ā᫽֌䈤᰾ā઼ਸṬ䇱Җʽ ធធкॷ
⌘᜿˖䘉Ӌ䭞ਟ㜭ᐢ⾱⭘ʽ KWWSZZZVLHPHQVFRPVLWUDQVS ࡠˈ
❦ਾ㓯ᙗкॷ ঻࣋>@
ࡐ䲔䭞ⴈ⾱⭘ ࡠ
䈧৲㿱ㅜ亥 ᓄ⭘⛩

Siemens Sitrans P DS III - Press. Trans. Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Sitrans P DS III - Press. Trans. Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

© Siemens AG 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/193

1/194 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

1 Measuring cell sensor

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/195

Measuring cell for gauge pressure, function diagram

Function diagram of electronics

1/196 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

1 Flange with tube 6 Silicon pressure sensor

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/197

1/198 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/199

1/200 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/201

1/202 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/203

1/204 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

• Standard version, German plate inscription, 1 is silicone oil.

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/205

Version is silicone oil.

1/206 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/207

1) Measuring accuracies for PROFIBUS PA transmitters with Option Y01 are

1/208 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Space for rotation

1 Electronic side, digital display 5 Protective cover over keys

SITRANS P DS III pressure transmitters for gauge pressure, dimensions in mm (inch)

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/209

1/244 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Electrical damping (step width 0.1 s) Set to 2 s (0 ... 100 s)

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/245

1/246 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Separate 24 V power supply necessary - No

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/247

1/248 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/249

1/250 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/251

1/252 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/253

1/254 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/255

1/256 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens FI 01 · 2018 1/257

1 Electronic side, digital display 6 Blanking plug

1/258 Siemens FI 01 · 2018

Siemens AG Order number: A5E00047092 Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART

4.1.2 Proper mounting..................................................................................................................... 41

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART

6.5.5.5 Blind adjustment of the full scale value...................................................................................93

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART

7.20 Flow rate measurement (only differential pressure) ............................................................ 136

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART

10.2.1 Defining the maintenance interval ........................................................................................178

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART

A.4 Overview of HART operating structure ................................................................................ 240

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART

SITRANS P DS III and SITRANS P410

1.2 Product information

SITRANS P DS III/P410 with HART

The documentation of this edition applies to the following firmware:

1.4 Scope of the instructions